advertisement
M4300 Series and M4300-96X
Fully Managed Switches
User Manual
Software Version 12.0.6
June 2018
202-11865-02
350 East Plumeria Drive
San Jose, CA 95134
USA
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Support
Thank you for purchasing this NETGEAR product. You can visit www.netgear.com/support to register your product, get help, access the latest downloads and user manuals, and join our community. We recommend that you use only official NETGEAR support resources.
Conformity
For the current EU Declaration of Conformity, visit http://kb.netgear.com/app/answers/detail/a_id/11621 .
Compliance
For regulatory compliance information, visit http://www.netgear.com/about/regulatory .
See the regulatory compliance document before connecting the power supply.
Trademarks
© NETGEAR, Inc., NETGEAR, and the NETGEAR Logo are trademarks of NETGEAR, Inc. Any non-NETGEAR trademarks are used for reference purposes only.
Revision History
Publication Part
Number
Publish Date Comments
202-11865-02 June 2018
202-11865-01 April 2018
We made the following major changes:
• Revised
Slot-Based Port Numbering on page 17
•
Revised
• Revised
Available Publications and Online Help on page 19.
•
Revised
Slot and Port Numbering for Switch Model M4300-96X on page 23.
•
Revised
View or Define System Information on page 36
•
Revised
Configure an SNTP Server on page 70
•
Revised
Configure Global DNS Settings on page 77
•
Added
Configure and Display Bonjour Settings on page 91
•
Added
Configure Expandable Port Settings on page 265.
• Revised
View Port and EAP Packet Statistics on page 619
We made minor changes and additions to other sections.
First publication.
2
Contents
Chapter 1 Getting Started
New Features for Switch Model M4300-96X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Software Requirements for Using the Local Browser Interface. . . . . . . . . . . 20
Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Local Browser Interface Buttons and User-Defined Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Slot and Port Numbering for Switch Model M4300-96X . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 2 Configure System Information
Configure the Initial IPv4 Management VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Configure the Initial IPv6 Management VLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
View the Temperature Sensor Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Configure and View Information About Slots and Port Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Configure the Switch Database Management Template Preference . . . . . . . . . 80
Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configure Green Ethernet Local and Remote Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Configure Green Ethernet Remote Device Details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Configure the Green Ethernet EEE LPI History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Configure Global DHCP L2 Relay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
View DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Configure UDP Relay Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Enable or Disable the DHCPv6 Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Configure the DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Configure DHCPv6 Interface Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
View DHCPv6 Bindings Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Configure DHCPv6 Relay for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Configure the SNMP V1/V2 Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View LLDP Remote Device Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
View LLDP Remote Device Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Configure LLDP-MED Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
View LLDP-MED Local Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
View LLDP-MED Remote Device Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
View LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Configure a Link Dependency Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Chapter 3 Stacking
M4300 Series Switch Stacking Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Change the Settings for an Existing Stack Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Configure the Mode of the Stack Ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Configure Stack Firmware Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Chapter 4 Configure Switching Information
5
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Reset the VLAN Configuration to Default Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Configure an IP Subnet-Based VLAN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
View the Spanning Tree MST Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
6
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Configure a MLD Snooping Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Enable or Disable a Multicast Router on an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configure Multicast Router VLAN Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Configure MVR Group Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Loop Protection and PDU Packet Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Loop Protection and Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Configure the Global Loop Protection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Configure the Loop Protection Settings for Ports and View the
Chapter 5 Routing
7
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
View the IPv6 Neighbor Table and Clear IPv6 Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Display the ARP Entries in the ARP Cache. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Configure Advanced RIP Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Configure an Advanced VRRP Secondary IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Configure an Advanced VRRP Tracking Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Chapter 6 OSPF and OSPFv3
Configure the OSPF Default Route Advertise Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Configure the OSPF Common Area ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
8
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View and Clear OSPF Statistics for an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
View the OSPF Neighbor Table and Clear OSPF Neighbors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Configure the OSPF Route Redistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Configure OSPFv3 Default Route Advertise Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Configure the Advanced OSPFv3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Configure the OSPFv3 Common Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
View and Clear OSPFv3 Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
View the OSPFv3 Neighbor Table and Clear OSPFv3 Neighbors . . . . . . . . . 395
View the OSPFv3 Link State Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Configure OSPFv3 Route Redistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Chapter 7 Multicast Routing
Configure Global Multicast DVMRP Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
View the DVMRP Next Hop Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Configure the IGMP Routing Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
View the IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
View the IGMP Proxy Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Configure the Multicast PIM Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
View the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
9
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Configure the PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
Configure the PIM Static Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Configure the IPv6 PIM Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Configure the IPv6 PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Configure the IPv6 PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate Settings . . . . . . . . . . 443
Configure the IPv6 PIM Static Rendezvous Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Configure the IPv6 MLD Routing Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
View IPv6 MLD Routing Interface Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Configure the IPv6 MLD Proxy Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
View IPv6 MLD Proxy Interface Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
View the IPv6 MLD Proxy Membership . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Chapter 8 Configure Quality of Service
Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Configure CoS Drop Precedence Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Configure the DiffServ Service Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
10
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Chapter 9 Manage Device Security
Configure Global RADIUS Server Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Configure RADIUS Accounting Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Configure the Dot1x Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Configure an HTTPS Authentication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Configure Access Rule Settings for the Access Control Profile . . . . . . . . . . 529
Configure the Global Port Security Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
11
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Convert Learned MAC Addresses to Static Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Configure Private Group Membership. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
Configure Private VLAN Association Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Configure the Private VLAN Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Configure a Private VLAN Host Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Configure a Private VLAN Promiscuous Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Configure Global Storm Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Configure DHCP Snooping Global Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Configure a DHCP Snooping Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Configure a Static DHCP Snooping Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
View the Dynamic DHCP Snooping Bindings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Configure Snooping Persistent Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
View and Clear the DHCP Snooping Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Configure IP Source Guard Binding Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
Configure IPv6 Source Guard Interface Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Configure an IPv6 Source Guard Binding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Configure the Global Dynamic ARP inspection Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
Configure Captive Portal Global Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
Configure the Captive Portal Trap Flag Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
View and Clear the Captive Portal Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Use the ACL Wizard to Create a Simple ACL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Configure an ACL Based on Destination MAC Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Use the ACL Wizard to Complete the Destination MAC ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
12
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View and Delete MAC ACL Bindings in the MAC Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . 596
Configure Rules for an Extended IP ACL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
View and Delete IP ACL Bindings in the IP ACL Binding Table . . . . . . . . . . . 615
Chapter 10 Monitor the System
View and Clear the Detailed Port Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Manage the Buffered, Command, and Console Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
Configure the Syslog and Syslog Host Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Globally Configure Multiple Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
Configure The Port Mirroring Source Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
Configure the RSPAN Destination Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
Configure Basic sFlow Agent Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Configure sFlow Agent Advanced Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650
Chapter 11 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
Reset the Switch to Its Factory Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657
13
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Reset All User Passwords to Their Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658
Upload a File from the Switch to a USB Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
Download a File to the Switch Using HTTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
Appendix A Default Settings
Appendix B Configuration Examples
Standard IP ACL Sample Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
Appendix C
Acronyms and Abbreviations
14
1.
Getting Started
This chapter provides an overview of how you can using your switch and access the local browser–based management interface.
The chapter contains the following sections:
•
Supported Switches
•
New Features for Switch Model M4300-96X
•
Available Publications and Online Help
•
Register Your Product
•
Understanding the User Interfaces
•
Local Browser Interface Overview
•
Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In
•
Using SNMP
Note: For more information about the topics covered in this manual, visit the support website at
netgear.com/support
.
1
Note: Firmware updates with new features and bug fixes are made available from time to time at
downloadcenter.netgear.com
. Some products can regularly check the site and download new firmware, or you can check for and download new firmware manually. If the features or behavior of your product does not match what is described in this guide, you might need to update your firmware.
15
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Supported Switches
This release and this user manual are for the following M4300 switch models:
• Full 10G models:
M4300-8X8F . Full 10G switch model with eight 10G copper ports and eight 10G fiber ports in a half-width chassis
M4300-12X12F . Full 10G switch model with twelve 10G copper ports and twelve 10G fiber ports in a half-width chassis
M4300-24X24F . Full 10G switch model with twenty-four 10G copper ports and twenty four 10G fiber ports in a full-width chassis
• 1G models with 10G uplinks:
M4300-28G . Switch model with twenty-four 1G copper ports, two 10G copper ports, and two 10G fiber ports in a full-width chassis
M4300-28G-POE+ . Switch model with twenty-four 1G copper PoE+ ports, two 10G copper ports, and two 10G fiber ports in a full-width chassis
M4300-52G . Switch model with forty-eight 1G copper ports, two 10G copper ports, and two 10G fiber ports in a full-width chassis
M4300-52G-POE+ . Switch model with forty-eight 1G copper PoE+ ports, two 10G copper ports, and two 10G fiber ports in a full-width chassis
• 10G models with RJ45/SFP+ combo ports:
M4300-24X . Switch model with twenty copper RJ45 ports and four 10G RJ45/SFP+ combo ports in a half-width chassis
M4300-48X . Switch model with forty-four copper RJ45 ports and four 10G
RJ45/SFP+ combo ports in a full-width chassis
• 10G modular chassis model:
M4300-96X . Modular chassis model for up to 12 port cards and slot-based port numbering. For more information, see
New Features for Switch Model M4300-96X
New Features for Switch Model M4300-96X
For hardware information about switch model M4300-96X, including information about supported port cards, power supply units (PSUs), and Power over Ethernet (PoE) budgets, see the
Fully Managed Stackable Switch M4300-96X Hardware Installation Guide
.
This section describes the new features that this release supports for switch model
M4300-96X.
Getting Started
16
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Slot-Based Port Numbering
All physical ports on switch model M4300-96X are based on slots. Because this model supports 12 slots and each port card provides eight ports, the port numbering is in the format
unit number/slot number/port number
.
APM408C, APM408P, and APM408F Port Cards
For the APM408C, APM408P, and APM408F port cards, the numbering is as follows:
• The unit is the number that is assigned to the switch, either automatically generated and assigned by the system, or manually assigned. The unit range is from 1 to 8.
• The slot is one of 12 slots that this model supports. Therefore, the slot number ranges from 1 to 12.
• Each slot can accommodate one port card, and each port card provides eight ports.
Therefore, the port range is from 1 to 8.
For example, the fifth port in the sixth slot of a switch model M4300-96X with a unit number 1 is designated as 1/6/5. Similarly, the very first port on the switch is 1/1/1 and the very last port is 1/12/8.
APM402XL Port Card
The numbering of the ports on the APM402XL port card is different from the other port cards.
You can use a 40G port either with a break-out cable, in which case the single 40G port can support up to four individual 10G ports, or with a connection to another single 40G port.
•
Port 1 (the left 40G port on the port card) uses the following numbering:
If connected with a break-out cable to four individual 10G ports, the port numbers are
1, 2, 3, and 4.
If connected to another single 40G port, the port number is 1. In that situation, only port number 1 is used and port numbers 2, 3, and 4 are not used on the port card.
• Port 2 (the right 40G port on the port card) uses the following numbering:
-
If connected with a break-out cable to four individual 10G ports, the port numbers are
5, 6, 7, and 8.
-
If connected to another single 40G port, the port number is 5. In that situation, only port number 5 is used and port numbers 6, 7, and 8 are not used on the port card.
For example, if a switch with unit number 1 includes an APM402XL port card in slot 9, port 1 on the port card is connected to four individual port cards, and port 2 on the port card is connected to another single 40G port, the port numbering is as follows: 1/9/1, 1/9/2, 1/9/3,
1/9/4, and 1/9/5.
By default, the 40G ports on the APM402XL port card (that is, port 1 and port 5) are active, which means that they are in the attached state, can be detected, and you can use them. The expandable 10G ports on the APM402XL port card (that is, ports 2–4 on the first 40G port and ports 6–8 on the second 40G port) are nonactive, which means that they are in the detached state and you cannot use them. However, you can configure them to be in the attached state so that you can use them (see
Configure Expandable Port Settings on page 265).
Getting Started
17
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Slot Configuration
By default, the slots of the M4300-96X are configured as
empty
slots, that is, as slots in which no port cards are installed. None of the slots are preconfigured. For information about configuring slots, see
Configure and View Information About Slots and Port Cards
PoE Operation and Configuration
The PoE feature supports port cards in the slots of switch model M4300-96X:
• When you start switch model M4300-96 with APM408P PoE port cards already installed, the switch initializes these port cards for PoE operation. Any existing configurations for the slots is automatically applied. Therefore, PoE is operational immediately after the switch completes its startup process.
• When you install one or more APM408P PoE port cards while switch model M4300-96 is operating, the switch detects these modules, initializes them, and automatically apples any existing configurations for the slots.
• When you remove one or more APM408P PoE port cards while switch model M4300-96 is operating, the switch detects the absence of these port cards and automatically adjusts the configuration.
Power management enhances PoE functionality through the following features:
• Priority-based dynamic power management
• Automatic power rebalancing to meet the PoE power demand if system power is limited
• Automatic detection of insertion and removal of a power supply unit (PSU) and automatic recalculation of the available power
PoE firmware updates occur on a slot basis (that is, for each APM408P port card).
For more information about PoE, see
Configure Power over Ethernet
Stacking
You can configure all ports on switch model M4300-96X as stacking ports. However, a limit of a maximum of 16 active stacking links applies.
The APM402XL port card supports stacking over 40G ports only (that is, over port 1 and port 5 only). When you expands the ports, you cannot use the 10G ports for stacking.
For more information about stacking, see
Chapter 3, Stacking
Getting Started
18
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Available Publications and Online Help
A number of publications are available at
downloadcenter.netgear.com
, including the following publication:
•
The installation guide for your switch and for the components:
-
Installation Guide NETGEAR ProSAFE Managed Switches M4300 Series
-
Installation Guide Fully Managed Switches Model M4300-96X
-
Installation Guide Fully Managed Switch Port Cards APM408C, APM408P, APM408F, and APM402XL
-
Installation Guide NETGEAR Power Supplies Units for Managed Switches,
APS150W, APS250W, APS550W, APS1000W, APS600W, and APS1200W
• The hardware installation guide for your switch:
-
Hardware Installation Guide Fully Managed Stackable Switches Series M4300
-
Hardware Installation Guide Fully Managed Stackable Switch M4300-96X
•
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches Software Administration Manual
•
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches CLI Command Reference
Manual
•
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
(this manual)
•
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches Software Setup Manual
You can also access this document online when you are logged in to the switch. Select
Help > Online Help > User Guide.
When you log into the local browser interface, online help is available. See
Online Help
Register Your Product
The first time you log in to the switch, you are given the option of registering with NETGEAR.
Registration confirms that your e-mail alerts work, lowers technical support resolution time, and ensures that your shipping address accuracy. NETGEAR would also like to incorporate your feedback into future product development. NETGEAR never sells or rents your e-mail address and you can opt out of communications at any time.
To register with NETGEAR when you are prompted, click the REGISTER NOW button.
Getting Started
19
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Understanding the User Interfaces
The switch software includes a set of comprehensive management functions for configuring and monitoring the system by using one of the following methods:
• Local browser–based management interface (in this manual referred to as the local browser interface), either over an Ethernet network port or over the out-of-band
(OOB) port (also referred to as the service port)
• Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
• Command-line interface (CLI)
Each of the standards-based management methods allows you to configure and monitor the components of the switch The method you use to manage the system depends on your network size and requirements, and on your preference.
This manual describes how to use the local browser interface to manage and monitor the system.
Local Browser Interface Overview
Your switch contains an embedded web server and management software for managing and monitoring switch functions. The switch functions as a simple switch without the management software. However, you can use the management software to configure more advanced features that can improve switch efficiency and overall network performance.
The local browser interface is a web-based management tool that lets you monitor, configure, and control your switch remotely using a standard web browser. From your web browser, you can monitor the performance of your switch and optimize its configuration for your network.
You can configure all switch features, such as VLANs, QoS, and ACLs, by using the local browser interface.
Software Requirements for Using the Local Browser Interface
To access the switch by using a web browser, the browser must meet the following software requirements:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 or 11
• Microsoft Edge 25
• Google Chrome 44 or 45
• Mozilla Firefox 40 or 40.6.01
• Apple Safari on OS X 9.0
Note: Other and later versions might work too but were not tested.
The Device View is based on HTML version 5.
Getting Started
20
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Use a Web Browser to Access the Switch and Log In
If this is the first time that you log in to the switch and you must use the default IP address of the switch, see the information in the installation guide for your switch and in the
M4200 and
M4300 Series ProSAFE Managed Switches Software Setup Manual.
You can use a web browser to access the switch and log in. You must be able to ping the IP address of the management interface or out-of-band (OOB) port from your computer for web access to be available.
IMPORTANT:
The procedures in this manual assume that you know the IP address of your switch.
To access the switch over the local browser interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Local Browser Interface Buttons and User-Defined Fields
The following table shows the command buttons that are used on the pages in the local browser interface:
Table 1. Local browser interface command buttons
Button
Add
Apply
Cancel
Delete
Refresh
Function
Clicking the
Add
button adds the new item configured in the heading row of a table.
Clicking the
Apply button sends the updated configuration to the switch. Configuration changes take effect immediately.
Clicking the Cancel button cancels the configuration on the page and resets the data on the page to the previous values of the switch.
Clicking the
Delete button removes the selected item.
Clicking the
Refresh
button refreshes the page with the latest information from the device.
Getting Started
21
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 1. Local browser interface command buttons (continued)
Button
Save
Logout
Function
Clicking the Save button saves your settings.
Clicking the Logout button ends the session.
IMPORTANT:
When you click the Apply button, your changes are saved for the web management session but are not retained by the switch when it is rebooted. You can manually save the configuration permanently
permanently.
*
?
/
\
User-defined fields can contain 1 to 159 characters, unless otherwise noted on the configuration web page. All characters can be used except for the following (unless specifically noted in for that feature):
Table 2. Invalid characters for user-defined fields
|
<
>
Interface Naming Conventions
The switch supports physical and logical interfaces. Interfaces are identified by their type and the interface number. The physical ports are Gigabit Ethernet or multispeed 10G Ethernet interfaces and are numbered on the front panel. You configure the logical interfaces by using the software.
Getting Started
22
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the naming convention for all interfaces available on the switch.
Table 3. Naming conventions for interfaces
Interface
Physical interfaces for all
M4300 switch models except for model M4300-96X
Physical interfaces for model
M4300-96X
Description Example
The physical ports are Gigabit Ethernet or multispeed 10G Ethernet interfaces. The interface number consists of the switch unit number from 1 to 8, the slot number (which is always 0), and the port number, which is a sequential number starting from 1.
1/0/1, 1/0/2, 1/0/3, and so on
2/0/1, 2/0/2, 2/0/3, and so on
3/0/1, 3/0/2, 3/0/3, and so on
The physical ports are Gigabit Ethernet, multispeed 10G Ethernet, or 40G Ethernet interfaces. The interface number consists of the switch unit number from 1 to 8, the port card number from 1 to 12, and the port number from 1 to 8.
Switch Model M4300-96X on page 23.
Note: The numbering for the APM402XL
Numbering on the APM402XL Port Card on
Link aggregation group (LAG) LAG interfaces are logical interfaces that are used only for bridging functions.
CPU management interface This is the internal switch interface responsible for the switch base MAC address. This interface is not configurable and is always listed in the MAC Address
Table.
Routing VLAN interfaces This is an interface used for routing functionality.
LAG 1, LAG 2, LAG 3, and so on
0/15/1
VLAN 1, VLAN 2, VLAN 3, and so on
Slot and Port Numbering for Switch Model M4300-96X
For switch model M4300-96X, the slots in the upper row of the chassis are numbered 1 through 6 from left to right. These slots can support PoE. The slots in the lower row of the chassis are numbered 7 through 12 from left to right. These slots do not support PoE.
The port numbering depends on the port card.
Getting Started
23
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Slot and Port Numbering on the APM408C, APM408P, and APM408F Port
Cards
For the APM408C, APM408P, and APM408F port cards, the ports in the port cards in the slots are numbered as described in the following table.
Table 4. Port numbering for the APM408C, APM408P, and APM408F port cards
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
9
10
11
12
Slot
Number
Slot
Location
Port Number for Upper Ports in Port Card
Port Number for Lower Ports in Port Card
Interface Convention
Upper row 1, 3, 5, 7
Upper row 1, 3, 5, 7
Upper row 1, 3, 5, 7
Upper row 1, 3, 5, 7
Upper row 1, 3, 5, 7
Upper row 1, 3, 5, 7
Lower row 1, 3, 5, 7
Lower row 1, 3, 5, 7
Lower row 1, 3, 5, 7
Lower row 1, 3, 5, 7
Lower row 1, 3, 5, 7
Lower row 1, 3, 5, 7
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
2, 4, 6, 8
1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/1/3, and so on through 1/1/8
1/2/1, 1/2/2, 1/2/3, and so on through 1/2/8
1/3/1, 1/3/2, 1/3/3, and so on through 1/3/8
1/4/1, 1/4/2, 1/4/3, and so on through 1/4/8
1/5/1, 1/5/2, 1/5/3, and so on through 1/5/8
1/6/1, 1/6/2, 1/6/3, and so on through 1/6/8
1/7/1, 1/7/2, 1/7/3, and so on through 1/7/8
1/8/1, 1/8/2, 1/8/3, and so on through 1/8/8
1/9/1, 1/9/2, 1/9/3, and so on through 1/9/8
1/10/1, 1/10/2, 1/10/3, and so on through 1/10/8
1/11/1, 1/11/2, 1/11/3, and so on through 1/11/8
1/12/1, 1/12/2, 1/12/3, and so on through 1/12/8
Slot and Port Numbering on the APM402XL Port Card
The numbering of the ports on the APM402XL port card is different from the other port cards.
You can use a 40G port either with a break-out cable, in which case the single 40G port can support up to four individual 10G ports, or with a connection to another single 40G port.
Port 1 (the left 40G port on the port card) uses the following numbering:
• If connected with a break-out cable to four individual 10G ports, the port numbers are 1,
2, 3, and 4.
• If connected to another single 40G port, the port number is 1. In that situation, only port number 1 is used and port numbers 2, 3, and 4 are not used on the port card.
Port 2 (the right 40G port on the port card) uses the following numbering:
• If connected with a break-out cable to four individual 10G ports, the port numbers are 5,
6, 7, and 8.
• If connected to another single 40G port, the port number is 5. In that situation, only port number 5 is used and port numbers 6, 7, and 8 are not used on the port card.
Getting Started
24
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
For example, if a switch with unit number 1 includes an APM402XL port card in slot 9, port 1 on the port card is connected to four individual port cards, and port 2 on the port card is connected to another single 40G port, the port numbering is as follows: 1/9/1, 1/9/2, 1/9/3,
1/9/4, and 1/9/5.
For the APM402XL port card, the ports on the port cards in the slots are numbered as described in the following table. (In the interface convention examples in the table, the switch is designated as unit number 1.)
For the APM402XL port card, the ports in the port cards in the slots are numbered as described in the following table.
Table 5. Port numbering for the 40G ports on the APM402XL port card
Slot
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Slot
Location
Upper row 1
2
Upper row 1
2
Upper row 1
2
Upper row 1
2
Upper row 1
2
Upper row 1
2
Lower row 1
2
Lower row 1
2
Lower row 1
2
Lower row 1
Port Port
Numbers for 10G
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
5, 6, 7, 8 5
1, 2, 3, 4 1
Port
Numbers for 40G
Interface Convention
2 5, 6, 7, 8 5
For 10G: 1/1/1, 1/1/2, 1/1/3, and 1/1/4. For 40G: 1/1/1.
For 10G: 1/1/5, 1/1/6, 1/1/7, and 1/1/8. For 40G: 1/1/5.
For 10G: 1/2/1, 1/2/2, 1/2/3, and 1/2/4. For 40G: 1/2/1.
For 10G: 1/2/5, 1/2/6, 1/2/7, and 1/2/8. For 40G: 1/2/5.
For 10G: 1/3/1, 1/3/2, 1/3/3, and 1/3/4. For 40G: 1/3/1.
For 10G: 1/3/5, 1/3/6, 1/3/7, and 1/3/8. For 40G: 1/3/5.
For 10G: 1/4/1, 1/4/2, 1/4/3, and 1/4/4. For 40G: 1/4/1.
For 10G: 1/4/5, 1/4/6, 1/4/7, and 1/4/8. For 40G: 1/4/5.
For 10G: 1/5/1, 1/5/2, 1/5/3, and 1/5/4. For 40G: 1/5/1.
For 10G: 1/5/5, 1/5/6, 1/5/7, and 1/5/8. For 40G: 1/5/5.
For 10G: 1/6/1, 1/6/2, 1/6/3, and 1/6/4. For 40G: 1/6/1.
For 10G: 1/6/5, 1/6/6, 1/6/7, and 1/6/8. For 40G: 1/6/5.
For 10G: 1/7/1, 1/7/2, 1/7/3, and 1/71/4. For 40G: 1/7/1.
For 10G: 1/7/5, 1/7/6, 1/7/7, and 1/7/8. For 40G: 1/7/5.
For 10G: 1/8/1, 1/8/2, 1/8/3, and 1/8/4. For 40G: 1/8/1.
For 10G: 1/8/5, 1/8/6, 1/8/7, and 1/8/8. For 40G: 1/8/5.
For 10G: 1/9/1, 1/9/2, 1/9/3, and 1/9/4. For 40G: 1/9/1.
For 10G: 1/9/5, 1/9/6, 1/9/7, and 1/9/8. For 40G: 1/9/5.
For 10G: 1/10/1, 1/10/2, 1/10/3, and 1/10/4.
For 40G: 1/10/1.
For 10G: 1/10/5, 1/10/6, 1/10/7, and 1/10/8.
For 40G: 1/10/5.
Getting Started
25
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 5. Port numbering for the 40G ports on the APM402XL port card (continued)
Slot
Number
11
12
Slot
Location
Port Port
Numbers for 10G
Lower row 1 1, 2, 3, 4 1
Port
Numbers for 40G
Interface Convention
Lower row
2
1
2
5, 6, 7, 8
1, 2, 3, 4
5, 6, 7, 8
5
1
5
For 10G: 1/11/1, 1/11/2, 1/11/3, and 1/11/4.
For 40G: 1/11/1.
For 10G: 1/11/5, 1/11/6, 1/11/7, and 1/11/8.
For 40G: 1/11/5.
For 10G: 1/12/1, 1/12/2, 1/12/3, and 1/12/4.
For 40G: 1/12/1.
For 10G: 1/12/5, 1/12/6, 1/12/7, and 1/12/8.
For 40G: 1/12/5.
Online Help
When you log in to the switch, each page contains a link to the online help that contains information to assist in configuring and managing the switch. The online help pop-up windows are context sensitive. For example, if the IP Addressing page is open, the help topic for that page displays if you click the Help button.
You can connect to the online support site at netgear.com when you are logged in to the switch.
To access the online support link:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Help > Online Help > Support .
6. To connect to the NETGEAR support site for the M4300 Series and M4300-96X switches, click the APPLY button.
Getting Started
26
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Local Browser Interface Device View
The Device View is an HTML applet that displays the ports on the switch. This graphic provides an alternate way to navigate to configuration and monitoring options. The graphic also provides information about device ports, current configuration and status, tables, and feature components.
To use Device View:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Device View
.
As an example, the following figure shows the Device View page for model M4300-52G.
As another example, the following figure shows a close up of the Device View page for model M4300-24X.
The port coloring indicates whether a port is currently active. Green indicates that the port is enabled; red indicates that an error occurred on the port, or that the link is disabled.
As yet another example, the following figure shows a close up of the Device View page for model M4300-96X. This figure shows an APM402XL port card in slot 5 and another in slot 8. Port 1/5/6 is expanded into four 10G ports, but port 1/5/5 is in 40G mode. Both port
1/8/1 and port 1/8/5 are in the default 40G mode.
Getting Started
27
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Click a port to see a menu that displays statistics and configuration options.
You can click a menu option to access the page that contains the configuration or monitoring options.
If you click the graphic, but do not click a specific port, the main menu displays. This menu contains the same options as the navigation tabs at the top of the page.
Using SNMP
The switch software supports the configuration of SNMP groups and users that can manage traps that the SNMP agent generates.
The switch uses both standard public MIBs for standard functionality and private MIBs that support additional switch functionality. All private MIBs begin with a “-” prefix. The main object for interface configuration is in -SWITCHING-MIB, which is a private MIB. Some interface configurations also involve objects in the public MIB, IF-MIB.
SNMP is enabled by default. The System Information page, which is the page that displays when you log in, displays the information that you need to configure an SNMP manager to access the switch.
Any user can connect to the switch using the SNMP v3 protocol, but for authentication and encryption, the switch supports only one user, which is admin
; therefore, only one profile can be created or modified.
Getting Started
28
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
To configure authentication and encryption settings for the SNMP v3 admin profile:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > SNMP > SNMP v3 > User Configuration
.
The User Configuration page displays.
6. To enable authentication, select an Authentication Protocol option, which is either MD5 or
SHA .
7.
To enable encryption, select the
DES option in the
Encryption Protocol
list Then enter an encryption code of eight or more alphanumeric characters in the
Encryption Key
field.
8. Click the APPLY button.
Your settings are saved.
Note: To access configuration information for SNMP V1 or SNMP V2, select
System > SNMP > SNMPv1/v2 and select the page that contains the information that you want to configure.
Getting Started
29
2.
Configure System Information
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Initial Setup
•
Time
•
Configure DNS Settings
•
Configure the Switch Database Management Template Preference
•
Configure Green Ethernet Settings
•
Configure and Display Bonjour Settings
•
Configure DHCP Server Settings
•
DHCP L2 Relay
•
Manage the DHCPv6 Server
•
Configure Power over Ethernet
•
Configure SNMP
•
Configure LLDP
•
Configure Link Dependency
•
Configure ISDP
•
Timer Schedules
2
30
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Initial Setup
When you log in to a switch that has its factory settings, the Initial Setup page displays.
To perform the initial system configuration:
1.
Prepare your computer with a static IP address:
•
For access over an Ethernet network port, use a static IP address in the 169.254.0.0 subnet with subnet mask 255.255.0.0.
For example, use 169.254.100.201 for your computer.
• For access over the OOB port, use a static IP address in the 192.168.0.0 subnet with subnet mask 255.255.0.0.
For example, use 192.168.0.201 for your computer.
2.
Connect an Ethernet cable from an Ethernet port on your computer to either an Ethernet network port on the switch or to the OOB port on the switch.
3. Launch a web browser such as Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, or Microsoft Internet
Explorer.
4.
Enter the default IP address of the switch in the web browser address field:
•
For access over an Ethernet network port, enter
169.254.100.100
.
• For access over the OOB port, enter 192.168.0.239
.
The login window opens.
5. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
6. Click the Login button.
The local browser interface menu displays.
7.
Select
System > Management > Initial Setup
.
8.
Enter the new password for the Admin account in the
Admin Password
field.
Configure System Information
31
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The new password does not display as you type it; only dots are shown to hide the entry.
The password is from 8 to 64 alphanumeric characters in length and is case-sensitive.
9. In the Enable Password field, enter the new password for the enable mode in the command-line interface.
The new password does not display as you type it; only dots are shown to hide the entry.
The password is from 8 to 64 alphanumeric characters in length and is case-sensitive.
10. In the System Name field, type the name to identify this switch.
You can use a name up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.
11. In the System Location field, type the location of the switch.
You can use a location up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.
12. Enter the System Contact , the name of the contact person for this switch.
You can use a contact name up to 255 characters in length. The factory default is blank.
13. In the SNTP mode field, select Enable or Disable .
This specifies the state of the SNTP client. The default value is Disable, and the local clock is used to get the time value.
14. Specify the address of the SNTP Server .
Enter a text string of up to 64 characters containing the host name of an SNTP server.
The server address can be IPv4, IPv6, or a host name. The host name resolves into an IP address each time an SNTP request is sent to it.
15. In the Designated Source Interface list, select Management VLAN or Service Port .
This is the source interface that is used for SNMP trap, syslog, DNS, TACACS+,
RADIUS, sflow, and SNTP applications. By default, Management VLAN is used as the source interface.
Note: If you select Management VLAN as the source interface, the routing mode for the selected VLAN must be enabled.
16. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the Initial IPv4 Management VLAN
To configure the initial IPv4 management VLAN:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Configure System Information
32
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Initial Setup .
The Initial Setup page displays.
6.
Scroll down to display the IPv4 Management VLAN Configuration section of the page.
7. Specify the Management VLAN ID of the switch.
The management VLAN is used for management of the switch. The VLAN ID can be any value from 1 to 4093.
8. Select the radio button to Enable or Disable the global Routing Mode on the device.
The default is Enable.
9. Select the IPv4 Address Assignment DHCP or Static radio button.
This specifies the method for getting IPv4 network parameters (IPv4 address and network mask) for the configured management VLAN interface. The default value for
VLAN 1 is Static.
10. In the IP Address field, specify the IP address of the management VLAN interface.
The factory default value is 169.254.100.100.
11. In the Subnet Mask field, specify the IP subnet mask for the management VLAN interface.
This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. The factory default value is 255.255.0.0.
12. In the Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the management VLAN interface.
The default value is 0.0.0.0.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
33
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the Initial IPv6 Management VLAN
For IPv6 management, you can use the same management VLAN that you use for IPv4 management or you can use a different VLAN. By default, the switch does not include an
IPv6 management VLAN and you must set it up manually if you want to use it.
To configure the initial IPv6 management VLAN:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Initial Setup .
The Initial Setup page displays.
6. Scroll down to display the IPv6 Management VLAN Configuration section of the page.
7.
Specify the
Management VLAN ID
of the switch.
The management VLAN is used for management of the switch. The VLAN ID can be any value from 1 to 4093. There is no IPv6 management interface configured by default.
8.
Select an
IPv6 Address Assignment radio button.
This specifies the method for getting IPv6 network parameters (IPv6 prefix and prefix length) for the configured management VLAN interface. The possible options are
DHCPv6 , Auto Config , or Static . The default value for VLAN 1 is Auto Config.
9. In the IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix and prefix length for the management VLAN interface.
When
Auto Config
is selected, the appropriate IPv6 prefix and prefix length is displayed in this field.
10. In the IPv6 Gateway field, specify the default IPv6 gateway for the management VLAN interface.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
34
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the Initial Service Port Settings
To perform the initial service port configuration:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Click
System > Management > Initial Setup
.
The Initial Setup page displays.
6. Scroll down to the bottom of the page to display the Service Port Configuration section.
7. Select an IPv4 Address Assignment radio button.
This specifies the method for getting IPv4 network parameters (IPv4 address and network mask) for the service port. Possible options are DHCP, BootP, or Static . The default value is Static.
8.
Specify the
IP Address
for the service port.
The factory default value is 192.168.0.239.
9. Specify the Subnet Mask for the service port.
This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. The factory default value is 255.255.255.0.
10.
Specify the default
Gateway
for the service port.
The default value is 0.0.0.0.
11. In the IPv6 Address Assignment field, select the method for getting IPv6 network parameters (IPv6 prefix and prefix length) for the configured service port.
Possible options are
DHCPv6
,
Auto Config
, or
Static
. The default value is Auto Config.
12.
Specify the
IPv6 Prefix and Prefix Length for the service port.
Configure System Information
35
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
When Auto Config is selected, the appropriate IPv6 prefix and prefix length are displayed in this field.
13. Specify the default IPv6 Gateway for the service port.
14. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View or Define System Information
When you log in, the System Information page displays. You can configure and view general device information.
To view or define system information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > System Information .
Configure System Information
36
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Define the following fields:
• System Name . Enter the name to identify this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.
• System Location . Enter the location of this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.
• System Contact . Enter the contact person for this switch. You can use up to 255 alphanumeric characters. The factory default is blank.
• Login Timeout. Specify how many minutes of inactivity can occur on a serial port connection before the switch closes the connection. Enter a number between 0 and
160 minutes. The factory default is 5. Entering 0 disables the time-out.
• Management Source Interface
. Select the management interface that is used as source interface for SNMP trap, syslog, DNS, TACACS+, RADIUS, sflow, and SNTP applications. Possible values are as follows:
None
Routing Interface
Routing VLAN
Routing Loopback Interface
Service Port
Different
. For some applications from the list, the source interface is configured separately. They display in the list only if this is the case.
By default VLAN 1 is used as the source interface.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the status information in the Application Information and
System Information sections on the page.
Table 6. Application Information and System Information
Description Field
Application Information
App Name
App Status
Version
System Information
Product Name
IPv4 Management Address
The name of the application that functions as the Universal Plug and
Play (UPnP) agent.
The status of the application.
The version of the application.
The product name of this switch.
The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the management VLAN interface.
Configure System Information
37
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 6. Application Information and System Information (continued)
Field Description
IPv6 Management Address
IPv4 Management Interface
The IPv6 address and mask assigned to the management VLAN interface.
The IPv4 management VLAN ID of the switch. Click the displayed
Management VLAN ID value to jump to the configuration page. See
Configure an IPv4 Management VLAN on page 56.
IPv6 Management Interface
IPv4 Loopback Interface
IPv6 Loopback Interface
System Date
Current SNTP Sync Status
System SNMP OID
System Mac Address
Service Port MAC Address
L2 MAC Address
The IPv6 management VLAN ID of the switch. Click the displayed
Management VLAN ID value to jump to the configuration page. See
Configure an IPv6 Management VLAN on page 58.
The IPv4 address and mask assigned to the loopback interface.
The IPv6 prefix and prefix length assigned to the loopback interface.
The current date.
The current SNTP sync status.
The base object ID for the switch's enterprise MIB.
Universally assigned network address.
The MAC address used for out-of-band connectivity.
The MAC address used for communications on the Layer 2 network segment.
L3 MAC Address The MAC address used for communications on the Layer 3 network segment.
Current SNTP Synchronized Time The SNTP synchronized time.
View the Fan Status
This page shows the status of the fans in all units. These fans remove the heat generated by the power, CP,U and other chipsets, and allow the chipsets work normally. Fan status has three possible values: OK , Failure , and Not Present .
To view the fan status:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
Configure System Information
38
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Management > System Information > Fan Status .
6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Fan Status information.
Table 7. Fan Status
Field
Unit ID
System-1
System-2
System-3
Description
The unit ID of the switch to which the fan belongs.
The working status of the System-1 fan in each unit.
The working status of the System-2 fan in each unit.
The working status of the System-3 fan in each unit.
View the Temperature Sensor Information
You can view the current temperature of different system sensors using the Temperature
Status table. The temperature is instant and can be refreshed with the latest information on the switch when the Update button is clicked. The maximum temperature of the CPU and
MACs depends on the actual hardware.
To view temperature information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > System Information > Temperature Sensors .
Configure System Information
39
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Temperature Status information.
Table 8. Temperature Status information
Field
Unit ID
MAC-A
MAC-B
System
Description
The unit number in the switch.
The current temperature (in degrees Centigrade) of the MAC-A sensor of the switch. The maximum is 31°C.
The current temperature (in degrees Centigrade) of the MAC-B sensor of the switch. The maximum is 37°C.
The current temperature (in degrees Centigrade) of the System sensor of the switch. The maximum is 31°C.
View the Device Status
This page shows the software version of each device.
To view the device status:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Management > System Information > Device Status .
Configure System Information
40
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Device Status information.
Table 9. Device Status
Field
Unit ID
Firmware Version
Boot Version
CPLD Version
Serial Number
Internal AC-1, Internal AC-2, and so on
System Up Time
Description
The unit number in the switch.
The release.version.maintenance number of the code currently running on the switch. For example, if the release was 1, the version was 2, and the maintenance number was 4, the format would be 1.2.4.
The version of the boot code that is in the flash memory to load the firmware into the memory.
The version of the software for CPLD.
The serial number of this switch.
Indicates the status of the appropriate power module in each unit.
Status can be any of the following:
• Operational
. Power module is present and functioning properly.
• Powering . Main power is failed or disconnected but RPS provides power to the switch.
• Not Present . Power module is not present in the slot.
• Not powered
. Power module is present but not connected to the power source.
• Not powering
. Power module is present and connected but the switch uses another power source.
• Incompatible
. Power module is present but incompatible.
• Failed . Power module is present, but power cable is not plugged in or a bad cable is plugged in.
The time in days, hours, and minutes since the last switch reboot.
Configure System Information
41
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View the System CPU Status
To view the system CPU status:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > System CPU Status .
6. You can view the CPU Utilization information, which contains the memory information, task-related information, and percentage of CPU utilization per task.
• Select the Unit No.
to display the CPU Utilization information.
•
Select
All
to display the CPU Utilization information for all units in a switch.
Configure System Information
42
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes CPU Memory Status information.
Table 10. CPU Memory Status information
Field
Total System Memory
Available Memory
Description
The total memory of the switch in KBytes.
The available memory space for the switch in KBytes.
Configure the CPU Thresholds
The CPU Utilization Threshold notification feature allows you to configure thresholds that, when crossed, trigger a notification. The notification is done through SNMP trap and syslog messages.
To configure the CPU thresholds:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > System CPU Status > CPU Threshold
.
6. Configure the Rising Threshold value.
Notification is generated when the total CPU utilization exceeds this threshold value over the configured time period. The range is 1 to 100.
7. Configure the Rising Interval value.
This utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.
Configure System Information
43
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
8. Configure the Falling Threshold .
Notification is triggered when the total CPU utilization falls below this level for a configured period of time.
The falling utilization threshold must be equal to or less than the rising threshold value.
The falling utilization threshold notification is made only if a rising threshold notification was done previously. Configuring the falling utilization threshold and time period is optional. If the Falling CPU utilization parameters are not configured, then it takes the same value as Rising CPU utilization parameters. The range is 1 to 100.
9. Configure the Falling Interval .
The utilization monitoring time period can be configured from 5 seconds to 86400 seconds in multiples of 5 seconds.
10. Configure the CPU Free Memory Threshold value in KB.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View and Clear Switch Statistics
To view and clear the switch statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Switch Statistics .
Configure System Information
44
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
To clear all the counters, resetting all switch summary and detailed statistics to default values, click the
Clear
button.
The discarded packets count cannot be cleared.
The following table describes Switch Statistics information.
Table 11. Switch Statistics information
Field ifIndex
Octets Received
Packets Received Without Errors
Unicast Packets Received
Multicast Packets Received
Description
The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with the processor of this switch.
The total number of octets of data received by the processor (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multicast packets) received by the processor.
The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.
The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast address. This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.
Configure System Information
45
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 11. Switch Statistics information (continued)
Field
Broadcast Packets Received
Receive Packets Discarded
Octets Transmitted
Packets Transmitted Without Errors
Unicast Packets Transmitted
Multicast Packets Transmitted
Broadcast Packets Transmitted
Transmit Packets Discarded
Most Address Entries Ever Used
Address Entries in Use
Maximum VLAN Entries
Most VLAN Entries Ever Used
Static VLAN Entries
Dynamic VLAN Entries
VLAN Deletes
Time Since Counters Last Cleared
Description
The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. This does not include multicast packets.
The number of inbound packets that were discarded even though no errors were detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.
The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that are transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that are transmitted to a multicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested that are transmitted to the broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.
The number of outbound packets that were discarded even though no errors were detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.
The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries learned by this switch since the most recent reboot.
The number of learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database
Address Table for this switch.
The maximum number of virtual LANs (VLANs) allowed on this switch.
The largest number of VLANs that were active on this switch since the last reboot.
The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that were created statically.
The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that were created by GVRP registration.
The number of VLANs on this switch that were created and then deleted since the last reboot.
The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, since the statistics for this switch were last cleared.
Configure System Information
46
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View USB Device Information
To display the USB device information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > USB Device Information.
The Device Status field displays the current status of the device. The status is one of the following:
• Active . The device is USB plugged in and recognized by the switch.
• Inactive . The device is not mounted.
• Invalid . The device is not present or an invalid device is plugged in.
6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The following table describes the USB Memory Statistics information.
Table 12. USB Memory Statistics information
Field
Total Size
Bytes Used
Bytes Free
Description
The USB flash device storage size in bytes.
The size of memory used on the USB flash device.
The size of memory free on the USB flash device.
Configure System Information
47
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the USB Directory Details information.
Table 13. USB Directory Details information
Field
File Name
File Size
Modification Time
Description
The name of the file stored in the USB flash drive.
The size of the file stored in the USB flash drive in bytes
The last modification time of the file stored in the USB flash drive.
Configure and View Information About Slots and Port Cards
You can configure information about the port cards that are installed in the switch’s slots and view information about the port cards and other switches that are compatible with the switch.
To configure and view information about slots and port cards:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Slot Information .
6. For model M4300-96X only, from the Administrative State menu, select Enable or
Disable .
By default, all slots are enabled, but you can select to disable a slot.
7. For model M4300-96X only, from the Configured Card Model ID menu, select the port card.
This option allows you to preconfigure the port card before you insert the port card.
Configure System Information
48
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
8. For model M4300-96X, if you changed the settings, click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information in the Slot Configuration table.
Field Description
Slot
Status
Power State
PoE Capable
The unit and slot number.
Indicates whether the slot is empty or full.
For model M4300-96X only, the power state is always Enable.
For other models, the Power State column does not display.
Configured Card Description The description of the port card configured for the slot
Inserted Card Model ID The model ID of the port card plugged into the slot.
Inserted Card Description
Card Power Down
The description of the port card plugged into the slot.
If the value is True, the power state can be administratively enabled or disabled. If the value is False, the power state cannot be configured.
Card Pluggable If the value is True, the card can be administratively enabled or disabled. If the value is False, the administrative state cannot be configured.
Indicates whether a port card is PoE cable.
The following table describes information in the Supported Card table.
Field
Card Model
Card Index
Card Type
Card Descriptor
Description
The model ID of the supported port card.
The index assigned to the port card type.
The hardware type of the supported port card, which is assigned by the manufacturer.
The description of the supported port card, which includes the manufacturer product number and information about the number and speed of the supported interfaces.
Configure System Information
49
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes information in the Supported Switch table. If you preconfigure a new stack member, the switch index identifies the type of switch that is being added to the stack.
Field
Switch Model ID
Switch Index
Management Preference
Description
The model number of the supported switch.
The index that is assigned to the supported switch.
The management preference of the supported switch.
Configure a Loopback Interface
You can create, configure, and remove loopback interfaces.
To configure a loopback interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Loopback Interface .
Configure System Information
50
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use the Loopback Interface Type list to select IPv4 or IPv6 loopback interface.
7. In the Loopback ID list, select a list of currently configured loopback interfaces.
8. In the Primary IP Address field, enter the primary address for this interface in dotted-decimal notation.
This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.
9. In the Primary IP Subnet Mask field, enter the primary IPv4 subnet mask in dotted-decimal notation.
This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.
10. In the Secondary IP Address field, enter the secondary IP address in dotted-decimal notation.
This input field is visible only when Add Secondary is selected. This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.
11. In the Secondary Subnet Mask field, enter the secondary subnet mask for this interface in dotted-decimal notation.
This input field is visible only when Add Secondary is selected. This option is visible when IPv4 loopback is selected.
12. In the IPv6 mode field, enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address.
This option is configurable before you specify an explicit IPv6 address. This option is visible when IPv6 loopback is selected.
13. Use the IPv6 Address field to enter the IPv6 address in the format prefix/length.
This option is visible when IPv6 loopback is selected.
14. Use the EUI64 field to optionally specify the 64-bit extended unique identifier (EUI-64).
This option is visible when IPv6 loopback is selected.
15. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
51
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Management Interfaces
The local browser interface includes separate options for interface and port-based IP management. Port-based IP management disables VLAN-based (default/existing) IP management once you configure the port-based IP management and vice versa.
The source interface for applications is set to VLAN 1 by default. Changes in IPv4
Management VLAN and port to a non-default value also sets the source interface to the
VLAN 1 default VLAN/port automatically.
Configure the IPv4 Service Port
You can configure network information on the IPv4 service port. The service port is a dedicated Ethernet port for out-of-band management of the device. Traffic on this port is segregated from operational network traffic on the switch ports and cannot be switched or routed to the operational network.
To configure the IPv4 service port:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv4 Service Port
Configuration .
Configure System Information
52
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select a Service Port Configuration Protocol radio button:
• BootP . During the next boot cycle, the BootP client on the device broadcasts a BootP request in an attempt to acquire information from a BootP server on the network.
• DHCP . During the next boot cycle, the DHCP client on the device broadcasts a DHCP request in an attempt to acquire information from a DHCP server on the network.
• None . The device does not attempt to acquire network information dynamically.
•
This specifies how the device acquires network information on the service port.
7.
In the
IP Address
field, specify the IP address of the interface.
•
If the service port configuration protocol is
None
, you can manually configure a static
IP address.
•
If the service port configuration protocol is
BootP or
DHCP
, this field displays the IP address that was dynamically acquired (if any).
8. In the Subnet Mask field, specify the IP subnet mask for the interface:
• If the service port configuration protocol is None , you can manually configure a static subnet mask.
• If the service port configuration protocol is BootP or DHCP , this field displays the subnet mask that was dynamically acquired (if any).
9.
In the
Default Gateway
field, specify the default gateway for the IP interface:
•
If the Service Port Configuration Protocol is
None
, you can manually configure the IP address of the default gateway.
•
If the Service Port Configuration Protocol is
BootP
or
DHCP
, this field displays the default gateway address that was dynamically acquired (if any).
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the Service Port Configuration page.
Table 14. IPv4 Service Port Configuration
Field
Burned-in MAC Address
Interface Status
Description
The burned-in MAC address used for out-of-band connectivity.
Indicates whether the link status is up or down.
Configure the IPv6 Service Port
You can configure IPv6 network information on the service port. The service port is a dedicated Ethernet port for out-of-band management of the device. Traffic on this port is segregated from operational network traffic on the switch ports and cannot be switched or routed to the operational network.
Configure System Information
53
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
To configure the IPv6 service port:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Service Port
Configuration .
6. Select the IPv6 mode Enable or Disable radio button.
This specifies the IPv6 administrative mode on the service port.
7. Select the Service Port Configuration Protocol None or DHCP radio button.
This specifies whether the device acquires network information from a DHCPv6 server.
Selecting None disables the DHCPv6 client on the service port.
8. Select the IPv6 Stateless Address AutoConfig mode
Enable
or
Disable
radio button:
• Enable
. The service port can acquire an IPv6 address through IPv6 Neighbor
Discovery Protocol (NDP) and through the use of router advertisement messages.
• Disable
. The service port does not use the native IPv6 address autoconfiguration feature to acquire an IPv6 address.
This sets the IPv6 stateless address autoconfiguration mode on the service port.
Configure System Information
54
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
9. The DHCPv6 Client DUID field displays the client identifier used by the DHCPv6 client (if enabled) when sending messages to the DHCPv6 server.
10.
To configure the IPv6 gateway, select the
Change IPv6 Gateway
check box.
The IPv6 gateway is the default gateway for the IPv6 service port interface.
11. Use the IPv6 Gateway field to specify the default gateway for the IPv6 service port interface.
The
Add/Delete IPv6 Address
table lists the manually configured static IPv6 addresses on the service port interface.
12. Specify the following: a.
In the
IPv6 Address
field, specify the IPv6 address to add or remove from the service port interface.
b. Select the EUI Flag option to enable the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI) flag for
IPv6 address, or clear the option to omit the flag.
13.
Click the
Add
button.
The IPv6 address is added to the service port interface.
14. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Management VLAN Overview
For you to manage the device by using the web-based configuration utility, the device management IP address must be defined and known. A management VLAN interface is created by default and it gets an IP address if a DHCP server is present. If it fails to get an IP address, a fallback address 169.254.100.100/255.255.0.0 is assigned to it. Management
VLAN is used as the default source interface for syslog, message log, and SNMP client, and so on The network interface is disabled by default.
The management VLAN is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch through any of the switch’s front panel ports. The configuration parameters associated with the switch’s management VLAN do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed.
To access the switch over a network, you must first configure it with IP information (IP address, subnet mask). You can configure the IP information using any of the following:
•
DHCP
• Terminal interface through the EIA-232 port
After you establish in-band connectivity, you can change the IP information using any of the following:
•
Terminal interface through the EIA-232 port
• Terminal interface through Telnet
•
SNMP-based management
• Web-based management
Configure System Information
55
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure an IPv4 Management VLAN
To configure an IPv4 Management VLAN:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv4 Management VLAN
Configuration .
6. In the Management VLAN ID field, specify the Management VLAN ID of the switch. The management VLAN is used for management of the switch. It can be configured to any value in the range of 1–4093.
7.
Select the
Routing Mode radio button to
Enable
or
Disable
the global routing on the device. The default value is Enable.
8. Select the Configuration Method DHCP or Manual radio button:
• DHCP . Transmit a DHCP request.
• Manual
. Do nothing.
This specifies what the switch does on start-up.
9.
Specify the
IP Address of the interface.
The factory default value is 169.254.100.100.
Configure System Information
56
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
10. Specify the IP Subnet Mask for the interface. This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network.
The factory default value is 255.255.0.0.
11.
Specify the
Gateway for the management VLAN interface.
The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.
12. In the Reset IPv4 Management Interface section of the page, use the Set Management
Interface to Default option to set the IPv4 management interface to the default VLAN 1.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The Current IPv4 Management Interface Status is displayed at the bottom of the page.
The table below describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 15. Nonconfigurable IPv4 Management Interface Status
Field
Management Interface
Description
Displays the current IPv4 management interface
Link State
Routing Interface Status
Indicates whether the link status is up or down.
Indicates whether the link status is up or down for the management interface.
The MAC address assigned to the management interface.
MAC Address
IP Address Configuration Method Indicates whether the IP address configuration method is DHCP or manual.
IP Address The IP address of the management interface.
Configure System Information
57
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 15. Nonconfigurable IPv4 Management Interface Status
Field
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Description
The IP subnet mask for the management interface.
The specified default gateway for the management interface.
Configure an IPv6 Management VLAN
To configure IPv6 Management, you have the choice to configure IPv6 Management using the same VLAN as is used for IPv4 Management or using a different VLAN. IPv6
Management configuration is non-default and you need to create it manually.
To configure an IPv6 management VLAN:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Management VLAN
Configuration .
6. In the Management VLAN ID field, specify the Management VLAN ID of the switch. The management VLAN is used for management of the switch. The VLAN ID can be any value from 1 to 4093. There is no IPv6 management interface configured by default.
7. Select the IPv6 Enable Mode radio button to Enable or Disable the administration mode for the management VLAN IPv6 interface on the switch.
Configure System Information
58
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
8. Select the radio button to Enable or Disable Address Autoconfigure Mode . If you select
Enable, the IPv6 network parameters (IPv6 prefix and prefix length) are autoconfigured for the configured management VLAN interface. The default value for VLAN 1 is Auto Config.
Note:
The Address Autoconfigure mode option is available only if unicast routing is globally disabled.
9. Select the Address DHCP Mode Enable or Disable radio button.
10.
In the IPv6 VLAN Interface Configuration section of the page, select the
IPv6 Prefix/Prefix
Length
option, then specify the IPv6 address to add or remove from the management VLAN interface. When Address Autoconfigure Mode is selected, the appropriate IPv6 prefix and prefix length is shown in this field.
11. Select the EU164 option to True (enabled) the Extended Universal Identifier (EUI) flag for an
IPv6 address. The value is False if not specified.
12.
Click the
Add
button.
The IPv6 address is added to the management VLAN.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
In the IPv6 Default Route Configuration section of the page, the nonconfigurable
IPv6
Default Route that is displayed is the default route for the IPv6 VLAN interface.
14. To make changes, do the following:
• To add or remove the IPv6 default route, select the Change IPv6 Default Route option, and specify the address value in the IPv6 Default Route Address field.
• To reset the IPv6 management interface to the default VLAN 1, select the Set
Management Interface to Default option.
15. If you make any changes, click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
By default there is no IPv6 Management Interface.
The current IPv6 Management Interface Status is displayed at the bottom of the page.
Configure System Information
59
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The table below describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 16. Current IPv6 Management Interface Status
Field
Management Interface
Link State
IPv6 Routing Interface
Status/Operational Mode
MAC Address
IPv6 Enable Mode
IPv6 Routing Mode
Stateless Address Autoconfig
Mode
DHCPv6 Client Mode
IPv6 Default Gateway
IPv6 Next Hop Interface
Prefix Length
EU164
Current State
Description
Displays the current IPv6 management interface
Indicates whether the link status is up or down.
Indicates whether the link status is up or down for the management interface.
The MAC address assigned to the management interface.
Indicates whether IPv6 Enable Mode on the management interface is enabled or disabled.
Indicates whether IPv6 Routing Mode on the management interface is enabled or disabled.
Indicates whether the IP address autoconfiguration mode on the management interface is enabled or disabled.
The Address DHCP mode on the management interface.
The IPv6 default gateway of the switch.
The IPv6 next hop interface of the switch.
The prefix length on the management interface.
The EUI-64 flag of the IPv6 address on the management interface.
The current state of the IPv6 address on the management interface.
Configure an IPv4 Management Interface
Use this page for port-based IP management for IPv4.
To configure an IPv4 management interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
Configure System Information
60
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv4 Management Interface
Configuration
.
6. Use the Interface list to select the interface for which IPv4 parameters or management interface can be changed.
7. When you select the Set Management Interface option, it means that the management interface must be configured based on the interface selected.
By default, this option is not selected.
8. Select the Configuration Method DHCP or Manual radio button.
9. Specify the IP Address of the interface and the subnet mask for the management interface.
This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask, and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. The factory default value is 169.254.100.100.
10. In the Subnet Mask field, specify the IP subnet mask for the interface.
The factory default value is 255.255.0.0.
11. In the Gateway field, specify the default gateway for the management interface.
The default value is 0.0.0.0.
Configure System Information
61
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Note: If you need to reset the IPv4 management interface, in the Reset IPv4
Management Interface section of the page, use the Set Management
Interface to Default option to delete the port-based IPv4 management interface configuration and set the IPv4 management interface back to the default VLAN 1.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The Current IPv4 Management Interface Status is displayed at the bottom of the page.
The table below describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 17. Nonconfigurable IPv4 Management Interface Status
Field Description
Management Interface
Link State
Displays the current IPv4 management interface
Indicates whether the link status is up or down.
Routing Interface Status Indicates whether the link status is up or down for the management interface.
The MAC address assigned to the management interface.
MAC Address
IP Address Configuration Method Indicates whether the IP address configuration method is DHCP or manual.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
The IP address of the management interface.
The IP subnet mask for the management interface.
The specified default gateway for the management interface.
Configure System Information
62
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure an IPv6 Management Interface
Use this page for port-based IP management for IPv6.
To configure an IPv6 management interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Management Interfaces > IPv6 Management Interface
Configuration
.
6. Use the Interface list to select the interface for which IPv6 parameters or management interface can be changed.
7. When you select the Set Management Interface option, it means that the management interface must be configured based on the interface selected. By default, this option is not selected.
8. Select the radio button to enable or disable the Routing Mode on the management interface.
9. Select the radio button to enable or disable the IPv6 Mode on the management interface.
10. Select the radio button to enable or disable the DHCPv6 Client Mode on the management interface.
11. Select the radio button to enable or disable the Address Autoconfigure Mode on the management interface.
Note: The Address AutoConfigure Mode option is available only if Unicast
Routing is globally disabled.
Configure System Information
63
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
In the IPv6 Default Route Configuration section of the page, the nonconfigurable IPv6
Default Route that is displayed is the default route for the IPv6 management interface.
13. To make changes, do the following:
• To add or remove the IPv6 default route, select the Change IPv6 Default Route option, and specify the address value in the IPv6 Default Route Address field.
• In the Reset IPv6 Management Interface section of the page, use the Set
Management Interface to Default option to delete the port-based IPv6 management interface configuration and set the IPv6 management interface back to the default
VLAN 1.
14. If you make any changes, click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The current IPv6 Management Interface Status is displayed at the bottom of the page. The table below describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 18. Current IPv6 Management Interface Status
Field
Management Interface
Link State
IPv6 Routing Interface
Status/Operational Mode
MAC Address
Description
Displays the current IPv6 management interface
Indicates whether the link status is up or down.
Indicates whether the link status is up or down for the management interface.
The MAC address assigned to the management interface.
IP Address Configuration Method Indicates whether the IP address configuration method is DHCP or manual.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
The IP address of the management interface.
The IP subnet mask for the management interface.
The specified default gateway for the management interface.
Configure System Information
64
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Time
The switch software supports the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). As its name suggests, it is a less complicated version of Network Time Protocol, which is a system for synchronizing the clocks of networked computer systems, primarily when data transfer is handled through the Internet.
Configure the Time Setting
To configure the time setting:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > Time Configuration
.
6. Select the Clock Source Local or SNTP radio button.
The default is SNTP. The local clock can be set to SNTP only if the following two conditions are met:
• The SNTP server is configured.
• The SNTP last attempt status is successful.
7. In the Date field, specify the current date in months, days, and years.
8. In the Time field, specify the current time in hours, minutes, and seconds.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
65
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the SNTP Global Settings
To configure the SNTP global settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration > SNTP Global
Configuration.
When you select the SNTP option as the Clock Source , the SNTP Global Configuration section is displayed below the Time Configuration section of the page.
6. Select a Client mode radio button to specify the mode of operation of the SNTP client:
• Disable . SNTP is not operational. No SNTP requests are sent from the client and no received SNTP messages are processed.
• Unicast . SNTP operates in a point-to-point fashion. A unicast client sends a request to a designated server at its unicast address and expects a reply from which it can determine the time and, optionally, the round-trip delay and local clock offset relative to the server.
• Broadcast . SNTP operates in the same manner as multicast mode but uses a local broadcast address instead of a multicast address. The broadcast address has a single subnet scope while a multicast address has Internet wide scope.
Configure System Information
66
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default value is Unicast.
7. In the Port field, specify the local UDP port that the SNTP client receives server packets on.
The allowed range is 1025 to 65535 and the value 123. The default value is 123. When the default value is configured, the actual client port value used in SNTP packets is assigned by the operating system.
8.
Select the
Source Interface
to use for the SNTP client.
Possible values are as follows:
• None
•
VLAN 1
• Routing interface
•
Routing VLAN
• Routing loopback interface
• Tunnel interface
• Service port
By default VLAN 1 is used as the source interface.
9. Specify the Unicast Poll Interval .
This is the number of seconds between unicast poll requests expressed as a power of two when configured in unicast mode. The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is
6.
10.
Specify the
Broadcast Poll Interval
.
This is the number of seconds between broadcast poll requests expressed as a power of
2 when configured in broadcast mode. Broadcasts received prior to the expiry of this interval are discarded. The allowed range is 6 to 10. The default value is 6.
11. Specify the Unicast Poll Timeout .
This is the number of seconds to wait for an SNTP response when configured in unicast mode. The allowed range is 1 to 30. The default value is 5.
12. Specify the Unicast Poll Retry .
This is the number of times to retry a request to an SNTP server after the first time-out before attempting to use the next configured server when configured in unicast mode.
The allowed range is 0 to 10. The default value is 1.
13.
Use the
Time Zone Name
field to configure a time zone specifying the number of hours and, optionally, the number of minutes difference from UTC with
Offset Hours
and
Offset
Minutes
.
The time zone can affect the display of the current system time. The default value is UTC.
When using SNTP/NTP time servers to update the switch's clock, the time data received from the server is based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), which is the same as
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This might not be the time zone in which the switch is located.
Configure System Information
67
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
14. Use the Offset Hours field to specify the number of hours of difference from UTC.
The allowed range is –12 to 13. The default value is 0.
15. Use the Offset Minutes field to specify the number of minutes of difference from UTC.
The allowed range is 0 to 59. The default value is 0.
16. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View SNTP Global Status
When you select the SNTP option as the Clock Source , the SNTP global status is displayed below the SNTP Global Configuration section of the page.
To view SNTP global status:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Time > Time Configuration > SNTP Global Status
6. Select the SNTP option as the Clock Source .
The SNTP Global Status is displayed below the SNTP Global Configuration section.
Configure System Information
68
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table displays the nonconfigurable SNTP Global Status information.
Table 19. SNTP Global Status
Field
Version
Supported mode
Last Update Time
Last Attempt Time
Last Attempt Status
Server IP Address
Address Type
Server Stratum
Reference Clock ID
Server mode
Unicast Server Max Entries
Unicast Server Current Entries
Broadcast Count
Description
The SNTP version that the client supports.
The SNTP modes that the client supports. Multiple modes can be supported by a client.
The local date and time (UTC) that the SNTP client last updated the system clock.
The local date and time (UTC) of the last SNTP request or receipt of an unsolicited message.
The status of the last SNTP request or unsolicited message for both unicast and broadcast modes. If no message was received from a server, a status of
Other
is displayed. These values are appropriate for all operational modes.
• Other
. None of the following enumeration values.
• Success . The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.
• Request Timed Out . A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a response from the SNTP server.
• Bad Date Encoded . The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.
• Version Not Supported . The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client.
• Server Unsynchronized . The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This is indicated through the leap indicator
field on the SNTP message.
• Server Kiss Of Death
. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server.
The IP address of the server for the last received valid packet. If no message was received from any server, an empty string is shown.
The address type of the SNTP server address for the last received valid packet.
The claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.
The reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.
The mode of the server for the last received valid packet.
The maximum number of unicast server entries that can be configured on this client.
The number of current valid unicast server entries configured for this client.
The number of unsolicited broadcast SNTP messages that were received and processed by the SNTP client since the last reboot.
Configure System Information
69
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure an SNTP Server
SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond.
Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server. The switch software operates only as an SNTP client and cannot provide time services to other systems.
Time sources are established by stratums. Stratums define the accuracy of the reference clock. The higher the stratum (where zero is the highest), the more accurate the clock. The device receives time from Stratum 1 and above since it is itself a Stratum 2 device.
The following is an example of stratums:
• Stratum 0 . A real-time clock is used as the time source, for example, a GPS system.
• Stratum 1 . A server that is directly linked to a Stratum 0 time source is used. Stratum 1 time servers provide primary network time standards.
• Stratum 2 . The time source is distanced from the Stratum 1 server over a network path.
For example, a Stratum 2 server receives the time over a network link, through NTP, from a Stratum 1 server.
Information received from SNTP servers is evaluated based on the time level and server type.
SNTP time definitions are assessed and determined by the following time levels:
• T1 . Time that the original request was sent by the client.
• T2 . Time that the original request was received by the server.
• T3 . Time that the server sent a reply.
• T4 . Time that the client received the server's reply.
The device can poll unicast server types for the server time.
Polling for unicast information is used for polling a server for which the IP address is known.
SNTP servers that were configured on the device are the only ones that are polled for synchronization information. T1 through T4 are used to determine server time. This is the preferred method for synchronizing device time because it is the most secure method. If this method is selected, SNTP information is accepted only from SNTP servers defined on the device using the SNTP Server Configuration page.
The device retrieves synchronization information, either by actively requesting information or at every poll interval.
You can view and modify information for adding and modifying Simple Network Time Protocol
SNTP servers.
To configure the SNTP server settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Configure System Information
70
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Time > SNTP Server Configuration .
6. In the Server Type list, select the address type of the configured SNTP server address.
Possible values are as follows:
• IPv4
• IPv6
• DNS
The default value is IPv4.
7. In the Address field, specify the address of the SNTP server.
This is a text string of up to 64 characters, containing the encoded unicast IP address or host name of an SNTP server. Unicast SNTP requests are sent to this address. If this address is a DNS host name, then that host name is resolved into an IP address each time an SNTP request is sent to it.
Two SNTP servers exist by default:
• time-a.netgear.com
• time-c.netgear.com
8. Enter a Port number on the SNTP server to which SNTP requests are sent.
The valid range is 1 to 65535. The default value is 123.
9. Specify the Priority of this server entry in determining the sequence of servers to which
SNTP requests are sent.
The client continues sending requests to different servers until a successful response is received, or all servers are exhausted. The priority indicates the order in which to query the servers. A server entry with a precedence of 1 is queried before a server with a priority of 2, and so forth. If more than one server has the same priority, then the
Configure System Information
71
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual requesting order follows the lexicographical ordering of the entries in this table. The valid range is 1 to 3. The default value is 1.
10. Specify the NTP Version running on the server.
The range is 1 to 4. The default value is 4.
11. Click the Add button.
The SNTP server entry is added.
12. Repeat the previous steps to add additional SNTP servers.
You can configure up to three SNTP servers.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
14. To change the settings, remove an SNTP server, or refresh the page, do the following:
• Change the settings . To change the settings for an existing SNTP server, select the check box next to the configured server, enter new values in the available fields, and click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
• Remove an SNTP server . To remove an SNTP server entry, select the check box next to the configured server to remove, and then click the Delete button.
The entry is removed, and the device is updated.
• Refresh the page . To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The SNTP Server Status table displays status information about the SNTP servers configured on your switch. The following table displays SNTP Server Status information.
Table 20. SNTP Server Status
Field
Address
Last Update Time
Last Attempt Time
Description
All the existing server addresses. If no server configuration exists, a message saying No SNTP server exists flashes on the page.
The local date and time (UTC) that the response from this server was used to update the system clock.
The local date and time (UTC) that this SNTP server was last queried.
Configure System Information
72
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 20. SNTP Server Status (continued)
Field
Last Attempt Status
Requests
Failed Requests
Description
The status of the last S9 NTP request to this server. If no packet was received from this server, a status of Other is displayed.
• Other
. None of the following enumeration values.
• Success . The SNTP operation was successful and the system time was updated.
• Request Timed Out . A directed SNTP request timed out without receiving a response from the SNTP server.
• Bad Date Encoded . The time provided by the SNTP server is not valid.
• Version Not Supported . The SNTP version supported by the server is not compatible with the version supported by the client.
• Server Unsynchronized . The SNTP server is not synchronized with its peers. This is indicated through the leap indicator field on the SNTP message.
• Server Kiss Of Death
. The SNTP server indicated that no further queries were to be sent to this server. This is indicated by a stratum field equal to 0 in a message received from a server.
The number of SNTP requests made to this server since last agent reboot.
The number of failed SNTP requests made to this server since last reboot.
Configure Daylight Saving Time Settings
To configure the Daylight Saving Time settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Time > Daylight Saving Configuration
.
Configure System Information
73
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select Daylight Saving (DST) radio button:
• Disable . Disable daylight saving time.
• Recurring . Enable Recurring daylight saving time.
• Recurring EU
. Enable recurring EU daylight saving time.
• Recurring USA . Enable recurring USA daylight saving time.
• Non Recurring
. Configure non-recurring daylight saving time.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The fields in the following tables are visible only when DayLight Saving is Recurring or
Recurring EU
or
Recurring USA
.
Table 21. DayLight Saving - Recurring
Field
Begins At
Ends At
Description
These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.
• Week . Configure the start week.
• Day
. Configure the start day.
• Month . Configure the start month.
• Hours
. Configure the start hours.
• Minutes . Configure the start minutes.
These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.
• Week
. Configure the end week.
• Day . Configure the end day.
• Month
. Configure the end month.
• Hours . Configure the end hours.
• Minutes
. Configure the end minutes.
Configure System Information
74
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 21. DayLight Saving - Recurring
Field
Offset
Zone
Description
Configure recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is 1–1440 minutes.
Configure the time zone.
The fields in the following table are visible only when DayLight Saving is
Non Recurring
.
Table 22. DayLight Saving - Non Recurring
Field
Begins At
Ends At
Offset
Zone
Description
These fields are used to configure the start values of the date and time.
• Week . Configure the start week.
• Day
. Configure the start day.
• Month . Configure the start month.
• Hours
. Configure the start hours.
• Minutes . Configure the start minutes.
These fields are used to configure the end values of date and time.
• Week
. Configure the end week.
• Day . Configure the end day.
• Month
. Configure the end month.
• Hours . Configure the end hours.
• Minutes
. Configure the end minutes.
Configure the non-recurring offset in minutes. The valid range is
1–1440 minutes.
Configure the time zone.
View the DayLight Saving Time Status
To view the DayLight Saving Time status:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Time > DayLight Saving Configuration .
Configure System Information
75
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The following table displays the nonconfigurable Daylight Saving (DST) status information.
Table 23. DayLight Saving Status
Field
Daylight Saving (DST)
Begins At
Ends At
Offset (in Minutes)
Zone
Daylight Saving (DST) in Effect
Description
The Daylight Saving value, which is one of the following:
• Disable
• Recurring
• Recurring EU
• Recurring USA
• Non Recurring
Displays when the daylight saving time begins. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.
Displays when the daylight saving time ends. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.
The offset value in minutes.This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.
The zone acronym. This field is not displayed when daylight saving time is disabled.
Displays whether daylight saving time is in effect.
Configure System Information
76
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure DNS Settings
You can configure information about DNS servers that the network uses and how the switch operates as a DNS client.
Configure Global DNS Settings
You can configure global DNS settings and DNS server information.
To configure the global DNS settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > DNS > DNS Configuration .
The DNS Server Configuration table includes a default DNS server with IP address
8.8.8.8.
6. Select the DNS Status Disable or Enable radio button:
• Enable
. Allow the switch to send DNS queries to a DNS server to resolve a DNS domain name. The default value is Enable.
• Disable
. Prevent the switch from sending DNS queries.
Configure System Information
77
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
7. Enter the DNS Default domain Name to include in DNS queries.
When the system is performing a lookup on an unqualified host name, this field is provides the domain name (for example, if default domain name is netgear.com and the user enters test, then test is changed to test.netgear.com to resolve the name). The length of the name must not be longer than 255 characters.
8. Use Retry Number to specify the number of times to retry sending DNS queries to the DNS server.
This number ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 2.
9. Use Response Timeout (secs) to specify the amount of time, in seconds, to wait for a response to a DNS query.
This time-out ranges from 0 to 3600. The default value is 3.
10. Specify the Source Interface to use for DNS.
Possible values are as follows:
• None
• VLAN 1
• Routing interface
• Routing VLAN
• Routing loopback interface
• Tunnel interface
• Service port
By default VLAN 1 is used as the source interface.
11. To specify the DNS server to which the switch sends DNS queries, do the following: a.
In the DNS Server Address field in the DNS Server Configuration table, enter an IP address in standard IPv4 or IPv6 dot notation.
b. Click the Add button.
The server is added to the table. You can specify up to eight DNS servers. The precedence is set in the order that you add the servers.
12. To remove a DNS server from the DNS Server Configuration table, do the following: a.
Select the check box for the server.
b. Click the Delete button.
Note: If you click the Delete button without selecting a DNS server, all the
DNS servers are deleted from the table.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
78
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table displays DNS Server Configuration information.
Table 24. DNS Server Configuration
Field
Serial No
Preference
Description
The sequence number of the DNS server.
Shows the preference of the DNS server. The preference is determined by the order in which they were entered.
Add a Static Entry to the Local DNS Table
You can manually map host names to IP addresses or to view dynamic DNS mappings.
To add a static entry to the local DNS table:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > DNS > Host Configuration .
6. In the Host Name (1 to 255 characters) field, specify the static host name to add.
Its length cannot exceed 255 characters and it is a mandatory field.
7. In the IP Address field, enter the IP address in standard IPv4 dot notation to associate with the host name.
8. Click the Add button.
The entry appears in the list on the page.
Configure System Information
79
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The Dynamic Host Mapping table shows host name-to-IP address entries that the switch learned. The following table describes the dynamic host fields.
Table 25. DNS Dynamic Host Mapping
Field
Host
Total
Elapsed
Type
Addresses
Description
Lists the host name that you assign to the specified IP address.
Amount of time since the dynamic entry was first added to the table.
Amount of time since the dynamic entry was last updated.
The type of the dynamic entry.
Lists the IP address associated with the host name.
Configure the Switch Database Management Template
Preference
A Switch Database Management (SDM) template is a description of the maximum resources a switch or router can use for various features. Different SDM templates allow different combinations of scaling factors, enabling different allocations of resources depending on how the device is used. In other words, SDM templates enable you to reallocate system resources to support a different mix of features based on your network requirements.
Note: If you attach a unit to a stack and its template does not match the stack’s template, then the new unit automatically reboots using the template used by the other stacking members. To avoid the automatic reboot, first set the template to the SDM template used by existing members of the stack. Then power off the new unit, attach it to the stack, and power it on.
You can configure SDM template preferences for the switch.
To configure the SDM Template Preference settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
Configure System Information
80
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > SDM Template Preference .
6. Use SDM Next Template ID to configure the next active template.
It is active only after the next reboot. To revert to the default template after the next reboot, use the Default option. Possible values are as follows:
• Default
• IPv4 Data Center Plus Generic
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Generic
• IPv4 Data Center Plus Mixed Native and M4300-96X
• IPv4 Data Center Plus M4300-96X
• IPv4 Data Center Plus Native
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Native
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Plus Mixed Native and M4300-96X
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center M4300-96X
Note: The templates with the Native keyword are supported only on the
M4300-24X24F and M4300-48X stand-alone switches and on a homogenous stack of M4300-24X24F and M4300-48X switches.
Configure System Information
81
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table displays Summary information.
Table 26. SDM Template Preference Summary
Field Description
SDM Current Template ID The current active SDM template. Possible values are as follows:
• IPv4 Data Center Plus Generic
•
IPv4 Data Center Plus Native
• IPv4 Data Center Plus Mixed Native and M4300-96X
•
IPv4 Data Center Plus M4300-96X
•
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Generic
•
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Native
•
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Plus Mixed Native and M4300-96X
•
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center M4300-96X
SDM Template
ARP Entries
Identifies the template. The possible values are as follows:
•
IPv4 Data Center Plus Generic
• IPv4 Data Center Plus Native
•
IPv4 Data Center Plus Mixed Native and M4300-96X
• IPv4 Data Center Plus M4300-96X
•
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Generic
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Native
•
Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center Plus Mixed Native and M4300-96X
• Dual IPv4 and IPv6 Data Center M4300-96X
The maximum number of entries in the IPv4 Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache for routing interfaces.
IPv4 Unicast Routes
IPv6 NDP Entries
IPv6 Unicast Routes
ECMP Next Hops
IPv4 Multicast Routes
IPv6 Multicast Routes
The maximum number of IPv4 unicast forwarding table entries.
The maximum number of IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) cache entries.
The maximum number of IPv6 unicast forwarding table entries.
The maximum number of next hops that can be installed in the IPv4 and IPv6 unicast forwarding tables.
The maximum number of IPv4 multicast forwarding table entries.
The maximum number of IPv6 multicast forwarding table entries.
Configure System Information
82
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Green Ethernet Settings
To configure the Green Ethernet settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Configuration
.
6. Select the EEE mode Disable or Enable radio button. The factory default is enable.
Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) combines the MAC with a family of PHYs that support operation in a low power mode. It is defined by IEEE 802.3az Energy Efficient Task
Force. Lower power mode enables both the send and receive sides of the link to disable some functionality for power savings when lightly loaded. Transition to low power mode does not change the link status. Frames in transit are not dropped or corrupted in transition to and from low power mode. Transition time is transparent to upper layer protocols and applications.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Green Ethernet Interface Settings
To configure the Green Ethernet interface settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Configure System Information
83
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Green Ethernet > Green Ethernet Interface
Configuration .
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure
7. Use the Auto Power Down mode selection to enable or disable this option.
The factory default is Enable. When the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down for a short period of time, and then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows the switch to perform autonegotiation and save power consumption when no link partner is present.
8. Use the EEE mode menu to Enable or Disable this option.
The factory default is Disable. IF the EEE mode is not supported, then
N/A
is displayed.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Green Ethernet Local and Remote Devices
To configure green Ethernet local and remote devices:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
Configure System Information
84
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System Management Green Ethernet Green Ethernet Details
.
6. From the Interface menu, select the interface.
7. Use the EEE Admin Mode selection to enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet Admin
Mode on the port. With EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during a link idle condition. The default value is Disabled. If EEE Admin Mode is not supported, then
N/A is displayed.
8. In the EEE Transmit Wake Time field, enter the time for which MAC/switch must wait to go back to active state from LPI state when it receives a packet for transmission. The range is
8 to 65535. The default value is 17.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
85
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 27. Green Ethernet Local Device information
Field Description
Cumulative Energy Saved on this port due to Green mode(s) (Watts
* Hours)
Cumulative energy saved due to all green modes enabled on this port in (Watts * Hours).
Rx Low Power Idle Event Count
Rx Low Power Idle Duration
(uSec)
Tx Low Power Idle Event Count
This field is incremented each time MAC RX enters low-power idle
(LPI) state. Shows the total number of Rx LPI events since EEE counters were last cleared.
This field indicates duration of Rx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows the total duration of Rx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.
This field is incremented each time MAC TX enters LPI state. Shows the total number of Tx LPI events since EEE counters were last cleared.
Tx Low Power Idle Duration
(uSec)
Tw_sys_tx (uSec)
Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec)
This field indicates duration of Tx LPI state in 10 us increments. Shows the total duration of Tx LPI since the EEE counters were last cleared.
Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system can support.
Integer that indicates the remote system's Transmit Tw_sys that was used by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it wants to request from the remote system.
Tw_sys_rx (uSec)
Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec)
Fallback Tw_sys (uSec)
Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the local system requests from the remote system.
Integer that indicates the remote system’s Receive Tw_sys that was used by the local system to compute the Tw_sys that it can support.
Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the local system requests from the remote system.
Tx_dll_enabled
Tx_dll_ready
Data Link Layer Enabled: Initialization status of the EEE transmit Data
Link Layer management function on the local system.
Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the tx system initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU containing EEE TLV.
Status of the EEE capability negotiation on the local system. Rx_dll_enabled
Rx_dll_ready Data Link Layer ready: This variable indicates that the rx system initialization is complete and is ready to update/receive LLDPDU containing EEE TLV.
Time Since Counters Last Cleared Time Since Counters Last Cleared (since the time of power up, or after
EEE counters are cleared).
Configure System Information
86
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Green Ethernet Remote Device Details
To configure the Green Ethernet remote device information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System Management Green Ethernet Green Ethernet Details.
The Green Ethernet Details page displays.
6. Scroll down to the Remote Device Information section.
7. Select the Interface .
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 28. Green Ethernet Remote Device Information
Field
Remote ID
Remote Tw_sys_tx (uSec)
Description
The remote client identifier assigned to the remote system.
Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system can support.
Remote Tw_sys_tx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Transmit Tw_sys echoed back by the remote system.
Remote Tw_sys_rx (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Tw_sys that the remote system requests from the local system.
Remote Tw_sys_rx Echo (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of Receive Tw_sys echoed back by the remote system.
Remote Fallback Tw_sys (uSec) Integer that indicates the value of fallback Tw_sys that the remote system is advertising.
Configure System Information
87
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View the Green Ethernet Statistics Summary
To view the green Ethernet statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System Management Green Ethernet Green Ethernet Summary .
6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
Configure System Information
88
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 29. Green Ethernet Statistics Summary
Field Description
Current Power Consumption /Stack
(mWatts)
Power Consumption by all ports in switch in mWatts (mW).
Percentage Power Saving /Stack
(%)
Cumulative Energy Saving /Stack
(Watts * Hours)
Percentage of power saved on all ports in switch when Green mode is enabled.
Cumulative energy saved per switch in (watts * hour) when all green modes are enabled.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 30. Green Ethernet Feature Summary
Field Description
Unit The Unit ID.
Green Features supported on this unit
List of green features supported on the given unit, which could be one or more of the following:
• EEE (Energy Efficient Ethernet)
•
LPI-History (EEE Low Power Idle History)
• LLDP-Cap-Exchg (EEE LLDP Capability Exchange)
•
Pwr-Usg-Est (Power Usage Estimates).
Interface
Energy Detect Admin mode
Interface for which data is displayed or configured.
Enable or disable Energy Detect mode on the port. When this mode is enabled, when the port link is down, the PHY automatically goes down for a short period of time, then wakes up to check link pulses. This allows the switch to perform autonegotiation and save power consumption when no link partner is present.
Energy Detect Operational Status Current operational status of the Energy Detect mode.
Short Reach Admin mode Enable or disable Short Reach Admin mode on the port. With Short Reach mode enabled, PHY is forced to operate in low power mode irrespective of the cable length.
Short Reach Operational Status
EEE Admin mode
Current operational status of the Short Reach mode.
Enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet mode on the port. With EEE mode enabled, the port transitions to low power mode during link idle conditions.
Configure System Information
89
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 31. Green Ethernet Interface Summary
Field
Interface
EEE Admin mode
Description
Interface for which data is displayed or configured.
Enable or disable Energy Efficient Ethernet mode on the port. When
EEE mode is enabled, the port transitions to Low Power mode during
Link Idle condition. If EEE Admin Mode is not supported, then N/A is displayed.
Configure the Green Ethernet EEE LPI History
To configure the port Green Mode EEE history:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System Management Green Ethernet Green Ethernet LPI History .
Configure System Information
90
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Interface .
7.
In the
Sampling Interval
field, enter the interval at which EEE LPI data is collected.
This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 30 to 36000.The default value is 3600.
8.
In the
Max Samples To Keep field, enter the maximum number of samples to keep.
This is a global setting and is applied to all interfaces. The range is 1 to 168.The default value is 168.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 32. Interface Green mode EEE LPI History
Field
Percentage LPI time per switch
Sample No.
Time Since The Sample Was
Recorded
Percentage Time spent in LPI mode since last sample
Percentage Time spent in LPI mode since last reset
Description
Time spent in LPI mode per switch since EEE counters were last cleared.
Sample index.
Each time the page is refreshed, it shows a different time as it reflects the difference in current time and time at which the sample was recorded.
Percentage of time spent in LPI mode during the current measurement interval.
Percentage of time spent in LPI mode since EEE LPI statistics were reset.
Configure and Display Bonjour Settings
A Mac OS device that supports Bonjour can discover the switch in the network so that you can find the switch IP address and log in to the local browser interface of the switch. Bonjour is enabled by default. You can disable Bonjour for security reasons.
Enable or Disable Bonjour
To enable or diable Bonjour:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
Configure System Information
91
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Bonjour > Bonjour Configuration .
The Bonjour Global Configuration page displays.
6. Select one of the following radio buttons:
• Enable . Bonjour is enabled. This is the default setting.
• Disable . Bonjour is disabled.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Display Bonjour Information
To display Bonjour information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Management > Bonjour > Bonjour Details .
The Bonjour Administration Mode field displays whether Bonjour is enabled or disabled.
Configure System Information
92
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields that are displayed.
Table 33. Bonjour Published Services
Field
Service Name
Type
Domain
Port
TXT Data
Description
The Bonjour service names in the switch.
The Bonjour service type names in the switch.
The Bonjour service domain in the switch.
The Bonjour service port number.
The Bonjour service text.
Configure DHCP Server Settings
You can configure settings for DHCP server, DHCP pools, DHCP bindings, and DHCP relay.
You can also view DHCP statistics and conflicts.
Configure DHCP Server
To configure a DHCP server:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Configuration
.
Configure System Information
93
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
Select the
Admin Mode Disable
or
Enable
radio button.
This specifies whether the DHCP service is enabled or disabled. The default value is
Disable.
7. Use Ping Packet Count to specify the number of packets a server sends to a pool address to check for duplication as part of a ping operation.
The default value is 2. Valid range is 0, 2 to 10. Setting the value to 0 disables the function.
8. Select the Conflict Logging mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether conflict logging on a DHCP server is to be enabled or disabled.
The default value is Enable.
9. Select the BootP Automatic mode Disable
or
Enable
radio button.
This specifies whether BootP for dynamic pools is to be enabled or disabled. The default value is Disable.
10. To exclude addresses, do the following: a.
In the IP Range From field, enter the lowest address in the range or a single address to be excluded.
b. In the IP Range To field, to exclude a range, enter the highest address in the range.
To exclude a single address, enter the same IP address as specified in the
IP
Range From
field, or leave it as 0.0.0.0.
11. Click the Add button.
The exclude addresses are added to the switch
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
94
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the DHCP Pool
To configure the DHCP pool:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Pool Configuration
.
6. Click the Add button.
The pool configuration is added.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
95
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the DHCP Pool Configuration fields.
Table 34. DHCP Pool Configuration
Field
Pool Name*
Pool Name
Type of Binding
Network Address
Network Mask
Network Prefix Length
Client Name
Hardware Address
Hardware Address Type
Client ID
Host Number
Host Mask
Host Prefix Length
Lease Time
Description
For a user with read/write permission, this field shows names of all the existing pools along with an additional option Create . When the user selects
Create
, another text box
Pool Name
, appears where the user can enter a name for the pool to be created. For a user with read-only permission, this field shows names of the existing pools only.
The name of the pool to be created. This field appears when the user with read-write permission selects Create in the Pool Name list*. Pool
Name
can be up to 31 characters in length.
The type of binding for the pool:
• Unallocated
•
Dynamic
• Manual
The subnet address for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool.
The subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool. Either
Network Mask
or
Prefix Length
can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both.
The subnet number for a DHCP address of a dynamic pool. Either
Network Mask
or
Prefix Length
can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both. The valid range is 0 to 32.
The client name for DHCP manual pool.
The MAC address of the hardware platform of the DHCP client.
The protocol of the hardware platform of the DHCP client. Valid types are Ethernet and ieee802. The default value is Ethernet.
The client identifier for DHCP manual pool.
The IP address for a manual binding to a DHCP client. The host can be set only if f Client Identifier or Hardware Address is specified. Deleting
Host would delete the client name, client ID, and hardware address for the manual pool, and set the pool type to Unallocated.
The subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client. Either Host
Mask
or
Prefix Length
can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both.
The subnet mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client. Either Host
Mask
or
Prefix Length
can be configured to specify the subnet mask but not both. The valid range is 0 to 32.
Can be selected as Infinite to specify lease time as Infinite or
Specified Duration
to enter a specific lease period. In case of dynamic binding infinite implies a lease period of 60 days and In case of manual binding infinite implies indefinite lease period. The default value is
Specified Duration.
Configure System Information
96
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 34. DHCP Pool Configuration (continued)
Field
Days
Hours
Minutes
Default Router Addresses
Description
The number of days of the lease period. This field appears only if the user specified Specified Duration as the Lease time. The default value is 1. The valid range is 0 to 59.
The number of hours of the lease period. This field appears only if the user specified Specified Duration as the Lease time. The valid range is 0 to 22.
The number of minutes of the lease period. This field appears only if you specified Specified Duration as the lease time. The valid range is
0 to 86399.
The list of
Default Router Addresses
for the pool. Click the arrow beside the field name to expand the page and display a table where you can specify up to eight default router addresses in order of preference.
DNS Server Addresses
NetBIOS Name Server Addresses The list of NetBIOS Name Server Addresses for the pool. Click the arrow beside the field name to expand the page and display a table where you can specify up to eight NetBIOS name server addresses in order of preference.
NetBIOS Node Type
The list of DNS Server Addresses for the pool. Click the arrow beside the field name to expand the page and display a table where you can specify up to eight DNS Server Addresses in order of preference.
The NetBIOS node type for DHCP clients:
• b-node Broadcast
• p-node Peer-to-Peer
• m-node Mixed
• h-node Hybrid
Next Server Address
Domain Name
Bootfile
The
Next Server Address characters in length.
for the pool.
The domain name for a DHCP client.
Domain Name
can be up to 255
The name of the default boot image for a DHCP client. File Name can be up to 128 characters in length.
Configure DHCP Pool Options
To configure DHCP Pool options:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Configure System Information
97
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server> DHCP Pool Options .
6. In Pool Name list, select the pool name.
7. Option Code specifies the Option Code configured for the selected Pool.
8. Use Option Type to specify the Option Type against the Option Code configured for the selected pool:
• ASCII
• Hex
• IP Address
9. Option Value specifies the value against the Option Code configured for the selected pool.
10. Click the Add button.
The Option Code is added for the selected pool.
View DHCP Server Statistics
To view the DHCP server statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
98
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Server Statistics .
The following table describes the DHCP Server Statistics fields.
Table 35. DHCP Server Statistics
Field
Automatic Bindings
Expired Bindings
Malformed Messages
DHCPDISCOVER
DHCPREQUEST
DHCPDECLINE
DHCPRELEASE
DHCPINFORM
DHCPOFFER
Description
The number of automatic bindings on the DHCP Server.
The number of expired bindings on the DHCP Server.
The number of the malformed messages.
The number of DHCPDISCOVER messages received by the DHCP
Server.
The number of DHCPREQUEST messages received by the DHCP
Server.
The number of DHCPDECLINE messages received by the DHCP
Server.
The number of DHCPRELEASE messages received by the DHCP
Server.
The number of DHCPINFORM messages received by the DHCP
Server.
The number of DHCPOFFER messages sent by the DHCP Server.
Configure System Information
99
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 35. DHCP Server Statistics (continued)
Field
DHCPACK
DHCPNAK
Description
The number of DHCPACK messages sent by the DHCP Server.
The number of DHCPNAK messages sent by the DHCP Server.
View DHCP Bindings Information
To view the DHCP bindings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Bindings Information .
6. To display DHCP Bindings Information, select one of the following radio buttons:
• All Dynamic Bindings . Specify all dynamic bindings to be deleted.
• Specific Dynamic Binding . Specify specific dynamic binding to be deleted.
Configure System Information
100
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the DHCP Bindings Information fields.
Table 36. DHCP Bindings Information
Field
IP Address
Hardware Address
Lease Time Left
Type
Description
The client's IP address.
The client's hardware address.
The Lease Time Left in Days, Hours and Minutes dd:hh:mm format.
The Type of Binding: Dynamic or Manual.
View DHCP Conflicts
You can view information on hosts with address conflicts, such as when the same IP address is assigned to two or more devices on the network.
To view the DHCP conflicts:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCP Server > DHCP Conflicts Information .
Configure System Information
101
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To display DHCP conflicts information, select one of the following radio buttons:
• All Address Conflicts . Specify all address conflicts to be deleted.
• Specific Address Conflict . Specify a specific dynamic binding to be deleted.
The following table describes the DHCP Conflicts Information fields.
Table 37. DHCP Conflicts Information
Field
IP Address
Hardware Address
Detection Method
Detection Time
Description
The IP address of the host as recorded on the DHCP server.
The client’s hardware address.
The manner in which the IP address of the hosts were found on the
DHCP server.
The time when the conflict was detected in N days NNh:NNm:NNs format with respect to the system up time.
Configure the DHCP Relay
To configure DHCP relay:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCP Relay .
Configure System Information
102
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Maximum Hop Count to enter the maximum number of hops a client request can take before being discarded.
The range is (1 to 16). The default value is 4.
7.
Select the
Admin mode Disable
or
Enable
radio button.
When you select Enable, DHCP requests are forwarded to the IP address you entered in the
Server Address
field.
8.
Use
Minimum Wait Time
to enter a Minimum Wait Time in seconds.
This value is compared to the time stamp in the client's request packets, which represents the time since the client was powered up. Packets are forwarded only when the time stamp exceeds the minimum wait time. The range is (0 to 100).
9. Select the Circuit ID Option mode Disable or Enable radio button.
If you select
Enable
, Relay Agent options are added to requests before they are forwarded to the server and removed from replies before they are forwarded to clients.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the DHCP Relay Statistics fields.
Table 38. DHCP Relay Status
Field
Requests Received
Requests Relayed
Packets Discarded
Description
The total number of DHCP requests received from all clients since the last time the switch was reset.
The total number of DHCP requests forwarded to the server since the last time the switch was reset.
The total number of DHCP packets discarded by this Relay Agent since the last time the switch was reset.
DHCP L2 Relay
Configure Global DHCP L2 Relay Settings
To configure global DHCP L2 Relay settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Configure System Information
103
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Global Configuration .
6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.
For global configuration, this enables or disables the DHCP L2 Relay on the switch. The default is Disable.
7. For VLAN configuration, VLAN ID shows the VLAN ID configured on the switch.
a.
Use Admin mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected VLAN.
b. Use Circuit ID mode to enable or disable the Circuit ID suboption of DHCP
Option-82.
c. Use Remote ID String to specify the Remote ID when Remote ID mode is enabled.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The pagination navigation menu functions as follows:
Rows per page . Select how many table entries are displayed per page. Possible values are 20, 50, 100, 200, and All. If you select All, the browser might be slow to display the information.
< . Display the previous page of the table data entries.
> . Display the next page of the table data entries.
Configure a DHCP L2 Relay Interface
To configure DHCP L2 Relay:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Configure System Information
104
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Configuration .
6. Use Admin mode to enable or disable the DHCP L2 Relay on the selected interface.
The default is Disable.
7. Use 82 Option Trust mode to enable or disable an interface to be trusted for DHCP L2
Relay (Option-82) received.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics
To view the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
105
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select System > Services > DHCP L2 Relay > DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics .
The following table describes the DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics fields.
Table 39. DHCP L2 Relay Interface Statistics
Field Description
Interface
UntrustedClientMsgsWithOpt82
Shows the interface from which the DHCP message is received.
UntrustedServerMsgsWithOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted server.
Shows the number of DHCP message with option82 received from an untrusted client.
TrustedServerMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted server.
TrustedClientMsgsWithoutOpt82 Shows the number of DHCP message without option82 received from a trusted client.
Configure UDP Relay Global Settings
To configure UDP relay global settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > UDP Relay > UDP Relay Global Configuration .
Configure System Information
106
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This enables or disables UDP Relay on the switch. The default value is Disable.
7. Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x.x.x.x format.
8. Use UDP Port to specify the UDP Destination Port.
These ports are supported:
• DefaultSet . Relay UDP port 0 packets. This is specified if no UDP port is selected when creating the Relay server.
• dhcp . Relay DHCP (UDP port 67) packets.
• domain . Relay DNS (UDP port 53) packets.
• isakmp . Relay ISAKMP (UDP port 500) packets.
• mobile-ip . Relay Mobile IP (UDP port 434) packets
• nameserver . Relay IEN-116 Name Service (UDP port 42) packets
• netbios-dgm . Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server (UDP port 138) packets
• netbios-ns . Relay NetBIOS Name Server (UDP port 137) packets
• ntp . Relay network time protocol (UDP port 123) packets.
• pim-auto-rp . Relay PIM auto RP (UDP port 496) packets.
• rip . Relay Routing Image Protocol (RIP) (UDP port 520) packets
• tacacs . Relay TACACS (UDP port 49) packet
• tftp . Relay TFTP (UDP port 69) packets
• time . Relay time service (UDP port 37) packets
• Other . If this option is selected, the UDP Port Other Value is enabled. This option permits you to enter your own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value.
9. Use UDP Port Other Value to specify a UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and
65535.
10. Click the Add button.
An entry with the specified configuration is created in the UDP Relay Table.
11. Click the Apply button.
Configure System Information
107
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Your settings are saved.
The Hit Count field displays the number of UDP packets that are detected on the UDP port.
Configure UDP Relay Interface Settings
To configure UDP Relay Interface settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > UDP Relay > UDP Relay Interface Configuration .
6. Use Interface to select an Interface to be enabled for the UDP Relay.
7. Use Server Address to specify the UDP Relay Server Address in x.x.x.x format.
8. Use UDP Port to specify UDP Destination Port.
The following ports are supported:
• DefaultSet . Relay UDP port 0 packets. This is specified if no UDP port is selected when creating a Relay server.
• dhcp . Relay DHCP (UDP port 67) packets.
• domain . Relay DNS (UDP port 53) packets.
• isakmp . Relay ISAKMP (UDP port 500) packets.
• mobile-ip . Relay Mobile IP (UDP port 434) packets
• nameserver . Relay IEN-116 Name Service (UDP port 42) packets
• netbios-dgm . Relay NetBIOS Datagram Server (UDP port 138) packets
• netbios-ns . Relay NetBIOS Name Server (UDP port 137) packets
• ntp . Relay network time protocol (UDP port 123) packets.
Configure System Information
108
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• pim-auto-rp . Relay PIM auto RP (UDP port 496) packets.
• rip
. Relay RIP (UDP port 520) packets
• tacacs . Relay TACACS (UDP port 49) packet
• tftp
. Relay TFTP (UDP port 69) packets
• time . Relay time service (UDP port 37) packets
• Other
. If this option is selected, the UDP Port Other Value is enabled. This option permits the user to enter their own UDP port in UDP Port Other Value.
9. Use UDP Port Other Value to specify UDP Destination Port that lies between 0 and 65535.
10.
Use
Discard
to enable/disable dropping of matched packets.
Enable can be chosen only when a user enters 0.0.0.0 IP address. Discard mode can be set to Disable when user adds a new entry with a non-zero IP address.
11.
Click the
Add
button.
An entry with the specified configuration is created in the UDP Relay Table.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The Hit Count field displays the number of UDP packets that are detected on the UDP port.
Manage the DHCPv6 Server
Enable or Disable the DHCPv6 Server
You can configure the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6) server settings on the device. The device can act as a DHCPv6 server or DHCPv6 relay agent to help assign network configuration information to IPv6 clients.
To enable or disable DHCP service:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Server Configuration
.
Configure System Information
109
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether the DHCPv6 Service administrative mode is enabled or disabled
The default value is Disable.
7. Use the DHCPv6 Server DUID field to specify the DHCP Unique Identifier (DUID) of the
DHCPv6 server.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the DHCPv6 Pool
You can view the currently configured DHCPv6 server pools as well as to add and remove pools. A DHCPv6 server pool is a set of network configuration information available to
DHCPv6 clients that request the information.
To configure DHCPv6 pool settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Pool Configuration .
Configure System Information
110
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The Pool Name field shows the names of all the existing pools and the Create option.
Note: If you are logged in as a user with read-only permission, the Pool
Name field displays only the existing pool names. To create a pool, you must log in with the admin user name, which has read/write permissions.
6. To create a pool, select Create , and enter a unique name that identifies the DHCPv6 server pool to be created.
The name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters in length.
7. Use the Default Router Addresses field to specify the list of default router addresses for the pool.
The user can specify up to eight default router addresses in order of preference.
8. User the Domain Name field to specify the domain name for a DHCPv6 client in the pool.
The domain name can be up to 255 alphanumeric characters in length.
To delete the selected pool on the switch, click the Delete button.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation
To configure the DHCPv6 Prefix delegation settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
Configure System Information
111
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation
Configuration .
6. Select from the list of configured Pool Names .
7. In the Prefix and Prefix Length fields, specify the delegated IPv6 prefix.
8. In the DUID field, specify the DUID identifier used to identify the client’s unique DUID value.
9. Specify the Client Name , which is useful for logging or tracing only.
The name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters.
10. Specify the Valid Lifetime in seconds for the delegated prefix.
Valid values are 0 to 4294967295.
11. Specify the Prefer Lifetime in seconds for the delegated prefix.
Valid values are 0 to 4294967295.
12. Click the Add button.
The delegated prefix is added for the selected pool.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure DHCPv6 Interface Settings
You can configure the per-interface settings for DHCPv6. The DHCPv6 interface modes are mutually exclusive. The fields that can be configured on this page depend on the selected mode for the interface.
T o configure DHCPv6 Interface settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Configure System Information
112
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Interface Configuration .
6. Select the Interface with the information to view or configure. You can either: a.
In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button. The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.
b. Select the check box from the list of Interface s configured for DHCPv6 server functionality.
7. In the Admin mode list, select to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 mode to configure server functionality.
DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually exclusive.
8. In the Pool Name field, specify the DHCPv6 pool containing stateless and/or prefix delegation parameters.
9. Rapid Commit is an optional parameter. In the Rapid Commit list, select to Enable or
Disable allowing an abbreviated exchange between the client and server.
10. In the Preference field, specify the preference value used by clients to determine the preference between DHCPv6 servers.
Valid values are 0 to 4294967295. The default value is 0.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
113
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View DHCPv6 Bindings Information
You can view entries in the DHCP Bindings table. After a client acquires IPv6 configuration information from the DHCPv6 server, the server adds an entry to its database. The entry is called a binding.
To view DHCPv6 bindings information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Bindings Information .
6. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields that are displayed.
Table 40. DHCPv6 Binding Information
Field
Client Address
Client Interface
Description
The IPv6 address of the client associated with the binding.
The interface number where the client binding occurred.
Configure System Information
114
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 40. DHCPv6 Binding Information (continued)
Field
Client DUID
Prefix
Prefix Length
Prefix Type
Expiry Time
Valid Lifetime
Prefer Lifetime
Description
The DHCPv6 Unique Identifier (DUID) of the client. The DUID is a combination of the client’s hardware address and client identifier.
The IPv6 address for the delegated prefix associated with this binding.
The IPv6 mask length for the delegated prefix associated with this binding.
The type of IPv6 prefix associated with this binding.
The number of seconds until the prefix associated with a binding expires.
The maximum amount of time in seconds that the client is allowed to use the prefix.
The preferred amount of time in seconds that the client is allowed to use the prefix.
View DHCPv6 Server Statistics
You can view the DHCPv6 server statistics for the device, including information about the
DHCPv6 messages, sent, received, and discarded globally and on each interface. The values on the page indicate the various counts that accumulated since they were last cleared.
To view DHCPv6 server statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Services > DHCPv6 Server > DHCPv6 Server Statistics
.
Configure System Information
115
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To view detailed DHCPv6 statistics for an interface, from the Interface list select the entry for which data is to be displayed.
If you select All , data is shown for all interfaces.
7. To reset the DHCPv6 counters for one or more interface, select each interface with the statistics to reset and click the Clear button.
8. To refresh the page, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields that are displayed.
Table 41. DHCPv6 Server Statistics
Field
Messages Received
Total DHCPv6 Packets Received
DHCPv6 Solicit Packets Received
Description
The aggregate of all interface level statistics for received messages.
The number of DHCPv6 messages received on the interface. The
DHCPv6 messages sent from a DHCP v6 client to a DHCP v6 server include solicit, request, confirm, renew, rebind, release, decline, and information-request messages. Additionally, a DHCP v6 relay agent can forward relay-forward messages to a DHCP v6 server.
The number of DHCPv6 Solicit messages received on the interface. This type of message is sent by a client to locate DHCPv6 servers.
Configure System Information
116
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 41. DHCPv6 Server Statistics (continued)
Field Description
DHCPv6 Request Packets Received The number of requests.
DHCPv6 Confirm Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Confirm messages received on the interface.
This type of message is sent by a client to all DHCPv6 servers to determine whether its configuration is valid for the connected link.
DHCPv6 Renew Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Renew messages received on the interface.
This type of message is sent by a client to extend and update the configuration information provided by the DHCPv6 server.
DHCPv6 Rebind Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Rebind messages received on the interface.
This type of message is sent by a client to any DHCPv6 server when it does not receive a response to a Renew message.
DHCPv6 Release Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Release messages received on the interface.
This type of message is sent by a client to indicate that it no longer needs the assigned address.
DHCPv6 Decline Packets Received The number of DHCPv6 Decline messages received on the interface.
This type of message is sent by a client to the DHCPv6 server to indicate that an assigned address is already in use on the link.
DHCPv6 Inform Packets Received The number of DHCP v6 information-request messages received on the interface. This type of message is sent by a client to request configuration information other than IP address assignment.
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets
Received
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets
Received
The number of DHCPv6 relay-forward messages received on the interface. This type of message is sent by a relay agent to forward messages to servers.
The number of DHCP v6 relay-reply messages received on the interface. This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCP v6 relay agent and contains the message for the relay agent to deliver to the client.
DHCPv6 Malformed Packets
Received
Received DHCPv6 Packets
Discarded
Messages Sent
Total DHCPv6 Packets Sent
The number of DHCPv6 messages that were received on the interface but were dropped because they were malformed.
The number of Packets Discarded.
The aggregate of all interface level statistics for messages sent.
The number of DHCPv6 messages sent by the interface. The DHCPv6 messages sent from a DHCPv6 server to a DHCPv6 client include
Advertise, Reply, Reconfigure, and Relay-Reply messages.
DHCPv6 Advertisement Packets
Transmitted
The number of DHCPv6 Advertise messages sent by the interface. This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 client in response to a
Solicit message and indicates that it is available for service.
DHCPv6 Reply Packets Transmitted The number of DHCPv6 Reply messages sent from the interface to a
DHCPv6 client in response to a solicit, request, renew, rebind, information-request, confirm, release, or decline message.
Configure System Information
117
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 41. DHCPv6 Server Statistics (continued)
Field
DHCPv6 Reconfig Packets
Transmitted
DHCPv6 Relay-forward Packets
Transmitted
DHCPv6 Relay-reply Packets
Transmitted
Description
The number of DHCPv6 reconfigure messages sent by the interface.
This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 client to inform the client that the server has new or updated information. The client then typically initiates a renew/reply or Information-request/reply transaction with the server to receive the updated information.
The number of DHCPv6 Relay-Forward messages sent by the interface.
This type of message is sent by a relay agent to forward messages to servers.
The number of DHCPv6 Relay-Reply messages sent by the interface.
This type of message is sent by a server to a DHCPv6 relay agent and contains the message for the relay agent to deliver to the client.
Configure DHCPv6 Relay for an Interface
To configure DHCPv6 Relay for an interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > DHCPv6 Relay .
Configure System Information
118
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Interface with the information to view or configure.
You take one of the following actions:
•
In the
Go To Interface
field, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the
Go button. The entry corresponding to the specified interface is selected.
•
Select the check box from the list of
Interface s configured for DHCPv6 Relay functionality.
7. In the Admin mode field, specify the DHCPv6 mode, either Enable or Disable, to configure
DHCPv6 Relay functionality.
The default is Disable. DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay functions are mutually exclusive.
8. From the Relay Interface list, select an interface to reach a relay server.
9.
In the
Destination IP Address
, specify an IPv6 address to reach a relay server.
10. In the Remote ID field, specify the relay agent information option.
The remote ID is derived from the DHCPv6 server DUID and the relay interface number, or it can be specified as a user-defined string.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Power over Ethernet
Note: Power over Ethernet (PoE) is supported on models M4300-28G-POE+,
M4300-52G-POE+, and M4300-96X. The latter model requires one or more APM408 port cards.
Configure Basic PoE Settings
To configure basic PoE settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > PoE > Basic > PoE Configuration
.
Configure System Information
119
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The Unit field displays the current PoE switch unit number. The Slot field displays the current PoE slot number for model M4300-96X.
6. To configure the settings for a PoE switch unit, select the check box for the switch unit number.
7. From the Power Management mode menu, select the power management algorithm that the switch uses to deliver power to the requesting PDs:
• Static . Select Static to specify that the power allocated for each port depends on the type of power threshold that is configured on the port.
• Dynamic . Select Dynamic to specify that the power consumption on each port is measured and calculated in real time.
8. To set the traps, from the PoE Trap Configuration menu, select Enable to activate the PoE traps or Disable to deactivate the PoE traps.
The default setting is enabled.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields on the page.
Table 42. Nonconfigurable fields on the basic PoE Configuration page
Field
Model
Host
Status
Firmware Version
Power Status
Total Power (Main AC)
Description
The model of the PoE port card.
The switch in which the PoE port card is installed.
The status of the PoE port card.
The firmware version of the PoE software.
Indicates the power status.
The maximum power in watts the switch can deliver to all ports. If N/A is displayed, the power supply is not present.
Configure System Information
120
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 42. Nonconfigurable fields on the basic PoE Configuration page (continued)
Field
Power Source
Consumed Power
Description
The source of the system power.
Total power in watts that is being delivered to all ports.
Configure PoE Ports
To configure PoE ports:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > PoE > Advanced > PoE Port Configuration
.
6. Select one ore more ports by selecting the check boxes.
7. From the Port Power menu, select Enable or Disable to specify whether the port can deliver power.
8. Use the Port Priority menu to specify which ports can still deliver power if the total power delivered by the switch exceeds a specific threshold.
If the switch cannot supply power to all connected devices, the port priority determines which ports can still supply power. The lowest numbered ports with the same port priority setting are given higher priority. Select one of the following priorities:
• Low . Low priority
• Medium . Medium priority
• High . High priority
• Critical . Critical priority
9. From the Power Mode menu, select one of the following options:
• 802.3af
. Specifies that the port is powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode. For example, if the class detected by the switch is not class 4, the switch port does not power up the
PD.
Configure System Information
121
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Legacy . Specifies that the port is powered using a high-inrush current, used by legacy PDs for which startup power requirements exceed 15W.
• Pre-802.3at
. Specifies that the port is powered in the IEEE 802.3af mode initially and then switched to the high-power IEEE 802.3at mode within a period of 75 msec. This mode must be selected if the PD does not perform Layer 2 classification or if the switch performs 2-event Layer 1 classification.
• 802.3at
. Specifies that the port is powered in the IEEE 802.3at mode.
10. From the Power Limit Type menu, select the maximum power that a port can deliver.
Select one of the following options from the menu:
• None . Specifies that the port draws up to class 0 maximum power in low-power mode and up to class 4 maximum power in high-power mode.
• Class . Specifies that the port power limit is equal to the class of the attached PD.
• User . Specifies that the port power limit is equal to the value specified in the Power
Limit field.
11. In the Power Limit (W) field, specify the maximum power in watts that a port can deliver.
The maximum allowed power is 60 W per port.
12. From the Detection Type menu, select how the port detects the PD:
• pre-ieee . The port performs legacy detection.
• IEEE 802 . The port performs a 4-point resistive detection. This is the default setting.
• auto . The port performs a 4-point resistive detection, and if required, continues with legacy detection.
13. From the Timer Schedule menu, select a timer schedule that just be assigned to the port.
By default, the selection is None , which specifies that no timer schedule is assigned to the port. For more information about timer schedules, see
Timer Schedules
14. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
15. To reset the selected ports, click the Reset button.
The ports are reset.
The following table describes nonconfigurable fields on the advanced PoE Configuration page.
Table 43. Nonconfigurable fields on the Advanced PoE Configuration page
Field
Port
High Power
Max Power
Description
The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.
Enabled when particular port supports High Power mode.
The maximum power in Watts that can be provided by the port.
Configure System Information
122
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 43. Nonconfigurable fields on the Advanced PoE Configuration page (continued)
Field
Class
Output Voltage
Output Current
Output Power
Status
Fault Status
Description
The Class defines the range of power a PD is drawing from the system.
Class definitions:
0 – 0.44-12.95 (watts)
1 – 0.44-3.83 (watts)
2 – 0.44-6.48 (watts)
3 – 0.44-12.95 (watts)
4 – 0.44-25.5 (watts)
Current voltage being delivered to device in volts.
Current being delivered to device in mA.
Current power being delivered to device in Watts.
The status is the operational status of the port PD detection.
• Disabled . No power being delivered.
• DeliveringPower
. Power is being drawn by device.
• Fault . Indicates a problem with the port.
• Test
. The port is in test mode.
• otherFault . The port is idle due to error condition.
• Searching
. The port is not in one of the above states.
Describes the error description when the PSE port is in fault status.
• No Error . The PSE port is not in any error state.
• MPS Absent
. The PSE port has detected an absence of main power supply.
• Short
. The PSE port has detected a short circuit condition.
• Overload .The PD connected to the PSE port tried to provide more power than it is permissible by the hardware.
• Power Denied . The PSE port was denied power because of shortage of power or due to administrative action.
Configure PoE Power Settings
To configure PoE power settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
123
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select System > PoE > Advanced > Power Configuration .
6. In the Power Status section, from the Unit ID menu, select the unit for which you want to display the power status.
7. For switch model M4300-96X only, select the Power Auto-rebalance Enable or Disable radio button.
By default, the Enable radio button is selected. However, you can disable automatic power rebalancing among the PSU bays (power module slots) on switch model
M4300-96X.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields in the Power Status section.
Field
Total Available Power
Power Modules Slot
Module Name
Status
Power Module AC Input
Description
The total available power for the unit in watts.
The PSU bay number (power module slot number).
The power module name.
The power module status, which can be one of the following:
• Not Present . The power module is not present.
• Operational
. The power module is connected and works properly.
• Failed . The switch cannot detect the power module status.
The power module input voltage.
8. For switch models M4300-28G-POE+ and M4300-52G-POE+ only, in the Redundancy
Mode Status section, select the N+1 Configuration Enable or Disable radio button.
If you select the Enable radio button, the power redundancy feature is enabled, causing the total usable power that is delivered by all available PSUs to be less than the power that a single PSU can deliver. In such a configuration, the power load is shared evenly by all PSUs, which operate as if they are one large uninterruptible power supply. The power redundancy feature is disabled by default.
Configure System Information
124
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields in the Power Redundancy
Configuration section.
Field
N+1 Active
Number of PSU
Effective Number of PSU
Description
Displays whether the N+1 power redundancy feature is enabled. The possible values are Yes (enabled) and No (disabled).
The total number of PSUs.
The effective number of PSUs, taking the N+1 power redundancy feature into account.
The Multiple Power Source Management table displays the number of active power sources (such as port cards providing PoE) for each switch unit.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
125
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure SNMP
You can configure SNMP settings for SNMP V1/V2 and SNMPv3.
Configure the SNMP V1/V2 Community
By default, two SNMP communities exist:
• Private, with read/write privileges and status set to Enable .
• Public, with read-only privileges and status set to Enable .
These are well-known communities. You can change the defaults or to add other communities. Only the communities that you define can access to the switch using the SNMP
V1 and SNMP V2 protocols. Only those communities with read/write level access can be used to change the configuration using SNMP.
Note: If you want to use SNMP v3, use the User Accounts menu.
To configure the SNMP V1/V2 community:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Community Configuration .
6. Use Community Name to reconfigure an existing community, or to create a new one.
Use this menu to select one of the existing community names, or select 'Create' to add a new one. A valid entry is a case-sensitive string of up to 16 characters.
Configure System Information
126
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
7. Client Address . Taken together, the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of
IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to access this device.
If either (Client Address or IP Mask) value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client's address is ANDed with the mask, as is the Client
Address, and, if the values are equal, access is allowed. For example, if the Client
Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any client whose address is 192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To allow access from only one station, use a Client IP Mask value of 255.255.255.255, and use that machine's IP address for Client Address.
8. Client IP Mask
. Taken together, the Client Address and Client IP Mask denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients can use that community to access this device.
If either (Client Address or IP Mask) value is 0.0.0.0, access is allowed from any IP address. Otherwise, every client's address is ANDed with the mask, as is the Client
Address, and, if the values are equal, access is allowed. For example, if the Client
Address and Client IP Mask parameters are 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0, then any client whose IP address is 192.168.1.0 through 192.168.1.255 (inclusive) is allowed access. To allow access from only one station, use a Client IP Mask value of 255.255.255.255, and use that machine's IP address for Client Address.
9. In the Access mode menu, select Read-Write or Read-Only .
This specifies the access level for this community.
10.
Use
Status
to specify the status of this community by selecting
Enable
or
Disable
.
If you select enable, the Community Name must be unique among all valid Community
Names or the set request are rejected. If you select disable, the Community Name becomes invalid.
11. Click the Add button.
The selected community is added to the switch.
Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Settings
To configure the SNMP V1/V2 trap settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Configuration
.
Configure System Information
127
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Source Interface list, select the source interface to use for SNMP Trap receiver.
Possible values are as follows:
• Routing interface
•
Routing VLAN
• Routing loopback interface
•
Tunnel interface
• Service port
VLAN 1 is used as source interface by default.
7. To add a host that receives SNMP traps, do the following steps: a. Community Name
. Enter the community string for the SNMP trap packet to be sent to the trap manager. This name can be up to 16 characters and is case-sensitive.
b. Version . Select the trap version to be used by the receiver:
• SNMP V1 . Uses SNMP V1 to send traps to the receiver.
• SNMP V2
. Uses SNMP V2 to send traps to the receiver.
c. Protocol
. Select the protocol to be used by the receiver. Select
IPv4
if the receiver's address is IPv4 address or
IPv6
if the receiver's address is IPv6.
d. Address . Enter the IPv4 address in x.x.x.x format or the IPv6 address in xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx to receive SNMP traps from this device.
The length of the address cannot exceed 39 characters.
e. Status
. Select the receiver's status:
• Enable
. Send traps to the receiver
• Disable . Do not send traps to the receiver.
f. Click the Add button.
8.
To make changes, do the following:
•
To modify information about an existing SNMP recipient, select the check box for the recipient, and change the desired fields.
•
To delete a recipient, select the check box for the recipient and click the
Delete button.
Configure System Information
128
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure SNMP V1/V2 Trap Flags
You can enable or disable traps. When the condition identified by an active trap is encountered by the switch, a trap message is sent to any enabled SNMP Trap Receivers, and a message is written to the trap log.
To configure the trap flags:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 > Trap Flags .
Configure System Information
129
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Authentication Disable or Enable radio button.
This enables or disables activation of authentication failure traps. The factory default is
Enable.
7. Select the Link Up/Down Disable or Enable radio button
This enables or disables activation of link status traps.The factory default is Enable.
8. Select the Multiple Users Disable or Enable radio button
This enables or disables activation of multiple user traps.The factory default is Enable.
This trap is triggered when the same user ID is logged into the switch more than once at the same time (either through Telnet or the serial port).
9. Select the Spanning Tree Disable or Enable radio button.
This enables or disables activation of spanning tree traps. The factory default is Enable.
10. Select the ACL Disable or Enable radio button.
This enables or disables activation of ACL traps. The factory default is Disable.
11. Select the PoE Disable or Enable radio button.
This enables or disables activation of PoE traps. The factory default is Enable. Indicates whether PoE traps are sent.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View the Supported MIBs
To view all the MIBs supported by the switch:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V1/V2 >Supported MIBs .
Configure System Information
130
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the SNMP Supported MIBs Status fields.
Table 44. SNMP Supported MIBs
Field
Name
Description
Description
The RFC number if applicable and the name of the MIB.
The RFC title or MIB description.
Configure SNMP V3 Users
To configure SNMPv3 settings for the user account:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > SNMP > SNMP V3 > User Configuration .
Configure System Information
131
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the User Name list, select the user account to be configured.
The SNMP v3 Access mode field indicates the SNMPv3 access privileges for the user account. The admin account has read/write access, and all other accounts are assigned read-only access.
7. Select an Authentication Protocol radio button.
The valid Authentication Protocols are None, MD5 or SHA:
• If you select None , the user cannot access the SNMP data from an SNMP browser.
• If you select MD5 or SHA , the user login password are used as the SNMPv3 authentication password, and you must therefore specify a password, and it must be eight characters long.
This specifies the SNMPv3 Authentication Protocol setting for the selected user account.
8. Select a Encryption Protocol radio button.
The valid Encryption Protocols are None or DES:
• If you select the DES Protocol you must enter a key in the Encryption Key field.
• If None is specified for the Protocol, the Encryption Key is ignored.
This specifies the SNMPv3 Encryption Protocol setting for the selected user account.
9. If you selected DES in the Encryption Protocol field, enter the encryption key in the
SNMPv3 Encryption Key field.
If you did not select DES, this field is ignored. Valid keys are 0 to 15 characters long.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
132
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure LLDP
The IEEE 802.1AB-defined standard, Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP), allows stations on an 802 LAN to advertise major capabilities and physical descriptions. This information is viewed by a network manager to identify system topology and detect bad configurations on the LAN.
LLDP is a one-way protocol; there are no request/response sequences. Information is advertised by stations implementing the transmit function, and is received and processed by stations implementing the receive function. The transmit and receive functions can be enabled/disabled separately per port. By default, both transmit and receive are disabled on all ports. The application is responsible for starting each transmit and receive state machine appropriately, based on the configured status and operational state of the port.
The Link Layer Discovery Protocol-Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an enhancement to LLDP with the following features:
•
Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority, and DiffServ settings), enabling plug and play networking.
•
Device location discovery for creation of location databases.
• Extended and automated power management of Power over Ethernet endpoints.
•
Inventory management, enabling network administrators to track their network devices and determine their characteristics (manufacturer, software and hardware versions, serial/asset number).
Configure LLDP Global Settings
You can specify LLDP parameters that are applied to the switch.
To configure global LLDP settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
133
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select System > LLDP > Global Configuration .
6. In the Transmit Interval field, enter the interval in seconds to transmit LLDP frames.
The range is from 5 to 32768 secs. The default value is 30 seconds.
7. In the Transmit Hold Multiplier field, enter the multiplier on Transmit Interval to assign TTL.
The range is from 2 to 10 secs. The default value is 4.
8. In the Re-Initialization Delay field, enter the delay before re-initialization.
The range is from 1 to 10 secs. The default value is 2 seconds.
9. In the Notification Interval field, enter the interval in seconds for transmission of notifications.
The range is from 5 to 3600 secs. The default value is 5 seconds.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the LLDP Interface
To configure the LLDP interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
134
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select System > LLDP > Interface Configuration .
6. Use Go To Port to enter the Port in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.
The entry corresponding to the specified Port, is selected.
7. Use Port to specify the list of ports on which LLDP - 802.1AB can be configured.
The Link Status field indicates whether the link is up or down.
8. Use Transmit to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB transmit mode for the selected interface.
9. Use Receive to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB receive mode for the selected interface.
10. Use Notify to specify the LLDP - 802.1AB notification mode for the selected interface.
11. Optional TLV(s):
• Use Port Description to include port description TLV in LLDP frames.
• Use System Name to include system name TLV in LLDP frames.
• Use System Description to include system description TLV in LLDP frames.
• Use System Capabilities to include system capability TLV in LLDP frames.
12. Use Transmit Management Information to specify whether management address is transmitted in LLDP frames for the selected interface.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View LLDP Statistics
To view LLDP statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
Configure System Information
135
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > LLDP > Statistics .
The following table describes the LLDP Statistics fields.
Table 45. LLDP Statistics
Field
Last Update
Total Inserts
Total Deletes
Total Drops
Total Age outs
Interface
Transmit Total
Receive Total
Description
The time when an entry was created, modified or deleted in the tables associated with the remote system.
The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was inserted into tables associated with the remote systems.
The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables associated with the remote systems.
The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) could not be entered into tables associated with the remote systems because of insufficient resources.
The number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables associated with the remote systems because the information timeliness interval has expired.
The unit/slot/port for the interfaces.
The number of LLDP frames transmitted by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.
The number of valid LLDP frames received by this LLDP agent on the corresponding port, while the LLDP agent is enabled.
Configure System Information
136
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 45. LLDP Statistics (continued)
Field
Discards
Errors
Age outs
TLV Discards
TLV Unknowns
TLV MED
TLV 802.1
TLV 802.3
Description
The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.
The number of invalid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port, while the LLDP agent is enabled.
The number of age-outs that occurred on a given port. An age-out is the number of times the complete set of information advertised by a particular MAC Service Access Point (MSAP) was deleted from tables associated with the remote entries because information timeliness interval expired.
The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.
The number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which were not recognized by the LLDP agent on the corresponding port.
The total number of LLDP-MED TLVs received on the local ports.
The total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of type 802.1.
The total number of LLDP TLVs received on the local ports which are of type 802.3.
View LLDP Local Device Information
To view LLDP local device information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > LLDP > Local Device Information
.
Configure System Information
137
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In Interface list, select the ports on which LLDP - 802.1AB frames can be transmitted.
The following table describes the LLDP Local Device Information fields.
Table 46. LLDP Local Device Information
Field
Chassis ID Subtype
Chassis ID
Port ID Subtype
Port ID
System Name
System Description
Port Description
System Capabilities Supported
System Capabilities Enabled
Management Address Type
Management Address
Description
The string that describes the source of the switch identifier.
The string value used to identify the switch component associated with the local system.
The string that describes the source of the port identifier.
The string that describes the source of the port identifier.
The system name of the local system.
The description of the selected port associated with the local system.
The description of the selected port associated with the local system.
The system capabilities of the local system.
The system capabilities of the local system which are supported and enabled.
The type of the management address.
The advertised management address of the local system.
Configure System Information
138
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View LLDP Remote Device Information
You can view information on remote devices connected to the port.
To view LLDP remote device information:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > LLDP > Remote Device Information .
6.
Use
Interface
to select the local ports which can receive LLDP frames.
The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Information fields.
Table 47. LLDP Remote Device Information
Field
Remote ID
Switch ID
Switch ID Subtype
Port ID
Port ID Subtype
System Name
System Description
Port Description
System Capabilities Supported
Description
The remote ID.
The switch component associated with the remote system.
The source of the switch identifier.
The port component associated with the remote system.
The source of port identifier.
The system name of the remote system.
The description of the given port associated with the remote system.
The description of the given port associated with the remote system.
The system capabilities of the remote system.
Configure System Information
139
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 47. LLDP Remote Device Information (continued)
Field
System Capabilities Enabled
Time to Live
Management Address Type
Management Address
Description
The system capabilities of the remote system which are supported and enabled.
The Time To Live value in seconds of the received remote entry.
The type of the management address.
•
Management Address. The advertised management address of the remote system.
•
Type. The type of the management address.
View LLDP Remote Device Inventory
To view LLDP remote device inventory:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP > Remote Device Inventory .
The following table describes the LLDP Remote Device Inventory fields.
Table 48. LLDP Remote Device Inventory
Field
Port
Remote Device ID
Management Address
Description
The list of all the ports on which LLDP frame is enabled.
The remote device ID.
The advertised management address of the remote system.
Configure System Information
140
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 48. LLDP Remote Device Inventory (continued)
Field
MAC Address
System Name
Remote Port ID
Description
The MAC address associated with the remote system.
Specifies model name of the remote device.
The port component associated with the remote system.
Configure LLDP-MED Global Settings
You can specify LLDP-MED parameters that are applied to the switch.
To configure LLDP-MED global settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Global Configuration .
6. In the Fast Start Repeat Count field, enter the number of LLDP PDUs that are transmitted when the protocol is enabled.
The range is from (1 to 10). Default value of fast repeat count is 3.
The Device Class field specifies local device's MED classification. There are four different kinds of devices, three of them represent the actual end points (classified as
Class I Generic [IP Communication Controller and so on], Class II Media [Conference
Bridge and so on], Class III Communication [IP Telephone and so on]). The fourth device is Network Connectivity Device, which is typically a LAN Switch/Router, IEEE 802.1
Bridge, IEEE 802.11 Wireless Access Point and so on.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
141
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure LLDP-MED Interface
To configure LLDP-MED Interface
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Interface Configuration .
The Link Status field displays the link status of the port (up or down).
The Operational Status field displays whether the LLDP-MED TLVs are transferred on this interface.
6. Use Go To Port to enter the Port in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.
The entry corresponding to the specified Port, is selected.
7. Use Interface to specify the list of ports on which LLDP-MED - 802.1AB can be configured.
8. Use MED Status to specify whether LLDP-MED mode is enabled or disabled on this interface.
9. Use Notification Status to specify the LLDP-MED topology notification mode of the interface.
10. Use Transmit Type Length Values to specify which optional type length values (TLVs) in the LLDP-MED is transmitted in the LLDP PDUs frames for the selected interface:
• MED Capabilities . To transmit the capabilities TLV in LLDP frames.
• Network Policy . To transmit the network policy TLV in LLDP frames.
• Location Identification . To transmit the location TLV in LLDP frames.
• Extended Power via MDI - PSE . To transmit the extended PSE TLV in LLDP frames.
Configure System Information
142
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Extended Power via MDI - PD . To transmit the extended PD TLV in LLDP frames.
• Inventory Information
. To transmit the inventory TLV in LLDP frames.
11.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
View LLDP-MED Local Device Information
To view LLDP-MED local device information:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Local Device Information .
6. Use Interface to select the ports on which LLDP-MED frames can be transmitted.
Configure System Information
143
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the LLDP-MED Local Device Information fields.L
Table 49. LDP-MED Local Device Information
Field Description
Network Policy Information: Specifies if network policy TLV is present in the LLDP frames.
Media Application Type The application type. Types of application types are unknown
, voicesignaling , guestvoice , guestvoicesignalling , softphonevoice , videoconferencing
, streammingvideo
, vidoesignalling
.
Each application type that is received has the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP, tagged bit status and unknown bit status. A port can receive one or many such application types.
If a network policy TLV was transmitted, only then would this information be displayed
Inventory: Specifies if inventory TLV is present in LLDP frames
Hardware Revision
Firmware Revision
Software Revision
Serial Number
Manufacturer Name
Model Name
Asset ID
Specifies hardware version.
Specifies Firmware version.
Specifies Software version.
Specifies serial number.
Specifies manufacturers name.
Specifies model name.
Specifies asset ID.
Location Information: Specifies if location TLV is present in LLDP frames.
Sub Type Specifies type of location information.
Location Information The location information as a string for given type of location ID.
View LLDP-MED Remote Device Information
To view LLDP-MED remote device information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
144
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Remote Device Information .
6. Use Interface to select the ports on which LLDP-MED is enabled.
The following table describes the LLDP-MED Remote Device Information fields.
Table 50. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information
Field Description
Capability Information: The supported and enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port.
Supported Capabilities
Enabled Capabilities
Device Class
Specifies supported capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port.
Specifies enabled capabilities that was received in MED TLV on this port.
Specifies device class as advertised by the device remotely connected to the port.
Configure System Information
145
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 50. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information (continued)
Field Description
Network Policy Information: Specifies if network policy TLV is received in the LLDP frames on this port.
Media Application Type The application type. Types of application types are unknown
, voicesignaling , guestvoice , guestvoicesignalling , softphonevoice , videoconferencing
, streammingvideo
, vidoesignalling
. Each application type that is received has the VLAN ID, priority, DSCP, tagged bit status and unknown bit status. A port can receive one or many such application types. If a network policy TLV was received on this port, only then would this information be displayed.
VLAN Id
Priority
DSCP
Unknown Bit Status
Tagged Bit Status
The VLAN ID associated with a particular policy type.
The priority associated with a particular policy type.
The DSCP associated with a particular policy type.
The unknown bit associated with a particular policy type.
The tagged bit associated with a particular policy type.
Inventory Information: Specifies if inventory TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.
Hardware Revision Specifies hardware version of the remote device.
Firmware Revision
Software Revision
Specifies Firmware version of the remote device.
Specifies Software version of the remote device.
Serial Number
Manufacturer Name
Model Name
Asset ID
Specifies serial number of the remote device.
Specifies manufacturers name of the remote device.
Specifies model name of the remote device.
Specifies asset ID of the remote device.
Location Information: Specifies if location TLV is received in LLDP frames on this port.
Sub Type Specifies type of location information.
Location Information The location information as a string for given type of location ID.
Extended POE: Specifies if remote device is a PoE device.
Device Type Specifies remote device's PoE device type connected to this port.
Extended POE PSE: Specifies if extended PSE TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port
Available
Source
Priority
The remote ports PSE power value in tenths of watts.
The remote ports PSE power source.
The remote ports PSE power priority.
Configure System Information
146
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 50. LLDP-MED Remote Device Information (continued)
Field Description
Extended POE PD: Specifies if extended PD TLV is received in LLDP frame on this port.
Required The remote port's PD power requirement.
Source
Priority
The remote port's PD power source.
The remote port's PD power priority.
View LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory
To view LLDP-MED remote device inventory:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > LLDP > LLDP-MED > Remote Device Inventory
.
The following table describes the LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory fields.
Table 51. LLDP-MED Remote Device Inventory
Field
Port
Management Address
MAC Address
System Model
Software Revision
Definition
The list of all the ports on which LLDP-MED is enabled.
The advertised management address of the remote system.
The MAC address associated with the remote system.
Specifies model name of the remote device.
Specifies Software version of the remote device.
Configure System Information
147
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Link Dependency
The link dependency feature provides the ability to enable or disable one or more ports based on the link state of one or more different ports. With link dependency enabled on a port, the link state of that port is dependent on the link state of another port. For example, if port A is dependent on port B and the switch detects a link loss on port B, the switch automatically brings down the link on port A. When the link is restored to port B, the switch automatically restores the link to port A.
Configure Link Dependency Group
To configure a link dependency group:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Link Dependency > Link Dependency Group Configuration .
6. Select the Group ID option for which data is to be displayed. The range for Group ID is 1 to
16.
7. From the Link Action list, specify the action to be performed on the downstream interfaces when all the interfaces in the upstream list go down. The default value is Link Down.
a.
Link Down When all the upstream interfaces are down, then all the downstream interfaces are brought down. When any of the upstream interfaces are up, then all the downstream interfaces are brought up.
b. Link Up When all the upstream interfaces are down, then all the downstream interfaces are brought up. When any of the upstream interfaces are up, then all the downstream interfaces are brought down.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
148
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure a Link Dependency Interface
To configure a link dependency interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Link Dependency > Link Dependency Interface Configuration
.
6. In the Link Dependency Group ID section of the page, use the Group ID menu to select the
Group ID for which you want to display or configure data.
The range for Group ID is 1 to 16.
7. To make changes, do the following:
• Click the Clear button to clear all interfaces from the specified group.
• Click the Update button to refresh the page with the latest information on the switch.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
9. In the Link Dependency Interface Configuration section of the page, select which interfaces are displayed on the page:
• Use LAG to display LAGs only.
Configure System Information
149
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Use All to display all physical ports and LAGs.
10. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• Use the Go To Interface field by entering the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button. The entry corresponding to the specified interface, is selected.
• Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.
11. In the Downstream Interface field, specify whether the interface belongs to the group’s downstream list.
An interface that is defined as an upstream interface cannot be defined as a downstream interface in the same link state group. The default value is False.
• Select False to delete an interface from the downstream list of the specified group.
• Select True to add an interface to the downstream list of the specified group.
12. In the Upstream Interface field, specify whether the interface belongs to the group’s upstream list.
An interface that is defined as an upstream interface cannot be defined as a downstream interface in the same link state group. The default value is False.
• Select False to delete an interface from the upstream list of the specified group.
• Select True to add an interface to the upstream list of the specified group.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
14. Click the Update button to refresh the page with the latest information on the switch.
The following table describes the Link Dependency Interface Configuration nonconfigurable information that displays on the page.
Table 52. Link Dependency Interface Configuration Nonconfigurable Field
Field
Link Status
Description
Indicates whether the link for the corresponding interface is up or down.
The following table describes the Link Dependency Group Statistic nonconfigurable information that displays on the page.
Table 53. Link Dependency Group Statistic
Field
Group ID
Link Action
Group State
Group Transitions
Last Transition Time
Description
The Group ID for which data is displayed. The range is 1 to 16.
The action to be performed on downstream interfaces when all the interfaces in the upstream list go down.
The current state of the group.
Indicates the number of group transitions.
Indicates the time of the last group transitions.
Configure System Information
150
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure ISDP
You can configure ISDP global and interface settings.
Configure ISDP Basic Global Settings
To configure ISDP basic global settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > ISDP > Basic > Global Configuration .
6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether the ISDP Service is enabled or disabled. The default value is
Enabled.
7. Use Timer to specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets.
The range is 5 to 254 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.
8. Use Hold Time to specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits.
The hold time specifies how long a receiving device must store information sent in the
ISDP packet before discarding it. The range 10 to 255 seconds. The default value is 180 seconds.
9. Select the Version 2 Advertisements Disable or Enable radio button.
Configure System Information
151
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
This enables or disables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device. The default value is Enabled.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the ISDP Basic Global Configuration fields.
Table 54. ISDP Basic Global Configuration
Field Description
Neighbors table last time changed Specifies if
Device ID
Device ID Format Capability
Device ID Format
The device ID of this switch.
The device ID format capability.
The device ID format.
Configure ISDP Global Settings
To configure ISDP global settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Global Configuration .
Configure System Information
152
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Admin mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether the ISDP Service is enabled or disabled. The default value is
Enable.
7. In the Timer field, specify the period of time between sending new ISDP packets.
The range is 5 to 254 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.
8.
In the
Hold Time
field, specify the hold time for ISDP packets that the switch transmits.
The hold time specifies how long a receiving device must store information sent in the
ISDP packet before discarding it. The range 10 to 255 seconds. The default value is 180 seconds.
9. Select the Version 2 Advertisements Disable or Enable radio button.
This enables or disables the sending of ISDP version 2 packets from the device. The default value is Enable.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the ISDP Advanced Global Configuration fields.
Table 55. ISDP Advanced Global Configuration
Field Description
Neighbors table last time changed Displays when the Neighbors table last changed.
Device ID
Device ID Format Capability
Device ID Format
The device ID of this switch.
The device ID format capability.
The device ID format.
Configure an ISDP Interface
To configure an ISDP interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > ISDP > Advanced > Interface Configuration
.
Configure System Information
153
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Port to select the port on which the admin mode is configured.
7. Use Admin mode to enable or disable ISDP on the port.
The default value is Enable.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View an ISDP Neighbor
To view an ISDP neighbor:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Neighbor .
Configure System Information
154
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the ISDP Neighbor fields.
Table 56. ISDP Neighbor
Field
Device ID
Interface
Address
Capability
Platform
Port ID
Hold Time
Advertisement Version
Entry Last Changed Time
Software Version
Description
The device ID of the ISDP neighbor.
The interface on which the neighbor is discovered.
The address of the neighbor.
The capability of the neighbor. These are supported:
•
Router
• Trans Bridge
•
Source Route
• Switch
•
Host
• IGMP
•
Repeater
The model type of the neighbor. (0 to 32)
The port ID on the neighbor.
The hold time for ISDP packets that the neighbor transmits.
The ISDP version sending from the neighbor.
The time since last entry is changed.
The software version on the neighbor.
View ISDP Statistics
To view ISDP statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure System Information
155
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select System > ISDP > Advanced > Statistics .
The following table describes the ISDP Statistics fields.
Table 57. ISDP Statistics
Field
ISDP Packets Received
ISDP Packets Transmitted
ISDPv1 Packets Received
ISDPv1 Packets Transmitted
ISDPv2 Packets Received
ISDPv2 Packets Transmitted
ISDP Bad Header
ISDP Checksum Error
ISDP Transmission Failure
ISDP Invalid Format
ISDP Table Full
ISDP Ip Address Table Full
Description
The ISDP packets received including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets.
The ISDP packets transmitted including ISDPv1 and ISDPv2 packets.
The ISDPv1 packets received.
The ISDPv1 packets transmitted.
The ISDPv2 packets received.
The ISDPv2 packets transmitted.
The ISDP bad packets received.
The number of the checksum error.
The number of the transmission failure.
The number of the invalid format ISDP packets received.
The table size of the ISDP table.
The table size of the ISDP IP address table.
Configure System Information
156
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Timer Schedules
You can configure the global timer settings and set up timer schedules.
Configure the Global Timer Settings
To add or delete a global timer schedule:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Timer Schedule > Basic > Global Configuration .
6. Use the Timer Schedule Name to specify the name of a timer schedule.
7. Take one of the following actions:
• Click the Add button.
The timer schedule is added.
• Click the Delete button.
The timer schedule is deleted.
Configure the Timer Schedule
To configure the timer schedule:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Configure System Information
157
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Services > Timer Schedule > Advanced > Schedule Configuration .
6. In the Timer Schedule Name list, select the timer schedule.
7. In the Timer Schedule Type list, select Absolute or Periodic .
8. In the Timer Schedule Entry list, select the number of the timer schedule entries to be configured or added.
If you are adding an entry, select new .
9. In the Time Start field, enter the time of the day in format (HH:MM) when the schedule operation is started.
This field is required. If no time is specified, the schedule does not start running.
10. In the Time End field, enter the time of the day in format (HH:MM) when the schedule operation is terminated.
11. Use the Date Start to set the schedule start date.
If no date is specified, the schedule starts running immediately.
12. Use the Date Stop to set the schedule termination date.
If No End Date selected, the schedule operates indefinitely.
13. Use the Recurrence Pattern to show with what period the event repeats.
If recurrence is not needed (a timer schedule must be triggered just once), then set Date
Stop as equal to Date Start. There are the following possible values of recurrence:
• Daily . The timer schedule works with daily recurrence
Configure System Information
158
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Daily mode . Every WeekDay selection means that the schedule is triggered every day from Monday to Friday. Every Day(s) selection means that the schedule is triggered every defined number of days. If number of days is not specified, then the schedule is triggered every day.
• Weekly
. The timer schedule works with weekly recurrence
Every Week(s) . Define the number of weeks when the schedule is triggered. If number of weeks is not specified, then the schedule is triggered every week.
WeekDay . Specify the days of week when the schedule operates.
• Monthly
. The timer schedule works with monthly recurrence
Monthly mode
. Show the day of the month when the schedule is triggered. Field
Every Month(s) means that the schedule is triggered every defined number of months.
14.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure System Information
159
3.
Stacking
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
M4300 Series Switch Stacking Overview
•
Firmware Synchronization and Upgrade
•
Stack Configuration Maintenance
•
Stack Master Election
•
Stack Factory Defaults Reset Behavior
•
Stack NSF
•
Configure a Stack
•
Run Stack Port Diagnostics
•
Configure Stack Firmware Synchronization
•
View NSF Summary Data
•
View NSF Checkpoint Statistics
3
160
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
M4300 Series Switch Stacking Overview
A stackable switch is a switch that is fully functional operating as a stand-alone unit but can also be set-up to operate together with up to seven other switches. This group of switches shows the characteristics of a single switch while having the port capacity of the sum of the combined switches.
One of the switches in the stack controls the operation of the stack. This switch is called the stack
master
. The remaining switches in the stack are stack
members
. The stack members use stacking technology to behave and work together as a unified system. Layer 2 and higher protocols present the entire switch stack as a single entity to the network.
The stack master is the single point of stack-wide management. From the stack master, you configure the following:
•
System-level (global) features that apply to all stack members
• Interface-level features for all interfaces on any stack member
A switch stack is identified in the network by its network IP address. The network IP address is assigned according to the MAC address of the stack master. Every stack member is uniquely identified by its own stack member number, which is from 1 to 8. The stack master can be any number within that range.
Stacking supports the following:
•
Up to eight switches per stack
• Single IP address management through a web browser, the CLI, or SNMP.
•
Master-slave configuration:
• The master retains configuration for entire stack.
•
Automatic detection of new members, with synchronization of firmware (upgrade or downgrade as needed).
•
Configuration updates across the stack through a single operation.
• Automatic master failover. Fully resilient stack with chain and ring topology.
•
Hot swapping (insertion and removal) of stack members.
Firmware Synchronization and Upgrade
All stack members must run the same software version to ensure compatibility within the stack. By default, if a unit is added to the stack and its software version is not the same as the stack master, that unit is not allowed to join the stack. You can enable the Stack Firmware
Auto Upgrade feature, which automatically synchronizes the firmware version on the new unit with the version running on the stack master. The synchronization operation might result in either upgrade or downgrade of firmware on the mismatched stack member.
Upgrading the firmware on a stack of switches is the same as upgrading the firmware on a single switch. After you download a new image by using the File Download page or SCC, the downloaded image is distributed to all the connected units of the stack.
Stacking
161
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Note: We recommend that you set the active image for all stack members the same as the active image of the stack master. In other words, if image1 is the active image on the stack master, all units must use image1 as the active image. For information about configuring the active image, see
Configure Dual Image Settings
Stack Configuration Maintenance
The stack master stores and maintains the saved and running configuration files for the switch stack. The configuration files include the system-level settings for the switch stack and the interface-level settings for all stack members. Each stack member retains a copy of the saved file for backup purposes. If the master is removed from the stack or becomes unavailable, another member is elected master and then runs from that saved configuration.
The switch master copies its running configuration to the stack member configured as the
standby
unit whenever it changes (subject to some restrictions to reduce overhead). This enables the standby unit to take over the stack operation with minimal interruption if the stack master becomes unavailable. The running-config synchronization also occurs when the running configuration is auto-saved on the stack master or when the standby unit changes.
Stack Master Election
All stack members are eligible stack masters. If the stack master becomes unavailable, the remaining stack members participate in electing a new stack master from among themselves.
The following factors determine which switch is elected the stack master:
• The switch that is master always has priority to retain the role of master.
• Assigned priority.
• MAC address.
When the stack is powered up and completes the boot process or the original stack master becomes unavailable, the stack master is determined through an election process.
The rules for stack master election are as follows:
• If a unit was elected stack master previously, then it remains the stack master and other units are stack members.
• If no units were stack masters, or more than one unit was a stack master, then the unit with the highest management preference is elected stack master. The management preference can be assigned by the administrator. However, if all units are assigned the same management preference, then the unit with the highest MAC address is assigned as the stack master.
Stacking
162
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Stack Factory Defaults Reset Behavior
If the stack master is reset to the factory default settings (see
Reset the Switch to Its Factory
Default Settings
on page 657), the stack master applies the default settings to all the stack
members and resets the stack, including all participating stack members. When the stack boots, the stack master election process begins.
A switch can be described in terms of three semi-independent functions called the forwarding plane, the control plane, and the management plane. The forwarding plane forwards data packets. The forwarding plane is implemented in hardware. The control plane is the set of protocols that determine how the forwarding plane forwards packets, deciding which data packets are allowed to be forwarded and where they go. Application software on the management unit acts as the control plane. The management plane is application software running on the management unit that provides interfaces allowing a network administrator to configure and monitor the device.
Stack NSF
Nonstop forwarding (NSF) allows the forwarding plane of stack units to continue to forward packets while the control and management planes restart as a result of a power failure, hardware failure, or software fault on the management unit. A nonstop forwarding failover can also be manually initiated by clicking the Initiate Failover button on the NSF Summary page. Traffic flows that enter and exit the stack through physical ports on a unit other than the management continue with at most sub-second interruption when the management unit fails.
To prepare the backup management unit in case of a failover, applications on the management unit continuously checkpoint some state information to the backup unit.
Changes to the running configuration are automatically copied to the backup unit. MAC addresses stay the same across a nonstop forwarding failover so that neighbors are not required to relearn them.
When a nonstop forwarding failover occurs, the control plane on the backup unit starts from a partially initialized state and applies the checkpointed state information. While the control plane is initializing, the stack cannot react to external changes, such as network topology changes. Once the control plane is fully operational on the new management unit, the control plane ensures that the hardware state is updated as necessary. Control plane failover time depends on the size of the stack, the complexity of the configuration, and the speed of the
CPU.
The management plane restarts when a failover occurs. Management connections must be reestablished.
Stacking
163
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
For NSF to be effective, adjacent networking devices must not reroute traffic around the restarting device. The switch uses three techniques to prevent traffic from being rerouted:
• A protocol can distribute a part of its control plane to stack units so that the protocol can give the appearance that it is still functional during the restart. Spanning tree and port channels use this technique.
• A protocol can enlist the cooperation of its neighbors through a technique known as graceful restart. OSPF uses graceful restart if it is enabled.
• A protocol can restart after the failover if neighbors react slowly enough that they cannot normally detect the outage. The IP multicast routing protocols are a good example of this behavior.
To take full advantage of nonstop forwarding, Layer 2 connections to neighbors must be through port channels that span two or more stack units, and Layer 3 routes must be ECMP routes with next hops through physical ports on two or more units. The hardware can quickly move traffic flows from port channel members or ECMP paths on a failed unit to a surviving unit.
Configure a Stack
You can move the primary management unit functionality from one unit to another. Upon execution, the entire stack (including all interfaces in the stack) is unconfigured and reconfigured with the configuration on the new primary management unit. After the reload is complete, all stack management capability must be performed on the new primary management unit. To preserve the current configuration across a stack move, save the current configuration to the NVRAM before performing the stack move. A stack move causes all routes and Layer 2 addresses to be lost. The administrator is prompted to confirm the management move.
Select a New Stack Master
To select a new stack master:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Stacking > Basic > Stack Configuration .
Stacking
164
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The Management Unit Selected menu displays the current primary management unit.
6. To change the primary management unit, select another unit ID of the stack member to become the stack master.
A message displays to notify you that moving stack management unconfigures the entire stack including all interfaces.
7. Click the OK button to confirm the selection and reload the stack.
The stack is unavailable until the boot process completes.
Specify the Stack Sample Mode
To specify the stack sample mode:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Stacking > Basic > Stack Configuration .
Use the Stack Sample mode section of the page to configure global status management mode, and sample size. The mode and sample size parameters are applied globally to all units in the stack.
6. In the Sample mode list, select one of the following:
• Cumulative . Tracks the sum of received time-stamp offsets cumulatively.
• History . Tracks the history of received timestamps.
7. In the Max Samples field, configure the maximum number of samples to keep.
Stacking
165
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The valid range is 100 to 500.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a Stack Member
To configure a stack member before adding it to the stack:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Stacking > Stack Configuration .
6. Select the Unit ID of the stack member to add.
7. Select the switch model number of the new unit from the Switch Type field.
8. Optionally, specify the Switch Priority to select whether this unit becomes a management unit in preference to another unit.
The default value for this setting is undefined. If the preference level is set to zero, then the device cannot become a management unit. A higher value indicates a higher priority.
The maximum value is 15.
9. Use the Management Status field to indicate whether the selected switch is the stack master, a normal stacking member, or the standby unit.
A standby unit takes over the stack master responsibilities if the stack master becomes unavailable.
10. Click the Add button.
The preconfigured unit is added to the stack.
Stacking
166
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Change the Settings for an Existing Stack Member
To change the settings for an existing stack member:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Stacking > Stack Configuration
.
The Stack Configuration page displays.
6. Select the check box next to the stack member to configure.
7.
If desired, specify a new unit ID for the stack member in the
Change to Switch ID
field.
The renumbering process causes the unit to reload.
8. Specify the switch type, priority, or management status from the available fields.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
The changes to the stack member are saved.
Note: If you configured a new unit number for an existing stack member, you are asked to confirm the change. Click the
OK
button to continue or click the Cancel button to retain the original settings.
10. To make other changes, do the following:
• To remove the selected unit from the stack, click the Delete button.
•
To update the page with the latest information from the switch, click the
Refresh button.
Note: If you are adding or removing a dummy unit with PoE for preconfiguration, you must log in again to an actual web session to apply changes and observe relevant PoE web pages.
11. If you made any changes, click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Stacking
167
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Configuration fields.
Table 58. Stack Configuration
Field
Hardware Management
Preference
Standby Status
Switch Status
Description
The hardware management preference of the switch. The hardware management preference can be disabled or unassigned.
Identifies the switch that is configured as the standby unit. The possible values are as follows:
• Cfg Standby . Indicates that the unit is configured as the standby unit.
The unit configured as the standby switch becomes the stack manager if the current manager fails.
• Opr Standby
. Indicates that this unit is operating as the standby unit and the configured standby unit is not part of the stack.
• None
. The switch is not configured as the standby unit.
The status of the selected unit. The possible values are as follows:
• OK . The unit is connected and works properly.
• Unsupported
. The type of inserted unit is not supported.
• Code Mismatch . The firmware version is not identical to the master or management unit.
• Config Mismatch . The inserted device type is different from the configured devices.
• Not Present . The unit is not connected.
• SDM Mismatch
. The SDM template does not match.
• Updating Code . A firmware update is in progress.
• STM Mismatch
. The STM template does not match.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Status information that is displayed.
Table 59. Stack Status nonconfigurable fields
Field
Hardware Management
Preference
Standby Status
Description
The hardware management preference of the switch, which can be disabled or unassigned.
Identifies the switch that is configured as the standby unit:
• Cfg Standb y. The unit is configured as the standby unit. The unit configured as the standby switch becomes the stack manager if the current manager fails.
• Opr Standb y. This unit is operating as the standby unit and the configured standby Unit is not part of the stack.
• None
. The switch is not configured as the standby unit.
Stacking
168
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 59. Stack Status nonconfigurable fields (continued)
Field
Switch Status
Unit ID
Switch Description
Serial Number
Up Time
Preconfigured Model Identifier
Plugged-In Model Identifier
Detected Code Version
Detected Code in Flash
SFS Last Attempt Status
Description
The status of the selected unit. Possible values are as follows:
• OK . The unit is connected and works properly.
• Unsupported
. The type of inserted unit is not supported.
• Code Mismatch . The code version is not identical to the master/management unit.
• Config Mismatch . The inserted device type is different from the configured devices.
• Not Present . The unit is not connected.
• SDM Mismatch
. SDM template mismatch.
• Updating Code . A code update is in progress.
• STM Mismatch
. STM template mismatch.
The unit ID of the specific switch.
The description for the unit that is configured by the user.
The unique box serial number for this switch.
The relative time since the last reboot of the switch.
The model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the device.
The model type assigned by the device manufacturer to identify the plugged-in device.
The detected version of code on this unit.
The release number and version number of the code stored in flash.
The stack firmware synchronization last attempt status.
Configure the Mode of the Stack Ports
By default, the stack ports on each switch are configured for stacking. However, you can use these ports as standard Ethernet ports. Use the Stack Port Configuration page to configure the mode of the stack ports and to view information about the ports.
To configure the mode of the stack ports:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
Stacking
169
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Port Configuration .
The page is shown in two parts.
6. Select the check box associated with the unit and port to configure:
7. From the Configured Stack mode field, select the operating mode of the port to be either:
• Stack . The port connects to the stack port on another stack member. This is the default value for back panel stack mode.
• Ethernet . The port operates as a standard switch port that receives and transmits network traffic. This is the default value for front panel stack mode.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes Stack Port Configuration fields.
Table 60. Stack Port Configuration
Field
Unit ID
Port
Slot ID
Type
Product Name
Running Stack mode
Link Status
Description
The unit.
The stackable interfaces on the given unit.
The slot ID in the format unit/slot.
The type of stackable interfaces on the given unit.
The name of the XFP/SFP+ adapter.
The run-time mode of the stackable interface.
The link status (UP/DOWN) of the port.
Stacking
170
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 60. Stack Port Configuration (continued)
Field
Link Speed (Gbps)
Transmit Data Rate (Mbps)
Transmit Error Rate
Total Transmit Errors
Receive Data Rate (Mbps)
Receive Error Rate
Total Receive Errors
Link Flaps
Description
The maximum speed of the stacking port.
The approximate transmit rate on the stacking port.
The number of errors in transmit packets per second.
The total number of errors in transmit packets since boot. The counter might wrap.
The approximate receive rate on the stacking port.
The number of errors in receive packets per second.
The total number of errors in receive packets since boot. The counter might wrap.
The total number of link flaps.
Run Stack Port Diagnostics
To run stack port diagnostics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Port Diagnostics
.
Stacking
171
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select Unit ID to display the packet path starting from the selected unit.
7. Select All to display the packet path from all the units in the stack.
8. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the Stack Port Diagnostics fields.
Table 61. Stack Port Diagnostics
Field
Unit ID
Port
Port Diagnostics Info
Definition
The unit.
The stackable interface on the given unit.
Displays three text fields (80 character strings) populated by the driver containing debug and status information.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Stack Port Packet Path fields.
Table 62. Stack Port Packed Path
Field
Direction
Packet Path
Definition
The path direction.
The packet path.
Configure Stack Firmware Synchronization
To configure the stack firmware synchronization features:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Stacking > Advanced > Stack Firmware Synchronization .
Stacking
172
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Specify whether Stack Firmware Auto Upgrade is enabled or disabled.
This feature determines what to do when a new member attempts to join the stack, and its firmware does not match the version running on the master.
• Enable . The stack master upgrades the version on the new member to match the version running on the rest of the stack.
• Disable . The new member is not allowed to join.
7. Use the Traps field to enable or disable sending of traps during stack firmware synchronization start, failure, or finish.
8. Use the Allow Downgrade field to determine whether the stack master downgrades the firmware version on a new member that attempts to join the stack if the new member has a firmware version that is more recent that the stack.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View NSF Summary Data
To display NSF Summary data:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select System > Stacking > NSF > NSF Summary
Stacking
173
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use the Admin Status radio button to enable or disable the NSF feature on the stack.
When enabled, the stack selects a backup unit. Applications on the management unit copy data to the backup unit.
7. To cause the supervisor unit to fail over to the backup blade, click the Initiate Failover button on the top right corner of the page.
8. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable NSF Summary data that is displayed.
Table 63. NSF Summary
Field
Operational Status
Last Startup Reason
Time Since Last Restart
Description
Indicates whether NSF is enabled on the chassis. NSF is enabled by default.
The type of activation that caused the software to start the last time. The possible values are as follows:
• Power On
. The switch is rebooted. A power cycle or an administrative reload command might caused this
• Cold Admin Move
. The system resets all hardware tables without a reboot and the application begins from a pre-initialized state, but no data is retained from before the failover.
• Warm Admin Move . The administrator issued a command for the standby manager to take over.
• Auto Warm . The primary management card restarted due to a failure, and the system executed a nonstop forwarding failover.
• Auto Cold . The system switched from the active manager to the backup manager and could not maintain user data traffic. This is usually caused by multiple failures occurring close together.
Time since the current management card because the active management card. For the backup manager, the value is set to 0d:00:00:00.
Stacking
174
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 63. NSF Summary (continued)
Field
Restart In Progress
Warm Restart Ready
Description
Indicates whether a restart is in progress. A restart is not considered complete until all hardware tables are fully reconciled.
Indicates whether the initial full checkpoint finished.
Copy of Running Configuration to Backup Unit
Status
Backup Configuration Age
Time Until Next Backup
Status of copying the running configuration to backup blades.
Indicates the time since the running configuration was last copied to the backup blade.
Indicates the number of seconds until the running configuration is copied to the backup blade.
NSF Support on Unit
Unit ID
NSF Support
The slot number for the blade.
Displays whether the switch supports the nonstop forwarding (NSF) feature.
View NSF Checkpoint Statistics
To view NSF checkpoint statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
System > Chassis > NSF > Checkpoint Statistics.
6. To reset the statistics on the page, click the Clear button.
Stacking
175
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 64. NSF Checkpoint Statistics
Field Description
Messages Checkpoint
Bytes Checkpointed
The number of messages sent from the supervisor to the backup blade.
How much data was sent from the supervisor until to the backup blade.
Time Since Counters Cleared
Checkpoint Message Rate
The amount of time since the counters were reset.
The number of seconds between measurements.
Last 10-second Message Rate How many messages were sent in the last measurement interval.
Highest 10-second Message Rate The highest number of messages that were sent in a measurement interval.
Stacking
176
4.
Configure Switching Information
4
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Configure VLANs
•
Auto-VoIP
•
iSCSI Overview
•
Spanning Tree Protocol
•
Multicast
•
Configure MVR
•
MAC Address Table
•
Port Settings
•
Link Aggregation Groups
•
Multiple Registration Protocol Overview
•
Loop Protection
177
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure VLANs
Adding virtual LAN (VLAN) support to a Layer 2 switch offers some of the benefits of both bridging and routing. Like a bridge, a VLAN switch forwards traffic based on the Layer 2 header, which is fast, and like a router, it partitions the network into logical segments, which provides better administration, security, and management of multicast traffic.
By default, all ports on the switch are in the same broadcast domain. VLANs electronically separate ports on the same switch into separate broadcast domains so that broadcast packets are not sent to all the ports on a single switch. When you use a VLAN, users can be grouped by logical function instead of physical location.
Each VLAN in a network is assigned an associated VLAN ID, which appears in the IEEE
802.1Q tag in the Layer 2 header of packets transmitted on a VLAN. An end station can omit the tag, or the VLAN portion of the tag, in which case the first switch port to receive the packet can either reject it or insert a tag using its default VLAN ID. A given port can handle traffic for more than one VLAN, but it can support only one default VLAN ID.
You can define VLAN groups stored in the VLAN membership table. Each switch in the
M4300 Series and M4300-96X family supports up to 1024 VLANs. VLAN 1 is created by default and is the default VLAN of which all ports are members.
Configure Basic VLAN Settings
The internal VLAN is reserved by a port-based routing interface and invisible to the end user.
Once these internal VLANs are allocated by the port-based routing interface, they cannot be assigned to a routing VLAN interface.
To configure internal VLAN settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure Switching Information
178
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Basic > VLAN Configuration .
6. To reset VLAN settings to their default values, select the Reset Configuration check box.
The factory default values are as follows:
• All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.
• All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.
• All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.
• All ports are configured with Ingress Filtering disabled.
• All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.
• GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared.
All VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted.
7. Specify the internal VLAN settings.
The Internal VLAN Configuration section displays the allocation base and the allocation mode of internal VLAN.
a.
Use Internal VLAN Allocation Base to specify the VLAN allocation base for the routing interface.
The default base range of the internal VLAN is 1 to 4093.
b. Select the Internal VLAN Allocation Policy Ascending or Descending radio button.
This specifies a policy for the internal VLAN allocation.
8. Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN identifier for the new VLAN.
The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.
9. Use the optional VLAN Name field to specify a name for the VLAN.
Configure Switching Information
179
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The VLAN name can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. The default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.
The VLAN Type field identifies the type of the VLAN you are configuring. You cannot change the type of the default VLAN (VLAN ID = 1): it is always type Default. When you create a VLAN using this page, its type is always Static. A VLAN that is created by GVRP registration initially uses a type of Dynamic. When configuring a dynamic VLAN, you can change its type to Static.
10. Click the Add button.
The VLAN is added to the switch.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Reset the VLAN Configuration to Default Setting
To reset the VLAN configuration to default settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
180
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Reset Configuration check box.
WARNING:
If you select this button and confirm your selection on the next page, all VLAN configuration parameters are reset to their factory default values.
7. Confirm your selection.
All VLANs, except for the default VLAN, are deleted. The factory default values are as follows:
• All ports are assigned to the default VLAN of 1.
• All ports are configured with a PVID of 1.
• All ports are configured to an Acceptable Frame Types value of Admit All Frames.
• All ports are configured with ingress filtering disabled.
• All ports are configured to transmit only untagged frames.
• GVRP is disabled on all ports and all dynamic entries are cleared.
Configure an Internal VLAN
The Internal VLAN section displays the allocation base and the allocation mode of internal
VLAN. The internal VLAN is reserved by a port-based routing interface and invisible to the end user. Once these internal VLANs are allocated by the port-based routing interface, they cannot be assigned to a routing VLAN interface.
To configure an internal VLAN:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure Switching Information
181
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Configuration .
6. In the Internal VLAN Allocation Base field, specify the VLAN allocation base for the routing interface.
You can enter a value from 1 to 4093.
7. Select the Internal VLAN Allocation Policy Ascending or Descending radio button.
This specifies a policy for the internal VLAN allocation.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure VLAN Trunking
You can configure switchport mode settings on interfaces. The switchport mode defines the purpose of the port based on the type of device it connects to and constraints the VLAN configuration of the port accordingly. Assigning the appropriate switchport mode helps simplify VLAN configuration and minimize errors.
To configure VLAN trunking:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure Switching Information
182
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Trunking Configuration .
6. To specify which interfaces are displayed on the page, select one of the following options:
• Select the Unit ID field to display physical port information for the selected unit.
• Use LAG to display LAGs only.
• Use All to display all physical ports.
7. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• Use Go To Interface to select an interface by entering its number.
• Use Interface to select the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.
8. In the Switchport Mode list, select one of the following:
• Access . This mode is suitable for ports connected to end stations or end users.
Access ports participate in only one VLAN. They accept both tagged and untagged packets, but always transmit untagged packets.
• Trunk . This mode is intended for ports that are connected to other switches. Trunk ports can participate in multiple VLANs and accept both tagged and untagged packets.
• General . This mode enables custom configuration of a port. You configure the general port VLAN attributes, such as membership, PVID, tagging, ingress filter, and so on, using the settings on the Port Configuration page. By default, all ports are initially configured in General mode.
• Host . This mode is used for private VLAN configuration.
• Promiscuous . This mode is used for private VLAN configuration.
9. Select from the list to configure the Access VLAN ID .
This is the access VLAN for the port, and is valid only when the port switchport mode is
Access .
Configure Switching Information
183
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
10. Select from the list to configure the Native VLAN ID .
This is the native VLAN for the port, and is valid only when the port switchport mode is
Trunk .
11. Configure the Trunk Allowed VLANs .
This is the set of VLANs of which the port can be a member when configured in Trunk mode. By default, this list contains all possible VLANs, even if they are not yet created.
VLAN IDs are in the range 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range, or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces are not permitted. A zero value clears the allowed
VLANs. An All value sets all VLANs in the range (1 to 4093).
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The Native VLAN Tagging field displays enabled or disabled:
• When VLAN tagging is enabled, if the trunk port receives untagged frames, it forwards them on the native VLAN with no VLAN tag.
• When VLAN tagging is disabled, if the trunk port receives untagged frames, it includes the native VLAN ID in the VLAN tag when forwarding
Configure VLAN Membership
To configure VLAN membership:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Membership .
Configure Switching Information
184
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the VLAN ID list, select the VLAN ID.
7.
In the
Group Operation
list, select all the ports and configure them:
• Untag All
. Select all the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. All the ports are included in the VLAN.
• Tag All
. Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged. All the ports are included in the VLAN.
• Remove All
. All the ports that can be dynamically registered in this VLAN through
GVRP. This selection excludes all ports from the selected VLAN.
8. In the Port display, select port numbers to add them to this VLAN.
Each port can use one of three modes:
• T (Tagged)
. Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged.
The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.
• U (Untagged)
. Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.
• BLANK (Autodetect)
. Select the ports that can be dynamically registered in this
VLAN through GVRP. This selection excludes a port from the selected VLAN.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
185
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 65. Advanced VLAN Membership
Field
VLAN Name
VLAN Type
Definition
The name for the VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks. VLAN ID 1 always uses the name Default.
The type of the VLAN you selected:
• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present
• Static
. A VLAN that you configured
• Dynamic . A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove
View VLAN Status
You can view the status of all currently configured VLANs.
To view the VLAN status:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > VLAN Status .
Configure Switching Information
186
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 66. VLAN Status
Field
VLAN ID
VLAN Name
VLAN Type
Routing Interface
Member Ports
Definition
The VLAN identifier (VID) of the VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.
The name of the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 is always named `Default`.
The VLAN type:
• Default (VLAN ID = 1). Always present
• Static
. A VLAN that you configured
• Dynamic . A VLAN created by GVRP registration that you did not convert to static, and that GVRP can therefore remove
The interface associated with the VLAN, in the case that VLAN routing is configured for this VLAN.
The ports that are included in the VLAN.
Configure Port PVID Settings
You can assign a port VLAN ID (PVID) to an interface. There are certain requirements for a
PVID:
• You must define a PVID for all ports.
•
If no other value is specified, the default VLAN PVID is used.
• To change the port’s default PVID, you must first create a VLAN that includes the port as a member.
• Use the Port VLAN ID (PVID) Configuration page to configure a virtual LAN on a port.
To configure PVID settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Port PVID Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
187
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
To display information for all physical ports and LAGs, click the
ALL
button.
7. Select the interfaces.
Select the
Interface
check box next to the interfaces. You can select multiple interfaces.
To select all the interfaces, select the Interface check box in the heading row.
8. In the PVID field, specify the VLAN ID to assign to untagged or priority-tagged frames received on this port.
The factory default is 1.
9.
In the
VLAN Member field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a member port.
VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. The factory default is 1. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted.
10.
In the
VLAN Tag
field, specify the VLAN ID or list of VLANs of a tagged port.
VLAN IDs range from 1 to 4093. Use a hyphen (-) to specify a range or a comma (,) to separate VLAN IDs in a list. Spaces and zeros are not permitted. To reset the VLAN tag configuration to the defaults, use the None keyword. Port tagging for the VLAN can be set only if the port is a member of this VLAN.
11.
In the
Acceptable Frame Types
list, specify the types of frames that can be received on this port.
The options are VLAN only and Admit All :
• When set to VLAN only , untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are discarded.
• When set to Admit All , untagged frames or priority-tagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the port VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN-tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.
12. In the Configured Ingress Filtering
field, select
Enabled
or
Disabled
.
•
When enabled, the frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN
ID in the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame.
Configure Switching Information
188
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• When disabled, all frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge specification. The factory default is disabled.
13.
In the
Port Priority
field, specify the default 802.1p priority assigned to untagged packets arriving at the port.
You can enter a number from 0 to 7.
14. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a MAC-Based VLAN
The MAC-Based VLAN feature allows incoming untagged packets to be assigned to a VLAN and thus classify traffic based on the source MAC address of the packet.
You define a MAC to VLAN mapping by configuring an entry in the MAC to VLAN table. An entry is specified through a source MAC address and the desired VLAN ID. The MAC to
VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device (that is, there is a system-wide table with MAC address to VLAN ID mappings).
When untagged or priority-tagged packets arrive at the switch and entries exist in the MAC to
VLAN table, the source MAC address of the packet is looked up. If an entry is found, the corresponding VLAN ID is assigned to the packet. If the packet is already priority tagged it maintains this value; otherwise, the priority is set to zero. The assigned VLAN ID is verified against the VLAN table, if the VLAN is valid, ingress processing on the packet continues; otherwise the packet is dropped. This implies that the user is allowed to configure a MAC address mapping to a VLAN that was not created on the system.
To add or delete a MAC-based VLAN:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > MAC Based VLAN .
Configure Switching Information
189
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the MAC Address field, type a valid MAC address to be bound to a VLAN ID.
This field is configurable only when a MAC-based VLAN is created.
7. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of 1 to 4093.
8. Take one of the following actions:
• To add the add a MAC address to the VLAN mapping, click the Add button.
• To delete a MAC address from VLAN mapping, click the Delete button.
Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Groups
You can use a protocol-based VLAN to define filtering criteria for untagged packets. By default, if you do not configure any port-based (IEEE 802.1Q) or protocol-based VLANs, untagged packets are assigned to VLAN 1. You can override this behavior by defining either port-based VLANs or protocol-based VLANs, or both. Tagged packets are always handled according to the IEEE 802.1Q standard, and are not included in protocol-based VLANs.
If you assign a port to a protocol-based VLAN for a specific protocol, untagged frames received on that port for that protocol are assigned the protocol-based VLAN ID. Untagged frames received on the port for other protocols are assigned the Port VLAN ID, either the default PVID (1) or a PVID you specifically assigned to the port using the Port VLAN
Configuration page.
You define a protocol-based VLAN by creating a group. Each group has a one-to-one relationship with a VLAN ID, can include one to three protocol definitions, and can include multiple ports. When you create a group, you specify a name and a group ID is assigned automatically.
To configure a protocol-based VLAN group:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
190
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Group Name field, type a name for the new group.
You can enter up to 16 characters.
7.
In the
Protocol
field, select the protocols to be associated with the group.
There are three configurable protocols:
• IP . IP is a network layer protocol that provides a connectionless service for the delivery of data.
• ARP . Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is a low-level protocol that dynamically maps network layer addresses to physical medium access control (MAC) addresses.
• IPX . The internetwork packet exchange (IPX) is a connectionless datagram network-layer protocol that forwards data over a network.
8.
In the
VLAN ID
field, select the VLAN ID.
It can be any number in the range of 1 to 4093. All the ports in the group assigns this
VLAN ID to untagged packets received for the protocols that you included in this group.
9.
Click the
Add
button.
The protocol-based VLAN group is added to the switch.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 67. Protocol Based VLAN Group
Field
Group ID
Ports
Description
A number used to identify the group created by the user. Group IDs are automatically assigned when a group is created by the user.
Display all the member ports that belong to the group.
Configure Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership
To configure protocol-based VLAN group membership:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Protocol Based VLAN Group Membership
.
Configure Switching Information
191
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
In the
Group ID list, select the protocol-based VLAN group ID.
7. Select port numbers ( 1 , 2 , 3 , and so on) to select ports to add to this protocol-based VLAN group.
An interface can belong to only one group for a given protocol. If you already added a port to a group for IP, you cannot add it to another group that also includes IP, although you can add it to a new group for IPX.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 68. Protocol-Based VLAN Group Membership
Field
Group Name
Current Members
Description
This field identifies the name for the protocol-based VLAN that you selected. It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks.
This button can be click to show the current numbers in the selected protocol-based VLAN group.
Configure an IP Subnet-Based VLAN
IP subnet-to-VLAN mapping is defined by configuring an entry in the IP Subnet to VLAN table. An entry is specified through a source IP address, network mask, and the desired
VLAN ID. The IP subnet-to-VLAN configurations are shared across all ports of the device.
To add or delete an IP subnet-based VLAN:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
Configure Switching Information
192
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > IP Subnet Based VLAN
.
6. In the IP Address field, specify a valid IP address bound to the VLAN ID.
Enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation.
7. In the Subnet Mask field, specify a valid subnet mask of the IP address.
Enter the subnet mask in dotted-decimal notation.
8. In the VLAN ID field, specify a VLAN ID in the range of (1 to 4093).
9. Take one of the following actions:
• To add the IP subnet-based VLAN, click the Add button.
• To delete the IP subnet-based VLAN, click the Delete button.
Configure a Port DVLAN
To configure a port DVLAN:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure Switching Information
193
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Port DVLAN Configuration .
6.
Select
Interface
check boxes to select the physical interface.
To select all ports, select the Interface check box at the top of the column.
7. In the Admin Mode field, select Enabled or Disabled .
This specifies the administrative mode through which double VLAN ragging can be enabled or disabled. The default value for this is Disabled.
8. In the Global EtherType field, specify the first 16 bits of the DVLAN tag:
• 802.1Q Tag . Commonly used tag representing 0x8100
• vMAN Tag
. Commonly used tag representing 0x88A8
• Custom Tag . Configure the EtherType in any range from 0 to 65535
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a Voice VLAN
You can configure the parameters for voice VLAN configuration. Only users with read/write access privileges can change the data on this page.
To configure a voice VLAN:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Configure Switching Information
194
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > Voice VLAN Configuration .
6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies the administrative mode for voice VLAN for the switch. The default is
Disable.
7. Use Interface to select the physical interface.
8. Use Interface Mode to select the voice VLAN mode for selected interface:
• Disable . This is the default value.
• None . Allow the IP phone to use its own configuration to send untagged voice traffic.
• VLAN ID . Configure the phone to send tagged voice traffic.
• dot1p Configure voice VLAN 802.1p priority tagging for voice traffic. When this is selected, enter the dot1p value in the Value field.
• Untagged . Configure the phone to send untagged voice traffic.
9. Use Value to enter the VLAN ID or dot1p value.
This is enabled only when VLAN ID or dot1p is selected as the interface mode.
10.
In the
CoS Override Mode field, select Disable or Enable .
The default is Disable.
11. In the Authentication Mode field, select Enable or Disable .
The default is
Enable
. When the authentication mode is enabled, voice traffic is allowed on an unauthorized voice VLAN port. When the authentication mode is disabled, devices are authorized through dot1x.
Note: Authentication through dot1x is possible only if dot1x is enabled.
Configure Switching Information
195
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
12. In the DSCP Value field, configure the Voice VLAN DSCP value for the port.
The valid range is 0 to 64. The default value is 0.
The Operational State field displays the operational status of the voice VLAN on the interface.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure GARP Switch Settings
Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take effect.
To configure GARP switch settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Switch Configuration .
6. Select the GVRP Mode Disable or Enabl e radio button.
This selects the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the switch.
The factory default is Disable.
7. Select the GMRP Mode Disable or Enabl e radio button.
This selects the GARP multicast registration protocol administrative mode for the switch.
The factory default is Disable.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
196
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure GARP Port
Note: It can take up to 10 seconds for GARP configuration changes to take effect.
To configure GARP port:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> VLAN > Advanced > GARP Port Configuration .
6. Use Interface to select the physical interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.
7. In the Port GVRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable .
This specifies the GARP VLAN registration protocol administrative mode for the port.If you select Disable, the protocol is not active and the join time, leave time, and leave all time have no effect. The factory default is Disable.
8. In the Port GMRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable
This specifies the GARP multicast registration protocol administrative mode for the port. If you select Disable, the protocol is not active, and the join time, leave time, and leave all time have no effect. The factory default is Disable.
Configure Switching Information
197
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
9. In the Join Time (centiseconds) field, specify the time between the transmission of GARP
PDUs registering (or re-registering) membership for a VLAN or multicast group in centiseconds.
Enter a number between 10 and 100 (0.1 to 1.0 seconds). The factory default is 20 centiseconds (0.2 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port.
10. In the Leave Time (centiseconds) field, specify the time to wait after receiving an unregister request for a VLAN or multicast group before deleting the associated entry, in centiseconds.
This allows time for another station to assert registration for the same attribute to maintain uninterrupted service. Enter a number between 20 and 600 (0.2 to 6.0 seconds). The factory default is 60 centiseconds (0.6 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each
GARP participant for each port.
11. Use Leave All Time (centiseconds) to control how frequently LeaveAll PDUs are generated.
A LeaveAll PDU indicates that all registrations will be deregistered soon. To maintain registration, participants must rejoin. The leave all period timer is set to a random value in the range of LeaveAllTime to 1.5*LeaveAllTime. The timer is specified in centiseconds.
Enter a number between 200 and 6000 (2 to 60 seconds). The factory default is 1000 centiseconds (10 seconds). An instance of this timer exists for each GARP participant for each port.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Auto-VoIP
You can configure protocol-based port settings and OUI settings.
Configure Protocol-Based Port Settings
To configure protocol-based port settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > Protocol-based > Port Settings .
Configure Switching Information
198
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Prioritization Type field, select Traffic Class or Remark .
This specifies the type of prioritization.
7. In the Class Value list, specify the CoS tag value to be reassigned for packets received on the voice VLAN when Remark CoS is enabled.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Auto-VoIP OUI-Based Properties
To configure auto-VoIP OUI-based properties:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Properties .
Configure Switching Information
199
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the VoIP VLAN ID field, type the VoIP VLAN ID of the switch.
There is no default VLAN for auto-VoIP, you must create a VLAN for it first.
7. In the OUI-based priority list, select the OUI-based priority of the switch.
The default value is 7.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
OUI-Based Port Settings
To configure auto-VoIP OUI-based port settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > Port Settings .
The Operational Status field displays the current operational status of each interface.
Configure Switching Information
200
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the
Go
button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7.
In the
Auto VoIP Mode
field, select
Disable
or
Enable
.
Auto-VoIP is disabled by default.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Add a New Entry to the OUI Table
To add a new entry to the OUI table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table
.
6. In the Telephony OUI(s) field, specify the VoIP OUI prefix to be added in the format
AA:BB:CC.
Configure Switching Information
201
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Up to 128 OUIs can be configured.
7. In the Description field, enter the description for the OUI.
The maximum length of description is 32 characters. The following OUIs are present in the configuration by default:
• 00:01:E3 - SIEMENS
• 00:03:6B - CISCO1
• 00:12:43 - CISCO2
• 00:0F:E2 - H3C
• 00:60:B9 - NITSUKO
• 00:D0:1E - PINTEL
• 00:E0:75 - VERILINK
• 00:E0:BB - 3COM
• 00:04:0D - AVAYA1
• 00:1B:4F - AVAYA2
8. Click the Add button.
The telephony OUI entry is added.
Delete Entries From the OUI Table
To delete one or more entries from the OUI table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Auto-VoIP > OUI-based > OUI Table .
The OUI table displays.
6. Select one or more entries in the table.
7. Click the Delete button.
The entries are deleted.
Configure Switching Information
202
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View the Auto-VoIP Status
To view the auto-VoIP status:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Auto-VoIP > Auto-VoIP Status
.
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable Auto-VoIP status information.
Table 69. Auto-VoIP Status
Field
Auto-VoIP VLAN ID
Maximum Number of Voice
Channels Supported
Number of Voice Channels
Detected
Description
The auto-VoIP VLAN ID.
The maximum number of voice channels supported.
The number of VoIP channels prioritized successfully.
iSCSI Overview
The Internet Small Computer System Interface (iSCSI) feature helps network administrators track iSCSI traffic between iSCSI initiators and target systems. This is accomplished by monitoring or snooping traffic to detect packets used by iSCSI stations in establishing iSCSI sessions and connections. Data from these exchanges is used to create classification rules that assign the traffic between the stations to a configured traffic class. Packets in the flow are queued and scheduled for egress on the destination port based on these rules.
Configure Switching Information
203
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
In networks containing iSCSI initiators and targets, iSCSI helps to monitor iSCSI sessions or give iSCSI traffic preferential Quality of Service (QoS) treatment. Dynamically-generated classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given the desired preference characteristics over other data traveling through the switch. This might help to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause iSCSI packets to be dropped. However, in systems where a large proportion of traffic is iSCSI, it might also interfere with other network control-plane traffic, such as ARP or LACP.
The preferential treatment of iSCSI traffic must be balanced against the needs of other critical data in the network.
You can view and manage iSCSI Optimization settings on the device. iSCSI Optimization provides a means of giving traffic between iSCSI initiator and target systems special Quality of Service (QoS) treatment.
In addition, if configured, the packets can be updated with IEEE 802.1 or IP-DSCP values.
This is done by enabling Remark. Remarking packets with priority data provides special QoS treatment as the packets continue through the network.
Configure Global iSCSI Settings
To configure the global iSCSI settings on the switch:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > iSCSI > Basic > Global Configuration .
6. In the iSCSI Status field, select Enable or Disable .
Configure Switching Information
204
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
This globally enables or disables the iSCSI Optimization feature. By default, iSCSI
Optimization is disabled.
7.
Select the QoS Profile
VLAN Priority Tag
or
DSCP
radio button.
This specifies the Quality of Service (QoS) profile that is applied to iSCSI flows. By default, iSCSI flows are assigned to the highest VLAN Priority tag (VPT)/DSCP mapped to the highest queue not used for switch management or voice VLAN.
Setting the VLAN Priority tag/DSCP sets the QoS profile which determines the egress queue to which the frame is mapped. The switch default setting for egress queues scheduling is Weighted Round Robin (WRR). Complete the QoS setting by configuring the relevant ports to work in other scheduling and queue management modes through the Class of Service settings. Depending on the platform, these choices might include strict priority for the queue used for iSCSI traffic. The downside of strict priority is that, in certain circumstances (under heavy high priority traffic), other lower priority traffic might get starved. In WRR, the queue to which the flow is assigned to can be set to get the required percentage.
8. Configure the global traffic class mapping in Class of Service.
The global traffic class mapping configuration determines the traffic class used to transmit iSCSI packets. The traffic mapping configuration options are as follows:
• IEEE 802.1P
•
IP-DSCP
The configuration of the CoS component determines changes in the mapping of IEEE
802.1p or IP-DSCP values to traffic classes. For more information, see
Class of Service
9.
If you are using VLAN Priority as the QoS profile, in the
VLAN Priority Tag
field, select the iSCSI session packets.
The range is 0 to 7. The default is 5.
10. If you are using DSCP as the QoS profile, in the DSCP list, select a value to assign iSCSI session packets.
The range is 0 to 63. The default is 46.
11.
Select the Remark
Enable
or
Disable
radio button.
This enables or disables the marking of iSCSI frames with the configured VLAN Priority tag/DSCP when egressing the switch. Enabling remarks updates the packets with IEEE
802.1p or IP-DSCP values. Remarking packets with priority data provides special QoS treatment as the packets continue through the network. Remark is enabled by default.
12.
In the iSCSI Aging Time field, set the number of minutes a session can be inactive prior to
If using DSCP as the QoS profile, useremoval.
The iSCSI Aging Time must be a whole number in the range of 1 to 43200 minutes. The default is 10 minutes.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
205
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View iSCSI Sessions
To view active iSCSI session information:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. click Switching > iSCSI > Basic > Sessions .
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the
Update
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions information.
Table 70. iSCSI Sessions
Field
Target Name
Initiator Name
Initiator Session ID (ISID)
Description
The target’s name.
The initiator’s name.
The iSCSI identifier.
Control iSCSI Target Settings
You can view iSCSI targets and assign target ports/port IP address combinations for iSCSI optimization on the switch.
To configure iSCSI target settings
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
Configure Switching Information
206
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > iSCSI Targets .
6. In the TCP Port field, specify the TCP port for the target that monitors iSCSI traffic.
Up to 16 TCP ports can be defined in the system. The well-known iSCSI ports 860 and
3260 are configured as defaults but you can remove them as any other configured target.
7. In the IP address field, specify an IP address for the target that monitors iSCSI traffic.
The default is 0.0.0.0.
8. In the Target Name field, specify a name to assign to the target.
The iSCSI Target Name can be up to 233 characters in length.
9. Click the Add button.
The iSCSI targets configuration is added.
View iSCSI Sessions
To view information about active iSCSI sessions:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > Sessions.
Configure Switching Information
207
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions information that is displayed.
Table 71. iSCSI Sessions
Field
Target Name
Initiator Name
Initiator Session ID (ISID)
Description
The target’s name.
The initiator’s name.
The unique identifier an initiator assigns to its session endpoint which, when combined with the iSCSI initiator name, provides a unique name for the iSCSI initiator port.
View iSCSI Session Details
You can view detailed information about active iSCSI sessions.
To view the iSCSI session details:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > iSCSI > Advanced > Sessions Detailed .
Configure Switching Information
208
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable iSCSI Sessions Detailed information.
Table 72. iSCSI Sessions Detailed
Field
Session Index
Description
The list of session indices.
The rest of the fields on this page correspond to the currently selected Session Index.
Target Name The target’s name.
Initiator Name
Up Time
The initiator’s name.
The time elapsed since the creation of the current session.
Time for Aging Out (in Seconds) The time left for the current session to expire in seconds.
Initiator Session ID (ISID) The unique identifier an initiator assigns to its session endpoint which, when combined with the iSCSI initiator name, provides a unique name for the iSCSI initiator port.
Initiator IP Address
Initiator TCP Port
Target IP Address
Target TCP Port
The initiator’s IP address.
The initiator’s TCP port number of one of the connections between the target and initiator.
The IP address of the target.
The target’s TCP port number of one of the connections between the target and initiator.
Spanning Tree Protocol
The Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) provides a tree topology for any arrangement of bridges.
STP also provides one path between end stations on a network, eliminating loops. Spanning tree versions supported include Common STP, Multiple STP, and Rapid STP.
Classic STP provides a single path between end stations, avoiding and eliminating loops. For
information on configuring Common STP, see
Configure CST Port Settings
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) supports multiple instances of Spanning Tree to efficiently channel VLAN traffic over different interfaces. Each instance of the Spanning Tree behaves in the manner specified in IEEE 802.1w, Rapid Spanning Tree (RSTP), with slight modifications in the working but not the end effect (chief among the effects, is the rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding). The difference between the RSTP and the traditional
STP (IEEE 802.1D) is the ability to configure and recognize full-duplex connectivity and ports which are connected to end stations, resulting in rapid transitioning of the port to Forwarding state and the suppression of Topology Change Notification. These features are represented by the parameters
pointtopoint
and
edgeport
. MSTP is compatible to both RSTP and STP. It behaves appropriately to STP and RSTP bridges. A MSTP bridge can be configured to behave entirely as a RSTP bridge or a STP bridge.
Configure Switching Information
209
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Note: For two bridges to be in the same region, the force version must be
802.1s and their configuration name, digest key, and revision level must match. For additional information about regions and their effect on network topology, refer to the IEEE 802.1Q
standard.
Configure Basic STP Settings
To configure STP basic settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > STP > Basic > STP Configuration .
6. Select the Spanning Tree Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch.
7. Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the switch.
Configure Switching Information
210
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The options are IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, PVST, and RPVST.
8. Use Configuration Name to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
9.
Use
Configuration Revision Level
to specify an identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.
10. Select the Forward BPDU while STP Disabled Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded or not while spanning-tree is disabled on the switch.
11. Select the BPDU Guard Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled. The STP BPDU guard allows a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology consistent and predictable. The switches behind the edge ports with STP BPDU guard enabled do not influence the overall STP topology. At the reception of BPDUs, the BPDU guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the port into disable state. This would lead to an administrative disable of the port.
12. Select the BPDU Filter Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled. STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge ports. Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected to hosts that typically drop BPDUs. If an operational edge port receives a BPDU, it immediately loses its operational status. In that case, if BPDU filtering is enabled on this port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port.
13.
Select the e
Fast Backbone
Mode
Disable
or
Enable
radio button. (
PVSTP only
.)
Use this option to choose a new indirect link when an indirect link fails. The system does not ignore inferior BPDUs, as is done in 802.1d. Rather the system uses the BPDUs to age out on the port it received the BPDUs. Later the system sends out root link queries on other non-designated ports. Based on the replies, if there is a positive response to at least one of them, it chooses a new indirect link. Fast Backbone mode is disabled by default.
14.
Select the
Fast Uplink
Mode
Disable
or
Enable
radio button. (
PVSTP only
.)
This option reduces the recovery time in selecting a new root port when the primary root port goes down. Fast Uplink mode is disabled by default.
15.
Use the
Max Update Rate
field to configure the Fast Uplink Maximum Update Rate.
This field is enabled for configuration when Fast Uplink mode is enabled. Allowed values are 0 to 32000 packets per second. The default value is 150.
16.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
211
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable fields.
Table 73. STP Configuration
Field
Configuration Digest Key
Configuration Format Selector
MST ID
VID ID
FID ID
Description
Identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
The version of the configuration format being used in the exchange of
BPDUs.
Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.
Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them.
Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.
Configure Advanced STP Settings
To configure advanced STP settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
212
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether spanning tree operation is enabled on the switch. The default is
Enable.
7. Use Force Protocol Version to specify the Force Protocol Version parameter for the switch.
The options are IEEE 802.1d, IEEE 802.1w, IEEE 802.1s, PVST, and RPVST. The default is IEEE 802.1w.
8. Use Configuration Name to specify the identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters.
9. Use Configuration Revision Level to specify the identifier used to identify the configuration currently being used.
The values allowed are between 0 and 65535. The default value is 0.
10. Select the Forward BPDU while STP Disabled Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether spanning tree BPDUs are forwarded while spanning-tree is disabled on the switch. The default is Disable.
11. Select the BPDU Guard Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether the BPDU guard feature is enabled. The STP BPDU guard allows a network administrator to enforce the STP domain borders and keep the active topology consistent and predictable. The switches behind the edge ports with STP BPDU guard enabled do not influence the overall STP topology. At the reception of BPDUs, the BPDU guard operation disables the port that is configured with this option and transitions the port into disable state. This would lead to an administrative disable of the port.
Configure Switching Information
213
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
12. Select the BPDU Filter Disable or Enable radio button.
This specifies whether the BPDU Filter feature is enabled. STP BPDU filtering applies to all operational edge ports. Edge Port in an operational state is supposed to be connected to hosts that typically drop BPDUs. If an operational edge port receives a BPDU, it immediately loses its operational status. In that case, if BPDU filtering is enabled on this port then it drops the BPDUs received on this port.
13. Select the Fast Backbone Mode Disable or Enable radio button. (
PVSTP only
.)
Use this option to choose a new indirect link when an indirect link fails. The system does not ignore inferior BPDUs, as is done in 802.1d. Rather the system uses the BPDUs to age out on the port it received the BPDUs. Later the system sends out root link queries on other non-designated ports. Based on the replies, if there is a positive response to at least one of them, it chooses a new indirect link. Fast Backbone mode is disabled by default.
14. Select the Fast Uplink Mode Disable or Enable radio button. (
PVSTP only
.)
This option reduces the recovery time in selecting a new root port when the primary root port goes down. Fast Uplink mode is disabled by default.
15. Use the Max Update Rate field to configure the Fast Uplink Maximum Update Rate.
This field is enabled for configuration when Fast Uplink mode is enabled. Allowed values are 0 to 32000 packets per second. The default value is 150.
16. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 74. STP Configuration
Field
Configuration Digest Key
Configuration Format Selector
Description
The 16-byte signature of type HMAC-MD5 created from the MST
Configuration Table (a VLAN ID-to-MST ID mapping) which is used to identify the configuration currently being used.
The version of the configuration format being used in the exchange of
BPDUs.
STP Status
MST ID
VID ID
FID ID
Table consisting of the MST instances (including the CST) and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.
Table consisting of the VLAN IDs and the corresponding FID associated with each of them.
Table consisting of the FIDs and the corresponding VLAN IDs associated with each of them.
Configure Switching Information
214
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure CST Settings
You can configure Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on the switch.
To configure CST settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Configuration .
6.
Specify values for CST in the appropriate fields:
• Bridge Priority
. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge. Specifies the bridge priority value for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CST). The valid range is 0–61440. The bridge priority is a multiple of
4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically
Configure Switching Information
215
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095, it is set to 0. The default priority is 32768.
• Bridge Max Age (secs) . The bridge maximum age time for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before implementing a topological change. The valid range is 6–40, and the value must be less than or equal to (2 * Bridge Forward Delay) – 1 and greater than or equal to 2 * (Bridge Hello Time +1). The default value is 20.
• Bridge Hello Time (secs) . The bridge hello time for the Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CST), which indicates the amount of time in seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages. The value is fixed at 2 seconds. The value must be less than or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) - 1. The default hello time value is
2.
• Bridge Forward Delay (secs).
The bridge forward delay time, which indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets. The value must be greater or equal to (Bridge Max Age / 2) + 1.
The time range is from 4 seconds to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.
• Spanning Tree Maximum Hops . The maximum number of bridge hops the information for a particular CST instance can travel before being discarded. The valid range is 6–40. The default is 20 hops.
• Spanning Tree Tx Hold Count . Configures the maximum number of bpdus the bridge is allowed to send within the hello time window. The valid range is 1–10. The default value is 6.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the CST Status information that is displayed.
Table 75. STP Advanced CST Configuration
Field
Bridge identifier
Time since topology change
Topology change count
Topology change
Designated root
Root Path Cost
Root Port Identifier
Max Age(secs)
Description
The bridge identifier for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
The time in seconds since the topology of the CST last changed.
Number of times topology changed for the CST.
The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the CST. It takes a value if True or False.
The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST.
Port to access the Designated Root for the CST.
Path Cost to the Designated Root for the CST.
Configure Switching Information
216
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 75. STP Advanced CST Configuration
Field
Forward Delay(secs)
Hold Time(secs)
CST Regional Root
CST Path Cost
Description
Derived value of the Root Port Bridge Forward Delay parameter.
Minimum time between transmission of Configuration BPDUs.
Priority and base MAC address of the CST Regional Root.
Path Cost to the CST tree Regional Root.
Configure CST Port Settings
You can configure the Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch.
A port can become
Diagnostically Disabled
(D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a
3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.
To configure CST port settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Configuration .
6. Select an interface.
You can select a physical or port channel interface associated with VLANs associated with the CST.
7. Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the CST.
Configure Switching Information
217
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If it is tried to be set to any value between 16 and (2*16-1) it is set to 16 and so on. The default value is 128.
8. Use Admin Edge Port to specify if the specified port is an Edge Port within the CIST.
Use the menu to select Disable or Enable . The default value is Disable.
9. Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the common and internal spanning tree.
It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000. The default is 0.
10. Use External Port Path Cost to set the External Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the spanning tree.
It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000. The default is 0.
11. Use BPDU Filter to configure the BPDU Filter, which filters the BPDU traffic on this port when STP is enabled on this port.
The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Disable.
12. Use BPDU Flood to configure the BPDU Flood, which floods the BPDU traffic arriving on this port when STP is disabled on this port.
The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Disable.
13. Use Auto Edge to configure the auto edge mode of a port, which allows the port to become an edge port if it does not see BPDUs for some duration.
The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Enable.
14. Use Root Guard to configure the root guard mode, which sets a port to discard any superior information received by the port and thus protect against root of the device from changing.
The port gets put into discarding state and does not forward any packets. The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Disable .
15. Use Loop Guard to enable or disable the loop guard on the port to protect Layer 2 forwarding loops.
If loop guard is enabled, the port moves into the STP loop inconsistent blocking state instead of the listening/learning/forwarding state. The default value is Disable
16. Use TCN Guard to configure the TCN guard for a port restricting the port from propagating any topology change information received through that port.
The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Disable.
17. Use Port Mode to enable or disable Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative mode associated with the port or port channel.
The possible values are Enable or Disable . The default value is Disable .
18. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
218
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 76. CST Port Configuration
Field Description
Auto Calculated Port Path Cost
Port Forwarding State
Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated (Enabled) or not (Disabled). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.
The value of the parameter for the CST.
Hello Timer
Auto Calculated External Port Path
Cost
Displays whether the external path cost is automatically calculated
(Enabled) or not (Disabled). External Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for External Port Path
Cost is zero.
BPDU Guard Effect Display the BPDU Guard Effect, it disables the edge ports that receive
BPDU packets. The possible values are Enable or Disable.
The Forwarding State of this port.
View CST Port Status
You can view the Common Spanning Tree (CST) and Internal Spanning Tree on a specific port on the switch.
To view the CST port status:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > CST Port Status .
Configure Switching Information
219
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the CST Status information displayed on the page.
Table 77. CST Port Status
Field
Interface
Port ID
Port Forwarding State
Port Role
Designated Root
Designated Cost
Designated Bridge
Designated Port
Description
Identify the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the CST.
The port identifier for the specified port within the CST. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
The Forwarding State of this port.
Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port ,
Designated Port
,
Alternate Port
,
Backup Port
,
Master Port or
Disabled Port .
Root Bridge for the CST. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.
Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
Configure Switching Information
220
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 77. CST Port Status (continued)
Field
Topology Change Acknowledge
Description
Identifies whether the topology change acknowledgement flag is set for the next BPDU to be transmitted for this port. It is either True or False.
Edge port Indicates whether the port is enabled as an edge port. It takes the value
Enabled or Disabled.
Derived value of the point-to-point status.
Point-to-point MAC
CST Regional Root Bridge Identifier of the CST Regional Root. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Path Cost to the CST Regional Root.
CST Path Cost
Port Up Time Since Counters Last
Cleared
Time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in Days, Hours,
Minutes, and Seconds.
Loop Inconsistent State This parameter identifies whether the port is in loop inconsistent state or not.
Transitions Into Loop Inconsistent
State
The number of times this interface transitioned into loop inconsistent state.
Transitions Out Of Loop
Inconsistent State
The number of times this interface transitioned out of loop inconsistent state.
Configure MST Settings
You can configure Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) on the switch.
To configure an MST instance:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Configuration
.
Configure Switching Information
221
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To add a new MST, do the following: a.
Configure the MST values,
• MST ID . Specify the ID of the MST to create. The valid values for this are 1 to
4094. This is only visible when the select option of the MST ID select box is selected.
• Priority . The bridge priority value for the MST. When switches or bridges are running STP, each is assigned a priority. After exchanging BPDUs, the switch with the lowest priority value becomes the root bridge. The bridge priority is a multiple of 4096. If you specify a priority that is not a multiple of 4096, the priority is automatically set to the next lowest priority that is a multiple of 4096. For example, if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 4095, it is set to 0.
The default priority is 32768.The valid range is 0–61440.
• VLAN ID . This gives a combo box of each VLAN on the switch. These can be selected or unselected for re-configuring the association of VLANs to MST instances.
b. Click the Add button
This creates the new MST that you configured.
7. To modify an MST instance, do the following: a.
Select the check box next to the instance.
You can select multiple check boxes to apply the same setting to all selected ports.
b. Update the values.
c. click the Apply button.
8. To delete an MST instance, do the following: a.
Select the check box for the instance.
b. Click the Delete button.
Configure Switching Information
222
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
For each configured instance, the information described in the following table displays on the page.
Table 78. MST Configuration
Field
Bridge Identifier
Time Since Topology Change
Topology Change Count
Topology Change
Designated Root
Root Path Cost
Root PortIdentifier
Description
The bridge identifier for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
The time n seconds since the topology of the selected MST instance last changed.
Number of times topology changed for the selected MST instance.
The value of the topology change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the selected
MST instance. It takes a value if True or False.
The bridge identifier of the root bridge. It is made up from the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge
Path Cost to the Designated Root for this MST instance.
Port to access the Designated Root for this MST instance.
View the Spanning Tree MST Port Status
You can configure and display Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) settings on a specific port on the switch.
A port can become
Diagnostically Disabled
(D-Disable) when DOT1S experiences a severe error condition. The most common cause is when the DOT1S software experiences BPDU flooding. The flooding criteria is such that DOT1S receives more than 15 BPDUs in a
3-second interval. The other causes for DOT1S D-Disable are extremely rare.
To view the Spanning Tree MST port status:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > STP > Advanced > MST Port Status
.
Configure Switching Information
223
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Note: If no MST instances were configured on the switch, the page displays a
No MSTs Available
message and does not display the fields shown in the field description table that follows.
6. Use MST ID to select one MST instance from existing MST instances.
7. Use Interface to select one of the physical or port channel interfaces associated with VLANs associated with the selected MST instance.
8. Use Port Priority to specify the priority for a particular port within the selected MST instance.
The port priority is set in multiples of 16. For example if the priority is attempted to be set to any value between 0 and 15, it is set to 0. If it is tried to be set to any value between 16 and (2*16-1) it is set to 16 and so on.
9. Use Port Path Cost to set the Path Cost to a new value for the specified port in the selected
MST instance.
It takes a value in the range of 1 to 200000000.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the read-only MST port configuration information displayed on the Spanning Tree CST Configuration page.
Table 79. MST Port Status
Field
Auto Calculated Port Path Cost
Port ID
Description
Displays whether the path cost is automatically calculated (
Enable
) or not ( Disable ). Path cost is calculated based on the link speed of the port if the configured value for Port Path Cost is zero.
The port identifier for the specified port within the selected MST instance. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
Configure Switching Information
224
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 79. MST Port Status (continued)
Field
Port Uptime Since Last Clear
Counters
Port Mode
Port Forwarding State
Port Role
Designated Root
Designated Cost
Designated Bridge
Designated Port
Description
Time since the counters were last cleared, displayed in Days, Hours,
Minutes, and Seconds.
Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative mode associated with the port or port channel. The possible values are
Enable
or
Disable
.
The Forwarding State of this port.
Each MST Bridge Port that is enabled is assigned a Port Role for each spanning tree. The port role is one of the following values: Root Port ,
Designated Port
,
Alternate Port
,
Backup Port
,
Master Port
or
Disabled Port .
Root Bridge for the selected MST instance. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.
Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port. It is made up using the bridge priority and the base MAC address of the bridge.
Port Identifier on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN. It is made up from the port priority and the interface number of the port.
View STP Statistics
You can view information about the number and type of bridge protocol data units (BPDUs) transmitted and received on each port.
To view Spanning Tree statistics:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > STP Statistics .
Configure Switching Information
225
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the information available on the STP Statistics page.
Table 80. STP Statistics
Field
Interface
STP BPDUs Received
STP BPDUs Transmitted
RSTP BPDUs Received
RSTP BPDUs Transmitted
MSTP BPDUs Received
MSTP BPDUs Transmitted
Description
Selects one of the physical or port channel interfaces of the switch.
Number of STP BPDUs received at the selected port.
Number of STP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
Number of RSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.
Number of RSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
Number of MSTP BPDUs received at the selected port.
Number of MSTP BPDUs transmitted from the selected port.
Configure PVST VLAN Settings
You can view and configure Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol (PVST)/Per VLAN Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) VLAN settings for the device.
To configure PVST/RPVST VLAN settings for the device:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Configure Switching Information
226
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST VLAN in the navigation menu.
6. Select a VLAN ID , a unique VLAN identifier, from the list of VLANs with enabled STP Admin mode and PVST or RPVST.
7. In the Root list, select None , Primary , or Secondary .
The default value is None. This setting configures the switch to become the root bridge or standby root bridge by modifying the bridge priority from the default value of 32768 to a lower value calculated to ensure the bridge is the root (or standby) bridge.
8. In the Hello Time field, configure the spanning tree hello time interval for the specified
VLAN
The hello time is the interval between sending successive BPDUs. Allowed values range from 1 to 10 seconds. The default value is 2 seconds.
9. In the Forward Time field, configure the spanning tree forward delay time for a specified
VLAN.
The range is 4 to 30 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds. This interval is a time for listening and learning states before transitioning a port to the forwarding state.
10. Use the Max Age field to configure the spanning tree maximum age time for a specified
VLAN.
Max age is the maximum age time before a bridge port saves its configuration information. The range is 6 to 40 seconds. The default value is 20 seconds.
11. Configure the bridge Priority of a VLAN.
The allowed values are between 0 and 61440. The valid values are listed in the following table.
Table 81. PVST/RPVST VLAN Configuration - VLAN Bridge Priority
0
12288
4096
16384
8192
20480
Configure Switching Information
227
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 81. PVST/RPVST VLAN Configuration - VLAN Bridge Priority
24576
36864
49152
61440
28672
40960
53248
32768 (default)
45056
57344
The default value is 32768. If the value configured is not among the specified values, then it is rounded off to the nearest valid value.
12. Click the Add button.
PVST/RPVST is enabled for the selected VLAN.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the PVST Interface Settings
You can view and configure Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol (PVST)/Per VLAN Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) Interface settings for the device.
To configure the PVST/RPVST Interface settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST Interface .
Configure Switching Information
228
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select a VLAN ID from the list of VLANs with enabled STP Admin mode and PVST or
RPVST.
Note: The Other option is used for configuring a VLAN which is not yet created. Specify the required value for VLAN ID and click the Apply button to observe actual values.
7. Configure the Priority value used to allow the operator to select the relative importance of the port in the selection process for forwarding.
Set this value to a lower number to prefer a port for forwarding of frames. This priority configuration is used when the port is configured as a point-to-point link type. The allowed values are between 0 and 240. The priority values are listed in the following table. All other values are rounded off. The default value is 128.
Note: The value must be a multiple of 16.
Table 82. PVST/RPVST Interface Configuration Priority Values
0
48
96
144
192
240
16
64
112
160
208
–
32
80
128 (default)
176
224
–
8. The Per VLAN Cost is the path cost from the port to the root bridge.
The values allowed are between 1 and 200,000,000. By default, cost is not configured.
Use the value 0 to unconfigure the setting. If per VLAN cost is not configured, the path cost value is set based on Link Speed.
9. Click the Apply button.
Configure Switching Information
229
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that the PVST/RPVST
Interface Configuration page displays.
Table 83. PVST/RPVST Interface Configuration
Field
Interface
Role
Status
Description
The list of physical interfaces and LAGs.
Indicates the role of the interface. Possible values are as follows:
Disabled, Root, Designated, Alternate, Backup, and Master.
Note:
The blank field is displayed for the interface which is not included for the specified VLAN.
Indicates the status of the interface. Possible values are as follows:
Discarding, Learning, Forwarding, and Disabled.
Note:
The blank field is displayed for the interface which is not included for the specified VLAN.
View PVST Statistics
You can view and configure Per VLAN Spanning Tree Protocol (PVST)/Per VLAN Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RPVST) Statistics settings for the device.
To view the PVST/RPVST statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > STP > Advanced > PVST Statistics .
Configure Switching Information
230
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The Status field displays Neither PVST nor Rapid-PVST is enabled. If you change the
STP mode to PVST or to RPVST, the page displays statistic information.
Multicast
Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
View the MFDB Table
The Multicast Forwarding Database holds the port membership information for all active multicast address entries. The key for an entry consists of a VLAN ID and MAC address pair.
Entries can contain data for more than one protocol.
To view the MFDB Table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Table .
Configure Switching Information
231
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Search by MAC Address to enter a MAC address.
Enter six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example
00:01:23:43:45:67.
7. Click the GO button.
If the address exists, that entry is displayed. An exact match is required.
Table 84. MFDB Table
Field
MAC Address
VLAN ID
Type
Component
Description
Forwarding Interfaces
Description
The multicast MAC address for which you requested data.
The VLAN ID to which the multicast MAC address is related.
This displays the type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.
This is the component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast
Forwarding Database. Possible values are IGMP snooping, GMRP,
Static Filtering and MLD snooping.
The text description of this multicast table entry. Possible values are
Management Configured, Network Configured and Network Assisted.
The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.
View the MFDB Statistics
To view the MFDB statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Configure Switching Information
232
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Multicast > MFDB > MFDB Statistics
.
The following table describes the MFDB Statistics fields.
Table 85. MFDB Statistics
Field
Max MFDB Table Entries
Most MFDB Entries Since Last
Reset
Current Entries
Description
The maximum number of entries that the Multicast Forwarding
Database table can hold.
The largest number of entries that were present in the Multicast
Forwarding Database table since last reset. This value is also known as the MFDB high-water mark.
The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.
IGMP Snooping
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping is a feature that allows a switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently on the switch. Multicast IP traffic is traffic that is destined to a host group. Host groups are identified by class D IP addresses, which range from
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255. Based on the IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that request the multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all ports and possibly affecting network performance.
A traditional Ethernet network can be separated into different network segments to prevent placing too many devices onto the same shared media. Bridges and switches connect these segments. When a packet with a broadcast or multicast destination address is received, the switch forwards a copy into each of the remaining network segments in accordance with the
IEEE MAC Bridge standard. Eventually, the packet is made accessible to all nodes connected to the network.
This approach works well for broadcast packets that are intended to be seen or processed by all connected nodes. In the case of multicast packets, however, this approach could lead to less efficient use of network bandwidth, particularly when the packet is intended for only a small number of nodes. Packets are flooded into network segments where no node is receptive to the packet. While nodes rarely incur any processing overhead to filter packets addressed to unrequested group addresses, they cannot transmit new packets onto the shared media for the period of time that the multicast packet is flooded. The problem of
Configure Switching Information
233
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual wasting bandwidth is even worse when the LAN segment is not shared, for example in full-duplex links.
Allowing switches to snoop IGMP packets is a creative effort to solve this problem. The switch uses the information in the IGMP packets as they are being forwarded throughout the network to determine which segments receive packets directed to the group address.
Configure IGMP Snooping
You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic.
Note: You must log in as the admin user, which has read/write access privileges to change the data on this page.
To configure IGMP snooping:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Configuration .
6. Select the Admin mode Enable or Disable radio button.
Configure Switching Information
234
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
This specifies the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is
Disable.
7.
Use the
Validate IGMP IP header
option to
Enable
or
Disable
header validation for all
IGMP versions.
If Validate IGMP IP Header is enabled, then IGMP IP header checks for Router Alert option, ToS and TTL. The default value is Enable.
8.
Select the Proxy Querier Mode
Enable
or
Disable
radio button.
This enables or disables IGMP proxy querier on the system. If disabled, then the IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to IGMP leave packet. the default value is Enable.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table displays information about the global IGMP snooping status and statistics on the page.
Table 86. IGMP Snooping Configuration
Field
Multicast Control Frame Count
Interfaces Enabled for IGMP
Snooping
VLAN IDs Enabled For IGMP
Snooping
Description
The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU.
A list of all the interfaces currently enabled for IGMP snooping.
Displays VLAN IDs enabled for IGMP snooping.
Configure IGMP Snooping for Interfaces
To configure IGMP snooping for interfaces:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Interface Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
235
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The page lists all physical, VLAN, and LAG interfaces.
6.
Use the
Interface
check boxes to select interfaces.
7. In the Admin Mode field, select Disable or Enable .
This specifies the interface mode for the selected interface for IGMP snooping for the switch. The default is Disable.
8. Use Group Membership Interval to specify the amount of time the switch waits for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.
Enter a value between 1 and 3600 seconds. The default is 260 seconds.
9.
Use
Max Response Time to specify the amount of time the switch waits after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface.
Enter a value greater or equal to 1 and less than the Group Membership Interval in seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the Group
Membership Interval.
10. Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time the switch waits to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.
Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero indicates an infinite time-out, i.e. no expiration.
11. Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to select the fast leave mode for a particular interface.
The default is Disable.
12.
Use
Proxy Querier Mode
to select the proxy querier mode for a particular interface.
If it is disabled, then IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to
IGMP leave packet. The default value is Enable.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
236
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure IGMP Snooping for VLANs
To configure IGMP snooping settings for VLANs:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > IGMP VLAN Configuration
.
6. To enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, do the following: a.
Enter the VLAN ID.
b. Configure the IGMP snooping values:
• Use Admin Mode to enable or disable IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID.
• Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the IGMP snooping fast leave mode for the specified VLAN ID.
• Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of
IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is Maximum Response
Time + 1 to 3600 seconds.
• Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for maximum response time of
IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 1 to Group
Membership Interval - 1. Its value must be greater than group membership interval value.
• Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for multicast router expiry time of IGMP snooping for the specified VLAN ID. The valid range is 0 to 3600 seconds.
• Use Report Suppression Mode to enable or disable IGMP snooping report suppression mode for the specified VLAN ID. IGMP snooping report suppression allows the suppression of the IGMP reports sent by the multicast hosts by building a Layer 3 membership table, thereby sending only the very needed reports to the
IGMP Routers to receive the multicast traffic. As a result, the multicast report traffic being sent to the IGMP Routers is reduced.
Configure Switching Information
237
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Enable or Disable the Proxy Querier Mode for the specified VLAN ID. If proxy querier mode is disabled, then IGMP proxy query with source IP 0.0.0.0 is not sent in response to an IGMP leave packet. The default is Enable.
c. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
7. To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN, do the following: a.
Select the check box next to the VLAN ID.
b. Click the Delete button.
The VLAN is removed from the list.
8. To modify the IGMP snooping settings for a VLAN: a.
Select the check box next to the VLAN ID b. Update the values c. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a Multicast Router
You can configure the interface as the one the multicast router is attached to. All IGMP packets snooped by the switch are forwarded to the multicast router reachable from this interface. The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch automatically detects the multicast router and forwards IGMP packets accordingly. It is needed only if you want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.
To configure a multicast router:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
238
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Interface to select the physical interface.
7. In the Multicast Router field, select Enable or Disable .
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a Multicast Router VLAN
You can configure an interface to forward the snooped IGMP packets from a specific VLAN only to the multicast router that is connected to the interface. The configuration is not needed most of the time since the switch automatically detects a multicast router and forwards the
IGMP packets accordingly. It is needed only when you want to make sure that the multicast router always receives IGMP packets from the switch in a complex network.
To configure a multicast router VLAN:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN
Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
239
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Interface to select the interface.
7. Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID.
8. In the Multicast Router field, select Enable or Disable .
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
IGMP Snooping Querier Overview
IGMP snooping requires that one central switch or router periodically query all end-devices on the network to announce their multicast memberships. This central device is the IGMP querier. The IGMP query responses, known as IGMP reports, keep the switch updated with the current multicast group membership on a port-by-port basis. If the switch does not receive updated membership information in a timely fashion, it stops forwarding multicasts to the port where the end device is located.
You can configure and display information on IGMP snooping queriers on the network and, separately, on VLANs.
Configure IGMP Snooping Querier
You can configure the parameters for IGMP snooping querier. Only a user with read/write access privileges can change the data on this page.
To configure IGMP snooping querier settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Configure Switching Information
240
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Querier Configuration
.
6. Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for IGMP snooping for the switch.
The default is Disable.
7. In the Snooping Querier IP Address field, type an IP address.
This specifies the snooping querier address to be used as the source address in periodic
IGMP queries. This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being sent.
8. Use IGMP Version to specify the IGMP protocol version used in periodic IGMP queries.
The range is 1 to 2. The default value is 2.
9. Use Query Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier.
The query Interval must be a value in the range of 1 and 1800. The default value is 60.
10. Use Querier Expiry Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed.
The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 and 300. The default value is 125.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The page displays the VLAN IDs enabled for IGMP snooping querier.
Configure Switching Information
241
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure IGMP Snooping Querier for VLANs
You can configure IGMP queriers for use with VLANs on the network.
To configure querier VLAN settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > IGMP Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration .
6. To create a new VLAN ID for IGMP snooping, select New Entry from the VLAN ID field and complete the following fields.
You can also set pre-configurable snooping querier parameters.
• VLAN ID . The VLAN ID for which the IGMP snooping querier is to be enabled.
• Querier Election Participate Mode . Enable or disable querier Participate mode.
Disabled . Upon seeing another querier of the same version in the VLAN, the snooping querier moves to the non-querier state.
Enabled . The snooping querier participates in querier election, in which the least
IP address operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to non-querier state.
• Snooping Querier VLAN Address . Specify the snooping querier IP address to be used as the source address in periodic IGMP queries sent on the specified VLAN.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
242
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 87. Querier VLAN Configuration
Field Description
Operational State
Operational Version
Last Querier Address
The operational state of the IGMP snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the following states:
• Querier : The snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch finds a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.
• Non-Querier
: The snooping switch is innNon-querier mode in the
VLAN. If the querier expiry interval timer expires, the snooping switch moves into querier mode.
• Disabled : The snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN.
The snooping querier moves to disabled mode when IGMP snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured.
The operational IGMP protocol version of the querier.
The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.
Last Querier Version The IGMP protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.
Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping querier.
Configure MLD Snooping
You can configure the parameters for MLD snooping, which is used to build forwarding lists for multicast traffic. Only a user with read/write access privileges can change the data on this page.
To configure MLD snooping:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
243
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use MLD Snooping Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD snooping for the switch. The default is Disable.
7. Select the Proxy Querier Mode Enable or Disable radio button.
This enables or disables an MLD proxy querier on the system. If it is disabled, then an
MLD proxy query with source IP 0::0 is not sent in response to an MLD leave packet. If it is enabled, then MLD proxy queries are sent. The default value is Enable.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable MLD Snooping Configuration fields.
Table 88. MLD Snooping Configuration
Field
Multicast Control Frame Count
Interfaces Enabled for MLD
Snooping
VLAN IDs Enabled For MLD
Snooping
Definition
The number of multicast control frames that have been processed by the CPU.
One or more interfaces on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled. MLD snooping must be enabled globally and on an interface for the interface to be able to snoop MLD packets to determine which segments should receive multicast packets directed to the group address.
Displays one or more VLANs on which MLD snooping is administratively enabled.
Configure Switching Information
244
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure a MLD Snooping Interface
To configure a MLD snooping interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Interface Configuration
.
All physical, VLAN, and LAG interfaces are displayed.
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure
All physical, VLAN, and LAG interfaces are listed in the Interface column.
7. Use Admin Mode to select the interface mode for the selected interface for MLD snooping for the switch. The default is Disable.
8. Use Group Membership Interval(secs) to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait for a report for a particular group on a particular interface before it deletes that interface from the group.
The valid range is from 2 to 3600 seconds. The configured value must be greater than
Max Response Time. The default is 260 seconds.
9. Use Max Response Time (secs) to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface.
Configure Switching Information
245
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Enter a value greater than or equal to 1 and less than the group membership interval in seconds. The default is 10 seconds. The configured value must be less than the group membership interval.
10. Use Present Expiration Time to specify the amount of time you want the switch to wait to receive a query on an interface before removing it from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.
Enter a value between 0 and 3600 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. A value of zero indicates an infinite time-out, that is, no expiration.
11. Fast Leave Admin Mode is the administrative mode of Fast Leave on the interface.
If Fast Leave is enabled, the interface can be immediately removed from the Layer 2 forwarding table entry upon receiving an MLD leave message for a multicast group without first sending out MAC-based general queries. The default is Disable.
12. Select Enable or Disable for the Proxy Querier Mode for a particular interface.
If the mode is disabled, an MLD proxy query with source IP 0::0 is not sent in response to an MLD leave packet. If the mode is enabled, MLD proxy queries are sent. The default value is Enable.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure MLD VLAN Settings
To configure MLD VLAN settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > MLD VLAN Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
246
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use VLAN ID to set the VLAN IDs for which MLD snooping is enabled.
7. Use Fast Leave Admin Mode to enable or disable the MLD snooping Fast Leave Mode for the specified VLAN ID.
8. Use Group Membership Interval to set the value for group membership interval of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.
The valid range is (Maximum Response Time + 1) to 3600.
9. Use Maximum Response Time to set the value for the maximum response time of MLD snooping for the specified VLAN ID.
The valid range is 1 to (Group Membership Interval –1). Its value must be less than group membership interval value.
10. Use Multicast Router Expiry Time to set the value for the multicast router expiry time of
MLD Snooping for the specified VLAN ID.
The valid range is 0 to 3600.
11. Select the Proxy Querier Mode for the specified VLAN ID from the menu.
If you select Disable, then MLD proxy query with source IP 0::0 is not sent in response to an MLD leave packet. The default value is Enable.
12. Click Add to enable MLD Snooping on the specified VLAN.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
247
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Enable or Disable a Multicast Router on an Interface
To enable or disable a multicast router on an interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router Configuration .
6. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to enable or disable the multicast router configuration.
7. From the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable .
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Multicast Router VLAN Settings
To configure multicast router VLAN settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Configure Switching Information
248
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Multicast Router VLAN Configuration
.
6. From the Interface menu, select the interface for which you want to enable or disable the multicast router configuration.
7. Use the VLAN ID field to specify the VLAN ID for which you want to enable or disable the multicast router configuration.
8. Form the Multicast Router menu, select Enable or Disable .
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure MLD Snooping Querier
You can configure the parameters for an MLD snooping querier. Only a user with read/write access privileges can change the data on this page.
To configure an MLD snooping querier:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
249
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Querier Admin Mode to select the administrative mode for MLD snooping for the switch. The default is Disable.
7. Use Querier Address to specify the snooping querier address to be used as source address in periodic MLD queries.
This address is used when no address is configured on the VLAN on which query is being sent. The supported IPv6 formats are x:x:x:x:x:x:x:x and x::x.
8. Use MLD Version to specify the MLD protocol version used in periodic MLD queries.
9. Use Query Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds between periodic queries sent by the snooping querier.
The query interval must be a value in the range of 1 to 1800. The default value is 60.
10. Use Querier Expiry Interval(secs) to specify the time interval in seconds after which the last querier information is removed.
The querier expiry Interval must be a value in the range of 60 to 300. The default value is
60. The page displays VLAN IDs enabled for the MLD snooping querier.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
250
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure MLD Snooping Querier VLAN Settings
To configure MLD snooping querier VLAN settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> Multicast > MLD Snooping > Querier VLAN Configuration
.
6. Use VLAN ID to select the VLAN ID on which the MLD snooping querier is administratively enabled and a VLAN exists in the VLAN database.
7.
Use
Querier Election Participate Mode
to enable or disable the MLD snooping querier participation in election mode.
When this mode is disabled, on detecting another querier of same version in the VLAN, the snooping querier moves to a non-querier state. When this mode is enabled, the snooping querier participates in querier election where the lowest IP address wins the querier election and operates as the querier in that VLAN. The other querier moves to non-querier state.
8. Use Querier VLAN Address to specify the snooping querier address to be used as the source address in periodic MLD queries sent on the specified VLAN.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
251
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 89. Querier VLAN Configuration
Field
Operational State
Description
The operational state of the MLD snooping querier on a VLAN. It can be in any of the following states:
• Querier
: Snooping switch is the querier in the VLAN. The snooping switch sends out periodic queries with a time interval equal to the configured querier query interval. If the snooping switch sees a better querier in the VLAN, it moves to non-querier mode.
• Non-Querier
: Snooping switch is in non-querier mode in the VLAN. If the querier expiry interval timer is expired, the snooping switch moves into querier mode.
• Disabled : Snooping querier is not operational on the VLAN. The snooping querier moves to disabled mode when MLD snooping is not operational on the VLAN or when the querier address is not configured or the network management address is also not configured.
Operational Version
Last Querier Address
Last Querier Version
The operational MLD protocol version of the querier.
The IP address of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the
VLAN.
The MLD protocol version of the last querier from which a query was snooped on the VLAN.
Operational Max Response Time Displays maximum response time to be used in the queries that are sent by the snooping querier.
Configure MVR
You can configure basic, advanced, group, interface or group membership settings.
Configure Basic MVR Settings
To configure basic MVR settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > MVR > Basic > MVR Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
252
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use MVR Running to Enable or Disable the MVR feature.
The factory default is Disable .
7. Use MVR Multicast VLAN to specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is received.
All source ports belong to this VLAN. The value can be set in a range of 1 to 4093. The default value is 1.
8. Use MVR Global Query Response Time to set the maximum time to wait for the IGMP reports membership on a receiver port.
This time applies only to receiver-port leave processing. When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port, the switch waits for the default or configured MVR query time for an
IGMP group membership report before removing the port from the multicast group membership. The value is equal to the tenths of a second. The range is from 1 to 100 tenths. The factory default is 5 tenths or one-half.
9. Use MVR Mode to specify the MVR mode of operation.
Possible values are compatible or dynamic. The factory default is compatible.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 90. MVR Configuration
Field
MVR Max Multicast Groups
MVR Current Multicast Groups
Definition
The maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports.
Displays current number of the MVR groups allocated.
Configure Switching Information
253
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Advanced MVR Settings
To configure advanced MVR settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Configuration .
6. Select the MVR Running Enable or Disable radio button.
The factory default is Disable.
7. Use the MVR Multicast VLAN to specify the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is received.
All source ports belong to this VLAN. The value can be set in a range of 1 to 4094. The default value is 1.
8. Use the MVR Global query response time to set the maximum time to wait for the IGMP reports membership on a receiver port. This time applies only to receiver-port leave processing. When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port, the switch waits for the default or configured MVR query time for an IGMP group membership report before removing the port from the multicast group membership. The value is equal to the tenths of second. The range is from 1 to 100 tenths. The factory default is 5 tenths or one-half.
9.
Select a
MVR Mode radio button to specify the MVR mode of operation.
The factory default is compatible.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
254
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 91. Advanced MVR Configuration
Field
MVR Max Multicast Groups
MVR Current Multicast Groups
Definition
The maximum number of multicast groups that MVR supports.
Displays the current number of MVR groups allocated.
Configure an MVR Group
To configure an MVR group:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Configuration .
6. Use the MVR Group IP to specify the IP address for the new MVR group.
7. Use the Count to specify the number of contiguous MVR groups.
This helps you to create multiple MVR groups through a single click of the Add button. If the field is empty, then clicking the button creates only one new group. The field is displayed as empty for each particular group. The range is from 1 to 256.
8. Click the Add button.
The MVR group is added.
Configure Switching Information
255
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 92. MVR Group Configuration
Field
Status
Members
Definition
The status of the specific MVR group.
The list of ports that participate in the specific MVR group.
Configure an MVR Interface
To configure an MVR interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Interface Configuration .
The status of each port displays.
6. Use Interface to select the interface.
7. Use Admin Mode to Enable or Disable MVR on a port.
The factory default is Disable .
8. Use Type to configure the port as an MVR receiver port or a source port.
The default port type is none .
9. Use Immediate Leave to Enable or Disable the Immediate Leave feature of the MVR on a port.
Configure Switching Information
256
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The factory default is Disable .
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure MVR Group Membership
To configure MVR group membership:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Group Membership
.
6. Use the Group IP to specify the IP multicast address of the MVR group.
7. Use the Port List to view the configured list of members of the selected MVR group.
You can use this port list to add the ports you selected to this MVR group.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
257
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View MVR Statistics
To view MVR statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > MVR > Advanced > MVR Statistics .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 93. MVR Statistics
Field
IGMP Query Received
IGMP Report V1 Received
IGMP Report V2 Received
IGMP Leave Received
IGMP Query Transmitted
Definition
The number of received IGMP queries.
The number of received IGMP reports V1.
The number of received IGMP reports V2.
The number of received IGMP leaves.
The number of transmitted IGMP queries.
Configure Switching Information
258
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 93. MVR Statistics (continued)
Field
IGMP Report V1 Transmitted
IGMP Report V2 Transmitted
IGMP Leave Transmitted
IGMP Packet Receive Failures
IGMP Packet Transmit Failures
Definition
The number of transmitted IGMP reports V1.
The number of transmitted IGMP reports V2.
The number of transmitted IGMP leaves.
The number of IGMP packet receive failures.
The number of IGMP packet transmit failures.
MAC Address Table
You can view or configure the MAC Address Table. This table contains information about unicast entries for which the switch has forwarding or filtering information. This information is used by the transparent bridging function in determining how to propagate a received frame.
Search the MAC Address Table
To search the MAC address table:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Address Table> Basic > Address Table .
Configure Switching Information
259
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Search By to search for MAC addresses by MAC address, VLAN ID, or port:
• Searched by MAC Address . Select MAC Address , enter the 6-byte hexadecimal
MAC address in two-digit groups separated by colons, for example,
01:23:45:67:89:AB. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, that entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses. An exact match is required.
• Searched by VLAN ID . Select VLAN ID , enter the VLAN ID, for example, 100. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses.
• Searched by Port . Select Port , enter the port ID in Unit/Slot/Port format, for example,
2/1/1. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry followed by the remaining (greater) MAC addresses.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 94. Basic Address Table
Field
Total MAC Address
MAC Address
VLAN ID
Port
Status
Description
Displaying the number of total MAC addresses learned or configured.
A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information. The format is a 6 byte MAC address that is separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.
The VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.
The port upon which this address was learned.
The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are as follows:
• Static. The value of the corresponding instance was added by the system or a user and cannot be relearned.
• Learned. The value of the corresponding instance was learned, and is being used.
• Management. The value of the corresponding instance is also the value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress.
Set the Dynamic Address Aging Interval
You can set the address aging interval for the specified forwarding database.
To set the address aging interval:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Configure Switching Information
260
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching > Address Table> Advanced > Dynamic Addresses
.
6. Use Address Aging Timeout (seconds) to specify the time-out period in seconds for aging out dynamically learned forwarding information.
IEEE 802.1D-1990 recommends a default of 300 seconds. The value can be specified as any number between 10 and 1000000 seconds. The factory default is 300.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure a Static MAC Address
To configure a static MAC address:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Address Table> Advanced > Static MAC Address .
6.
Use
Interface
to select the physical interface/LAGs.
Configure Switching Information
261
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
7. In the Static MAC Address field, type the MAC address.
8. Select the VLAN ID associated with the MAC address.
9. Take one of the following actions:
• Click the Add button.
The static MAC address is added to the switch.
• Click the Delete button.
The static MAC address deleted from the switch.
Port Settings
You can view and monitor the physical port information for the ports available on the switch.
Configure Port Settings
You can configure the physical interfaces on the switch.
To configure port settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Configuration .
6. In the Port column, select the check box for one or more ports or LAGs.
7. From the STP Mode menu, select the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode for the port or LAG.
The possible values are as follows:
• Enable . Enables the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port.
• Disable . Disables the Spanning Tree Protocol for this port.
The default is Enable.
Configure Switching Information
262
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
8. From the Admin Mode menu, select Enable or Disable .
This sets the port control administrative mode.For the port to participate in the network, you must select Enable . The factory default is Enable.
9. From the LACP Mode menu, select Enable or Disable .
This selects the Link Aggregation Control Protocol administrative mode. The mode must be enabled in order for the port to participate in link aggregation. The factory default is
Enable.
10.
From the
Auto-negotiation
menu, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
This specifies the auto-negotiation mode for this port. The default is Enable.
Note: After you change the auto-negotiation mode, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.
11.
From the
Speed
menu, select one of the following speeds:
• Auto
. The speed is set by the auto-negotiation process.
• 100 . 100 Mbits/second
• 10G
. 10 Gbits/second.
The delimiter characters for setting different speed values are a comma (,), a period (.) and a space ( ). For you to set the auto-negotiation speed, the auto-negotiation mode selection must be
Enable
. The default is Auto.
Note:
After you change the speed value, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.
12. From the Duplex Mode menu, select one of the following values are as follows:
• Auto . The duplex mode is set by the auto-negotiation process.
• Full
. Transmission between the devices occurs in both directions simultaneously.
• Half . Transmission between the devices occurs in only one direction at a time.
The default is Auto.
Note: After you change the duplex mode, the switch might be inaccessible for a number of seconds while the new settings take effect.
13.
From the
Link Trap menu, select whether to send a trap when link status changes.
The factory default is Enable.
14. In the Frame Size field, specify the maximum Ethernet frame size that the port supports or is configured to use, including Ethernet header, CRC, and payload.
The range is 1518 to 9398. The default maximum frame size is 1518.
15.
In the
Debounce Time
field, specify the timer value for port debouncing in a multiple of
100 milliseconds (msec) in the range to 100 to 5000.
The default debounce timer value is 0, which means that debouncing is disabled.
Configure Switching Information
263
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
16. From the Flow Control menu, select to enable or disable IEEE 802.3 flow control.
The default is Disable. The switch does not send pause frames if the port buffers become full. Flow control helps to prevent data loss when the port cannot keep up with the number of frames being switched. When enabled, the switch can send a pause frame to stop traffic on a port if the amount of memory used by the packets on the port exceeds a preconfigured threshold and responds to pause requests from partner devices. The paused port does not forward packets for the period of time specified in the pause frame.
When the pause frame time elapses, or the utilization returns to a specified low threshold, the switch enables the port to again transmit frames. For LAG interfaces, flow control mode is displayed as
blank
because flow control is not applicable.
17. In the Load Interval field, specify the load interval period for which data is used to compute load statistics.
Enter the interval in multiples of 30 seconds. The allowable range is 30 to 600. The default load interval is 300 seconds. The smaller the load interval is, the more accurate the instantaneous rate for load statistics is.
18. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 95. Port Configuration
Field
Media Type
Port Type
Admin Status
Physical Status
Link Status ifIndex
Description
The media type.
For normal ports this field is Normal . Otherwise the possible values are as follows:
• Mirrored . The port is a mirrored port on which all the traffic is copied to the probe port.
• Probe . Use this port to monitor a mirrored port.
• Trunk Member
. The port is a member of a link aggregation trunk.
Look at the LAG pages for more information.
When the port’s admin mode is D-Disable, this field indicates the reason. Possible reasons are as follows:
• STP . Spanning Tree Protocol violation.
• UDLD
. UDLD protocol violation.
• XCEIVER . Unsupported SFP/SFP+ inserted.
Indicates the port speed and duplex mode.
Indicates whether the link is up or down.
The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.
Configure Switching Information
264
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Expandable Port Settings
You can view and configure the expandable ports.
To view and configure expandable ports information:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Ports > Expandable Port Configuration .
The nonconfigurable Operational Port(s) column displays the ports that are operational.
6. In the 40G Interface column, select the check box for the interface.
7. From the Configured Mode menu, select the expandable port mode:
• 1x40G . The interface is not expanded and functions in 40 mode. This is the default setting.
• 4x10G . The interface is expanded to four 10G ports.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
9. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Configure Switching Information
265
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Port Descriptions
To configure and display the description for all ports in the device:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Description .
6. Use Port Description to enter the description string to be attached to a port.
It can be up to 64 characters in length.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 96. Port Description
Field
Port
MAC Address
PortList Bit Offset ifIndex
Description
Selects the interface for which data is to be displayed or configured.
The physical address of the specified interface.
The bit offset value that corresponds to the port when the MIB object type PortList is used to manage in SNMP.
The interface index associated with the port.
Configure Switching Information
266
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View Port Transceiver Information
You can view the transceiver information for all fiber ports on the switch
To view port transceiver information:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > Ports > Port Transceiver .
6. Select Unit ID to display physical ports of the selected unit or select All to display physical ports of all units.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 97. Port Transceiver
Field
Port
Vendor Name
Link Length 50 μ m
Link Length 62, 5 μ m
Serial Number
Part Number
Nominal Bit Rate
Revision
Compliance
Description
The interface for which data is to be displayed.
Vendor name of the SFP.
Link length supported for 50 μ m fiber.
Link length supported for 62, 5 μ m fiber.
Serial number of the SFP.
Part number of the SFP.
Nominal signalling rate for SFP.
Vendor revision of the SFP.
Compliance of the SFP.
Configure Switching Information
267
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Link Aggregation Groups
Link aggregation groups (LAGs), which are also known as port-channels, allow you to combine multiple full-duplex Ethernet links into a single logical link. Network devices treat the aggregation as if it were a single link, which increases fault tolerance and provides load sharing. You assign the LAG VLAN membership after you create a LAG. The LAG by default becomes a member of the management VLAN.
A LAG interface can be either static or dynamic, but not both. All members of a LAG must participate in the same protocols. A static port-channel interface does not require a partner system to be able to aggregate its member ports.
Static LAGs are supported. When a port is added to a LAG as a static member, it neither transmits nor receives LACPDUs.
Configure LAG Settings
You can group one or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group, which is also known as a port-channel. The switch treats the LAG as if it were a single link.
To configure LAG settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> LAG > LAG Configuration .
6. Use LAG Name to enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.
You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be specified for you to create the LAG.
7. Use Admin Mode to select Enable or Disable.
Configure Switching Information
268
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that form the LAG are not released. The factory default is Enable.
8.
Use
Hash Mode
to select the load-balancing mode used on a port-channel (LAG).
Traffic is balanced on a port-channel (LAG) by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets. The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet, and associating that pattern with a particular link:
• Src MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port . Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.
• Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port . Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.
• Src/Dest MAC, VLAN, EType, incoming port . Source/Destination MAC, VLAN,
EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.
Src/Dest MAC, VLAN,
EType, incoming port is the default.
• Src IP
and
Src TCP/UDP Port fields. Source IP and Source TCP/UDP fields of the packet.
• Dest IP
and
Dest TCP/UDP Port
fields. Destination IP and Destination TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.
• Src/Dest IP
and
TCP/UDP Port Fields
. Source/Destination IP and source/destination
TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.
• Enhanced hashing Mode
. Features MODULO-N operation based on the number of ports in the LAG, non-unicast traffic and unicast traffic hashing using a common hash algorithm, excellent load balancing performance, and packet attributes selection based on the packet type:
•
For L2 packets, source and destination MAC address are used for hash computation.
•
For L3 packets, source IP, destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports are used.
9.
Use
STP Mode
to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode associated with the LAG.
The possible values are as follows:
• Disable . Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.
• Enable
. Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.
10.
Use
Static Mode
to select
Enable
or
Disable
.
When the LAG is enabled, it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs that is, the member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it can receive are dropped. The factory default is Disable.
11. Use Link Trap to specify whether to send a trap when the link status changes.
The factory default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.
12.
Use
Local Preference Mode
to
Enable
or
Disable
the LAG interface’s local preference mode.
The default is Disable.
Configure Switching Information
269
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 98. LAG Configuration
Field
LAG Description
LAG ID
LAG State
Configured Ports
Active Ports
Description
Enter the description string to be attached to a LAG. It can be up to 64 characters in length.
Identification of the LAG.
Indicates whether the link is up or down.
Indicate the ports that are members of this port-channel
Indicates the ports that are actively participating in the port-channel.
Configure LAG Membership
You can select two or more full-duplex Ethernet links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group (LAG), which is also known as a port-channel. The switch can treat the port-channel as if it were a single link.
To configure LAG membership:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> LAG > LAG Membership .
Configure Switching Information
270
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
Use
LAG ID
to select the identification of the LAG.
7. Use LAG Name to enter the name to be assigned to the LAG.
You can enter any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters. A valid name must be specified for you to create the LAG.
8. Use LAG Description to enter the description string to be attached to a LAG.
It can be up to 64 characters in length.
9.
Use
Admin Mode
to select
Enable
or
Disable
.
When the LAG is disabled, no traffic flows and LACPDUs are dropped, but the links that form the LAG are not released. The factory default is Enable.
10.
Use
Link Trap
to specify whether to send a trap when the link status changes.
The factory default is Enable, which causes the trap to be sent.
11. Use STP Mode to enable or disable the Spanning Tree Protocol administrative mode associated with the LAG.
The possible values are as follows:
• Disable
. Spanning tree is disabled for this LAG.
• Enable . Spanning tree is enabled for this LAG. Enable is the default.
12. Use Static Mode to select enable or disable.
When the LAG is enabled, it does not transmit or process received LACPDUs that is, the member ports do not transmit LACPDUs and all the LACPDUs it can receive are dropped. The factory default is Disable.
13.
Use
Hash Mode
to select the load-balancing mode used on a port-channel (LAG).
Traffic is balanced on a port-channel (LAG) by selecting one of the links in the channel over which to transmit specific packets.
Configure Switching Information
271
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The link is selected by creating a binary pattern from selected fields in a packet, and associating that pattern with a particular link:
• Src MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port . Source MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.
• Dest MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port . Destination MAC, VLAN, EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet.
• Src/Dest MAC,VLAN,EType,incoming port . Source/Destination MAC, VLAN,
EtherType, and incoming port associated with the packet. This option is the default.
• Src IP and Src TCP/UDP Port fields. Source IP and Source TCP/UDP fields of the packet.
• Dest IP and Dest TCP/UDP Port fields. Destination IP and Destination TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.
• Src/Dest IP and TCP/UDP Port fields. Source/Destination IP and source/destination
TCP/UDP Port fields of the packet.
• Enhanced Hashing Mode . Features MODULO-N operation based on the number of ports in the LAG, non-unicast traffic and unicast traffic hashing using a common hash algorithm, excellent load balancing performance, and packet attributes selection based on the packet type:
For L2 packets, source and destination MAC address are used for hash computation.
For L3 packets, source IP, destination IP address, TCP/UDP ports are used.
14. Use the Port Selection Table to select the ports as members of the LAG.
15. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Multiple Registration Protocol Overview
Like 802.1AS, Multiple Registration Protocol (MRP) is an audio video bridging (AVB) feature that is available on some FASTPATH platforms. MVR is a base registration protocol that enables devices running an MRP application to register attributes to other devices in a network. MRP provides an application to register attributes such as bandwidth for a given AV stream and MAC address information. It is used by various applications to propagate the registration. Blade switches support the following MRP applications:
• Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP) . MMRP allows for the propagation MAC address information in the network, and allows for the registration and deregistration of both individual MAC address information and group MAC address membership. End stations can request to join or leave a multicast group, or to register an individual MAC address with a specific VLAN. MAC address entries can be dynamically registered and deregistered if MMRP is administratively enabled on the switch.
• Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) . MVRP registers VLANs in the network, enabling automatic VLAN configuration on the switch. In a typical network, VLAN tagging is common. Many nodes require ingress traffic to be tagged with a specific VLAN ID, and
Configure Switching Information
272
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual other nodes require egress traffic to be transmitted with a specific VLAN ID. With the use of MVRP on both ingress and egress, no manual VLAN configuration is required to pass tagged traffic through the network.
Note: MRP framework must be available and enabled in all intermediate devices to ensure that the propagation of the attributes occurs throughout the network.
With MRP, network attributes are declared, registered, withdrawn, and removed completely dynamically without any user intervention. This dynamic nature is especially useful in networks where the following is true:
-
Network attributes are likely to change frequently, requiring reconfiguration of the intermediate devices.
-
Recipients of these attributes frequently increase or decrease in number.
Each of these changes without a dynamic self-adjusting framework would require constant attention from the network administrator.
Configure Global MRP Settings
You can configure global MRP settings for the switch.
To configure global MRP settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > MRP > Basic > MRP Configuration .
Configure Switching Information
273
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Note: The fields available on the MRP Configuration page vary based on the platform and its supported features.
6. Select the MVRP Mode Enable or Disable radio button.
This specifies the global administrative mode of MVRP on the device. The default is
Disable.
Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) registers VLANs in the network, enabling automatic VLAN configuration on the device. In a typical network, VLAN tagging is common. Many nodes require ingress traffic to be tagged with a specific VLAN ID, and other nodes require egress traffic to be transmitted with a specific VLAN ID. With the use of MVRP on both ingress and egress, no manual VLAN configuration is required to pass tagged traffic through the network.
7. Select the MMRP Enable or Disable radio button.
This specifies the global administrative mode of MMRP on the device. The default is
Disable.
Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP) allows the propagation of MAC address information in the network, and allows for the registration and deregistration of both individual MAC address information and group MAC address membership. End stations can request to join or leave a multicast group, or to register an individual MAC address with a specific VLAN. MAC address entries can be dynamically registered and deregistered if MMRP is administratively enabled on the device.
8. Select the Periodic State Machine (MVRP) Enable or Disable radio button.
When enabled, the state machine can help limit the effect of topology changes and reduce the number of protocol data units (PDUs) transmitted between devices. The default is Disable.
9. Select the Periodic State Machine (MMRP) Enable or Disable radio button.
When enabled, the state machine can help limit the effect of topology changes and reduce the number of protocol data units (PDUs) transmitted between devices. The default is Disable.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
274
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure MRP Port Settings
You can configure the per-port MRP mode and timer settings. The timers control when and how often various messages are transmitted on each interface.
To configure MRP port settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> MRP > Advanced > Port Settings
.
6. To configure one or more ports or LAGs, select the check box next to each port or LAG to configure.
You can select multiple ports to apply the same settings to the selected interfaces.
7. In the MVRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable .
This specifies the administrative mode of Multiple VLAN Registration Protocol (MVRP) on the interface. MVRP registers VLANs in the network, enabling automatic VLAN configuration on the device.
8. In the MMRP Mode field, select Enable or Disable .
This specifies the administrative mode of Multiple MAC Registration Protocol (MMRP) on the interface. MMRP allows the propagation of MAC address information in the network and allows for the registration and deregistration of both individual MAC address information and group MAC address membership.
9. Use the MRP Join Timer field to configure the amount of time in centiseconds to wait for
JoinIn messages from other MRV participants after the interface sends a Join message.
Configure Switching Information
275
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
If the amount of time specified in this field passes before the interface receives a JoinIn message, the interface resends the Join message. The range is 10 to 100 centiseconds.
The default value is 20.
10. Use the MRP Leave Timer field to configure the amount of time in centiseconds to wait before the interface deregisters attributes from other MRV participants.
If the interface receives Join messages from other participants before the Leave timer expires, the attributes are not deregistered. The range is 20 to 600 centiseconds. The default value is 300.
11. Use the MRP Leave All Timer field to configure the amount of time to wait, after the interface starts the MRP registration process, before the participants refresh and reregister their attributes.
The range is 200 to 6000 centiseconds. The default value is 2000.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View MMRP and Clear Statistics
You can view and clear information regarding the MMRP frames transmitted and received by the switch and by each interface.
To view and clear MMRP statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > MRP > Advanced > MMRP Statistics .
Configure Switching Information
276
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
7. To clear the statistics for one or more ports, do the following: a.
Select the check box next to the interface or interfaces.
b. Click the Clear button.
The statistics are cleared.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that the MMRP Global
Statistics page displays.
Table 99. MMRP Global Statistics
Field
Interface
Frames Received
Bad Header
Bad Format
Frames Transmitted
Transmission Failures
Description
In the MMRP Statistics table, this field identifies the interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.
The number of MMRP frames that were received on the device or on the particular interface.
The number of MMRP frames with bad headers that were received on the switch.
The number of MMRP frames with bad PDUs body formats that were received on the switch.
The number of MMRP frames that were transmitted on the switch.
The number of MMRP frames that the switch failed to transmit.
Configure Switching Information
277
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View and Clear MVRP Statistics
You can view and clear information about the MVRP frames transmitted and received by the switch and by each interface.
To view and clear MVRP statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching > MRP > MVRP Statistics .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
7. To clear the statistics for one or more ports, do the following: a.
Select the check box next to the interface or interfaces.
b. Click the Clear button.
The statistics are cleared.
Configure Switching Information
278
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that the MVRP Global
Statistics page displays.
Table 100. MVRP Statistics
Field
Interface
Frames Received
Bad Header
Bad Format
Frames Transmitted
Transmission Failures
Message Queue Failures
Registration Failures
Description
In the MVRP Statistics table, this field identifies the interface associated with the rest of the data in the row.
The number of MVRP frames that were received on the switch.
The number of MVRP frames with bad headers that were received on the switch.
The number of MVRP frames with bad PDUs body formats that were received on the switch.
The number of MVRP frames that were transmitted on the switch.
The number of MVRP frames that the switch failed to transmit.
The number of messages that failed to be added to the queue.
The number of MVRP frames that failed to register on a device or particular interface.
Loop Protection
Loop protection can detect physical and logical loops between Ethernet ports on a device.
About Loop Protection
Loops inside a network are costly because they consume resources and reduce the performance of the network. Detecting loops manually can be cumbersome.
The switch can automatically identify loops in the network. You can enable loop protection per port or globally.
If loop protection is enabled, the switch sends predefined protocol data unit (PDU) packets to a Layer 2 multicast destination address (09:00:09:09:13:A6) on all ports for which the feature is enabled. You can selectively disable PDU packet transmission for loop protection on specific ports even while port loop protection is enabled. If the switch receives a packet with the previously mentioned multicast destination address, the source MAC address in the packet is compared with the MAC address of the switch. If the MAC address does not match, the packet is forwarded to all ports that are members of the same VLAN, just like any other multicast packet. The packet is not forwarded to the port from which it was received.
Configure Switching Information
279
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
If the source MAC address matches the MAC address of the switch, the switch can perform one of the following actions, depending on how you configure the action:
• The port is shut down.
• A log message is generated. (If a syslog server is configured, the log message can be sent to the syslog server.)
• The port is shut down and a log message is generated.
If loop protection is disabled, the multicast packet is silently dropped.
Loop protection is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks between spanning tree–aware switches. Loop protection is designed for unmanaged switches that drop spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).
You need to enable the feature globally before you can enable it at the port level so that the system policy filter can be installed.
Loop Protection and PDU Packet Transmission
Loop protection sends loop protocol packets from all ports on which it is enabled. You can configure the interval (1 to 5 seconds) between two successive loop protection PDU packets.
The default interval is 5 seconds. If the switch receives a loop protocol packet on a port for which the action is set to shut down the port, the port can no longer receive and send frames.
Loop protection operates at a port level, regardless of VLAN assignment and membership, detecting loops across VLANs.
Loop Protection and Spanning Tree Protocol
Loop protection does not impact end nodes and is not intended for ports that serve as uplinks between spanning tree–aware switches. Loop protection can coexist with Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP). You can enable both loop protection and STP on a port because these features function independently of each other. STP does not bring a port down when a loop is detected but keeps the port in blocking state. Because PDUs are allowed in a blocking state, loop protection packets are received and loop protection brings down the port that is involved in the loop (if the configured action is to shut down the port).
Configure the Global Loop Protection Settings
Before you can configure loop protection for individual ports (see
Configure the Loop
Protection Settings for Ports and View the Loop Protection State
globally enable and configure loop protection.
To globally enable and configure loop protection:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
Configure Switching Information
280
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Switching
> L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration
.
6. In the Global L2 Loop Protection Configuration section, configure the following settings:
• Next to Admin Mode, select the
Enable
or
Disable
radio button to specify the administrative mode of loop protection on the switch.
By default, loop protection is globally disabled.
• From the Transmit Interval menu, select the interval between the transmissions of loop packets on a port.
The range is from 1 to 5 seconds. The default setting is 5 seconds. The selected interval applies to all ports for which you enable loop protection.
• From the Max PDU Receive menu, select the maximum number of packets that a port can receive before an action is taken.
The default setting is 1 packet. The selected number of packets applies to all ports for which you enable loop protection.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Switching Information
281
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the Loop Protection Settings for Ports and View the
Loop Protection State
Before you can configure loop protection for individual ports, you must globally enable loop
Configure the Global Loop Protection Settings
To enable and configure loop protection for a port and view the loop protection state on the switch:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Switching
> L2 Loop Protection > L2 Loop Protection Configuration .
6. Select one of the following options to specify which ports are displayed on the page:
• Click LAG to show the list of all LAG interfaces.
• Click All to show the list of all physical ports as well as LAG interfaces.
7. Use one of the following methods to select a port:
• In the Go To Port field, enter the port in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Port column, select the check box for the port that you want to configure.
Configure Switching Information
282
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Note: You can select multiple ports. You can select all ports by selecting the check box in the table header.
8.
From the
Keep Alive
menu, select
Enable
to specify that loop protection must be enabled on the port.
By default, loop protection is disabled for a port.
9. From the RX Action menu, select the action that the switch takes when a loop is detected on the port:
• Log . Log the message when a loop is detected on the port.
• Disable
. Disable the port when a loop is detected. This is the default setting.
• Both . Log and disable the port when a loop is detected.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
11.
To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the
Update
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 101. Loop protection interface configuration information
Field Description
Loop Detected
Loop Count
Time Since Last Loop
Port Status
Indicates (Yes or No) whether a loop is detected on the port.
The number of packets that were received on the port after the loop was detected.
The time since the loop was detected.
The status of the port (Enabled or Disabled).
Auto Recovery Time Left The time that is left before the port is reenabled through the autorecovery process.
The time is in the range from 30 to 604800 seconds.
Errdisable Reason The reason that the port was disabled. In addition to being disabled because of loop protection, the port can be disabled because of Unidirectional Link Detection
(UDLD), a broadcast storm, a unicast storm, and so on.
Configure Switching Information
283
5.
Routing
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Manage Routes
•
Configure the Routing IP Settings
•
Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch
•
IPv6
•
VLAN Overview
•
Configure Address Resolution Protocol
•
Configure RIP
•
Configure Router Discovery
•
Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
5
284
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Manage Routes
The Routing Table collects routes from multiple sources: static routes and local routes. The
Routing Table can learn multiple routes to the same destination from multiple sources. The
Routing Table lists all routes.
Configure a Basic Route
To configure a basic route:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Routing Table > Basic > Route Configuration .
6. In the Route Type list, select one of the following route types.
• Default . To create a default route, all that must be specified is the next hop address, and preference.
• Static . To create a static route, specify the network address, subnet mask, next hop address, and preference.
• Static Reject . To create a static reject route, specify the network address, subnet mask, and preference.
7. Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination.
8. Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.
This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask.
9. Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.
Routing
285
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.
10. Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255.
You can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.
11. Use Description to specify the description of this route that identifies the route.
Description must consist of alphanumeric, hyphen, or underscore characters and can be up to 31 characters in length.
12. Click the Add button.
The static route is added to the switch.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 102. Routing Table Basic Route Configuration
Field
Network Address
Subnet Mask
Protocol
Route Type
Next Hop Interface
Next Hop Address
Description
The IP route prefix for the destination.
Also referred to as the subnet/network mask, this indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.
This field tells which protocol created the specified route. The possibilities are one of the following:
• Local
•
Static
This field can be
Connected
or
Static
or
Dynamic
based on the protocol.
The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination.
The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.
Routing
286
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 102. Routing Table Basic Route Configuration (continued)
Field
Preference
Metric
Description
The preference is an integer value from (0 to 255). The user can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance
) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.
Administrative cost of the path to the destination. If no value is entered, default is 1. The range is 0–255.
Configure Advanced Routes
To configure advanced routes:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Routing Table> Advanced > Route Configuration .
6. Use the Route Type field to specify Default or static reject route.
If you are creating a default route, all that must be specified is the next hop IP address; otherwise, each field must be completed.
7. Network Address displays the IP route prefix for the destination.
Routing
287
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
8. Subnet Mask indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.
This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask.
9. Next Hop IP Address displays the outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination.
The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.
10. Preference displays an integer value from 1 to 255.
You can specify the preference value (sometimes called
administrative distance
) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.
11. Use Description to specify the description of this route that identifies the route.
The description must consist of alphanumeric, hyphen or underscore characters and can be up to 31 characters in length.
12. Click the Add button.
The static route is added to the switch.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 103. Route Configuration - Learned Routes
Field
Network Address
Subnet Mask
Protocol
Route Type
Next Hop Interface
Next Hop IP Address
Description
The IP route prefix for the destination.
Also referred to as the subnet/network mask, this indicates the portion of the IP interface address that identifies the attached network.
This field tells which protocol created the specified route. The possibilities are one of the following:
•
Local
• Static
This field can be either default or static.
The outgoing router interface to use when forwarding traffic to the destination.
The outgoing router IP address to use when forwarding traffic to the next router (if any) in the path toward the destination. The next router is always one of the adjacent neighbors or the IP address of the local interface for a directly attached network.
Routing
288
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 103. Route Configuration - Learned Routes (continued)
Field
Preference
Metric
Description
The preference is an integer value from 0 to 255. The user can specify the preference value (sometimes called administrative distance) of an individual static route. Among routes to the same destination, the route with the lowest preference value is the route entered into the forwarding database. By specifying the preference of a static route, the user controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than routes from dynamic routing protocols. The preference also controls whether a static route is more or less preferred than other static routes to the same destination.
Administrative cost of the path to the destination. If no value is entered, default is 1. The range is 0–255.
Specify Route Preferences
You can configure the default preference for each protocol, for example, 60 for static routes,
120 for RIP. These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics. Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol, independent of any other protocol.
The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference value. When there are multiple routes to a destination, the preference values are used to determine the preferred route. If there is still a tie, the route with the best route metric is chosen. To avoid problems with mismatched metrics (such as RIP and Open Shortest Path
First [OSPF] metrics, which are not directly comparable) you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols.
To specify route preferences
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> Routing Table > Advanced > Route Preferences
.
Routing
289
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Static to specify the static route preference value in the router.
The default value is 1. The range is 1 to 255.
7. Specify the RIP route preference value in the router.
The default value is 120. The range is 1 to 255.
8. Specify the OSPF Intra route preference value in the router.
The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328) requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned through OSPF in the following order: intra < inter < type-1 < type-2.
9. Specify the OSPF Inter route preference value in the router.
The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328) requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned through OSPF in the following order: intra < inter < type-1 < type-2.
10. Specify the OSPF External route preference value in the router.
The default value is 110. The range is 1 to 255. The OSPF specification (RFC 2328) requires that preference value must be the same for all the OSPF external route types, such as type1/type2/nssa1/nssa2.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The Local field displays the local route preference value.
Routing
290
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the Routing IP Settings
You can configure routing IP settings for the switch, as opposed to the IP settings for an interface.
To configure the routing IP settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IP > Basic > IP Configuration
.
6. Use Routing Mode to select Enable or Disable .
You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces. The default value is Disable.
7. Use ICMP Echo Replies to select Enable or Disable .
If you select Enable, then only the router can send ECHO replies. By default ICMP Echo
Replies are sent for echo requests.
8. Use ICMP Redirects to select Enable or Disable .
If this is enabled globally and on an interface level, then only the router can send ICMP
Redirects.
9. Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.
Routing
291
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
By default, the rate limit is 100 packets/sec (the burst interval is 1000 msec). To disable
ICMP Rate limiting, set this field to 0. The valid rate Interval is from 0 to 2147483647.
10. Use ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.
By default, burst size is 100 packets. When the burst interval is 0, then configuring this field is not a valid operation. The valid burst size range is 1 to 200.
11. Use Select to configure Global Default Gateway to edit the Global Default Gateway field.
12. Use Global Default Gateway to set the global default gateway to the manually configured value. A default gateway configured with this command is more preferred than a default gateway learned from a DHCP server. Only one default gateway can be configured. If you invoke this command multiple times, each command replaces the previous value.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 104. Routing IP Configuration
Field
Default Time to Live
Maximum Next Hops
Maximum Routes
Description
The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.
The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a compile-time constant.
The maximum number of routes (routing table size) supported by the switch. This is a compile-time constant.
View Statistics
The statistics reported on this page are as specified in RFC 1213.
To view statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IP > Basic > Statistics .
Routing
292
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 105. IP Basic Statistics
Field
IpInReceives
IpInHdrErrors
IpInAddrErrors
IpForwDatagrams
Description
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error.
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so on.
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported classes (Class E). For entities that are not IP gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.
The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final
IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this entity, and the source-route option processing was successful.
Routing
293
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 105. IP Basic Statistics (continued)
Field
IpInUnknownProtos
IpInDiscards
IpInDelivers
IpOutRequests
IpOutDiscards
IpOutNoRoutes
IpReasmTimeout
IpReasmReqds
IpReasmOKs
IpReasmFails
IpFragOKs
IpFragFails
IpFragCreates
IpRoutingDiscards
IcmpInMsgs
Description
The number of locally addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded (for lack of buffer space). This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user protocols (including ICMP).
The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user protocols (including
ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.
The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion.
This includes any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.
The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.
The number of IP fragments received that were reassembled at this entity.
The number of IP datagrams successfully re-assembled.
The number of failures detected by the IP re-assembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.
The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.
The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for reasons such as their Don't Fragment flag was set.
The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity.
The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they were valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries.
The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.
Routing
294
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 105. IP Basic Statistics (continued)
Field
IcmpInErrors
IcmpInDestUnreachs
IcmpInTimeExcds
IcmpInParmProbs
IcmpInSrcQuenchs
IcmpInRedirects
IcmpInEchos
IcmpInEchoReps
IcmpInTimestamps
IcmpInTimestampReps
IcmpInAddrMasks
IcmpInAddrMaskReps
IcmpOutMsgs
IcmpOutErrors
IcmpOutDestUnreachs
IcmpOutTimeExcds
IcmpOutParmProbs
IcmpOutSrcQuenchs
IcmpOutRedirects
IcmpOutEchos
IcmpOutEchoReps
IcmpOutTimestamps
IcmpOutTimestampReps
IcmpOutAddrMasks
Description
The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).
The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received.
The number of ICMP time exceeded messages received.
The number of ICMP parameter problem messages received.
The number of ICMP source quench messages received.
The number of ICMP redirect messages received.
The number of ICMP echo (request) messages received.
The number of ICMP echo reply messages received.
The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages received.
The number of ICMP rimestamp reply messages received.
The number of ICMP address mask request messages received.
The number of ICMP address mask reply messages received.
The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send.
This counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.
The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.
The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages sent.
The number of ICMP time exceeded messages sent.
The number of ICMP parameter problem messages sent.
The number of ICMP source quench messages sent.
The number of ICMP redirect messages sent. For a host, this is always zero, since hosts do not send redirects.
The number of ICMP echo (request) messages sent.
The number of ICMP echo reply messages sent.
The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages.
The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages sent.
The number of ICMP address mask request messages sent.
Routing
295
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Routing Parameters for the Switch
You can configure routing parameters for the switch as opposed to an interface.
To configure routing parameters for the switch:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IP > Advanced > IP Configuration .
6. Use Routing Mode to select Enable or Disable .
You must enable routing for the switch before you can route through any of the interfaces.
The default value is Disable.
7. Use ICMP Echo Replies to select Enable or Disable .
If you select Enable, then only the router can send ECHO replies. By default ICMP echo replies are sent for echo requests.
8. Use ICMP Redirects to select Enable or Disable .
If it is enabled globally and on interface level then only the router can send ICMP redirects.
9. Use ICMP Rate Limit Interval to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.
Routing
296
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
By default, the rate limit is 100 packets/sec, (the burst interval is 1000 msec). To disable
ICMP Ratelimiting set this field to 0. The valid rate interval is in the range 0 to
2147483647.
10. Use ICMP Rate Limit Burst Size to control the ICMP error packets by specifying the number of ICMP error packets that are allowed per burst interval.
By default, the burst size is 100 packets. When the burst interval is 0, then configuring this field is not a valid operation. The valid burst size is 1 to 200.
11. Use Select to Configure Global Default Gateway to edit the Global Default Gateway field.
12.
Use
Global Default Gateway
to set the global default gateway to the manually configured value.
A default gateway configured with this command is more preferred than a default gateway learned from a DHCP server. Only one default gateway can be configured. If you invoke this command multiple times, each command replaces the previous value.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 106. Routing IP Configuration
Field
Default Time to Live
Maximum Next Hops
Maximum Routes
Maximum Static Routes
Description
The default value inserted into the Time-To-Live field of the IP header of datagrams originated by the switch, if a TTL value is not supplied by the transport layer protocol.
The maximum number of hops supported by the switch. This is a compile-time constant.
The maximum number of routes (routing table size) supported by the switch. This is a compile-time constant.
The maximum number of static routes supported by the switch.
View IP Statistics
The statistics reported on this page are as specified in RFC 1213.
To view IP statistics:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Routing
297
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IP > Advanced > Statistics .
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 107. IP Statistics
Field
IpInReceives
IpInHdrErrors
IpInAddrErrors
Description
The total number of input datagrams received from interfaces, including those received in error.
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IP headers, including bad checksums, version number mismatch, other format errors, time-to-live exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IP options, and so on
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IP address in their IP header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, 0.0.0.0) and addresses of unsupported classes (such as.,
Class E). For entities that are not IP gateways and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.
Routing
298
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 107. IP Statistics (continued)
Field
IpForwDatagrams
IpInUnknownProtos
IpInDiscards
IpInDelivers
IpOutRequests
IpOutDiscards
IpOutNoRoutes
IpReasmTimeout
IpReasmReqds
IpReasmOKs
IpReasmFails
IpFragOKs
IpFragFails
IpFragCreates
Description
The number of input datagrams for which this entity was not their final
IP destination, as a result of which an attempt was made to find a route to forward them to that final destination. In entities that do not act as IP gateways, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this entity, and the source-route option processing was successful.
The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
The number of input IP datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but which were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.
The total number of input datagrams successfully delivered to IP user-protocols (including ICMP).
The total number of IP datagrams that local IP user-protocols (including
ICMP) supplied to IP in requests for transmission. This counter does not include any datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams.
The number of output IP datagrams for which no problem was encountered to prevent their transmission to their destination, but that were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter would include datagrams counted in ipForwDatagrams if any such packets met this (discretionary) discard criterion.
The number of IP datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination. This counter includes any packets counted in ipForwDatagrams that meet this no-route criterion.
This includes any datagrams that a host cannot route because all of its default gateways are down.
The maximum number of seconds for which received fragments are held while they are awaiting reassembly at this entity.
The number of IP fragments received that needed to be reassembled at this entity.
The number of IP datagrams successfully reassembled.
The number of failures detected by the IP reassembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, etc). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IP fragments since some algorithms can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received.
The number of IP datagrams that were fragmented at this entity.
The number of IP datagrams that were discarded because they needed to be fragmented at this entity but could not be, for example this can occur because their Don't Fragment flag was set.
The number of IP datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation at this entity.
Routing
299
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 107. IP Statistics (continued)
Field
IpRoutingDiscards
IcmpInMsgs
IcmpInErrors
IcmpInDestUnreachs
IcmpInTimeExcds
IcmpInParmProbs
IcmpInSrcQuenchs
IcmpInRedirects
IcmpInEchos
IcmpInEchoReps
IcmpInTimestamps
IcmpInTimestampReps
IcmpInAddrMasks
IcmpInAddrMaskReps
IcmpOutMsgs
IcmpOutErrors
IcmpOutDestUnreachs
IcmpOutTimeExcds
IcmpOutParmProbs
IcmpOutSrcQuenchs
IcmpOutRedirects
IcmpOutEchos
IcmpOutEchoReps
Description
The number of routing entries that were discarded even though they are valid. One possible reason for discarding such an entry could be to free up buffer space for other routing entries.
The total number of ICMP messages that the entity received. This counter includes all those counted by icmpInErrors.
The number of ICMP messages that the entity received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).
The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages received.
The number of ICMP time exceeded messages received.
The number of ICMP parameter problem messages received.
The number of ICMP source quench messages received.
The number of ICMP redirect messages received.
The number of ICMP echo (request) messages received.
The number of ICMP echo reply messages received.
The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages received.
The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages received.
The number of ICMP address mask request messages received.
The number of ICMP address mask reply messages received.
The total number of ICMP messages that this entity attempted to send.
This counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.
The number of ICMP messages that this entity did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP Layer such as the inability of IP to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.
The number of ICMP destination unreachable messages sent.
The number of ICMP time exceeded messages sent.
The number of ICMP parameter problem messages sent.
The number of ICMP source quench messages sent.
The number of ICMP redirect messages sent. For a host, this is zero, since hosts do not send redirects.
The number of ICMP echo (request) messages sent.
The number of ICMP echo reply messages sent.
Routing
300
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 107. IP Statistics (continued)
Field
IcmpOutTimestamps
IcmpOutTimestampReps
IcmpOutAddrMasks
IcmpOutAddrMaskReps
Description
The number of ICMP timestamp (request) messages.
The number of ICMP timestamp reply messages sent.
The number of ICMP address mask request messages sent.
The number of ICMP address mask reply messages sent.
Configure the IP Interface
You can update IP interface data for this switch.
To configure the IP interface:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IP > Advanced > IP Interface Configuration .
The page is shown in three parts.
Routing
301
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Port column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. Use Description to enter the description for the interface.
8. Use IP Address Configuration Method to enter the method by which an IP address is configured on the interface.
There are three methods: None , Manual , and DHCP . By default the method is None. Use the None method to reset the DHCP method.
Note: When the configuration method is changed from DHCP to None , there is a minor delay before the page refreshes.
9. Use IP Address to enter the IP address for the interface.
10. Use Subnet Mask to enter the subnet mask for the interface.
This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask, and defines the portion of the interface's IP address that is used to identify the attached network.
11. In the Routing Mode list, select Enable or Disable .
The default value is Enable.
12. Use Administrative Mode to enable or disable the administrative mode of the interface.
The default value is Enable. This mode is not supported for logical VLAN interfaces.
13. Use Forward Net Directed Broadcasts to select how network directed broadcast packets are handled.
If you select Enable, network directed broadcasts are forwarded.
If you select Disable, they are dropped. The default value is Disable.
14. Use Encapsulation Type to select the link layer encapsulation type for packets transmitted from the specified interface.
The possible values are Ethernet and SNAP . The default is Ethernet.
15. Use Proxy Arp to disable or enable proxy ARP for the specified interface.
16. Use Local Proxy Arp to disable or enable local proxy ARP for the specified interface.
Routing
302
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
17. Use Bandwidth (kbps) to specify the configured bandwidth on this interface.
This parameter communicates the speed of the interface to higher level protocols. OSPF uses bandwidth to compute link cost. The valid range is 1 to 10000000.
18. Use ICMP Destination Unreachables to specify the mode of sending ICMP destination unreachables on this interface.
If this is Disabled then this interface does not send ICMP destination unreachables. By default destination unreachables mode is enabled.
19. Use ICMP Redirects to enable or disable ICMP redirects mode.
The router sends an ICMP redirect on an interface only if redirects are enabled both globally and on the interface. By default ICMP redirects mode is enabled.
20. Use IP MTU to specify the maximum size of IP packets sent on an interface.
The valid range is 68 bytes to the link MTU. The default value is 0. A value of 0 indicates that the IP MTU is unconfigured. When the IP MTU is unconfigured, the router uses the link MTU as the IP MTU. The IP MTU is the maximum frame size minus the length of the
Layer 2 header.
21. To delete the IP address from the selected interface, click the Delete button.
22.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 108. IP Interface Configuration
Field
VLAN ID
OSPF Admin Mode
Link State
Routing Interface Status
Description
The VLAN ID for the interface.
Displays the OSPF admin mode of the interface. The default value is
Disable.
The state of the specified interface is either Active or Inactive. An interface is considered active if it the link is up and it is in forwarding state.
Indicates whether the link status is up or down.
Configure the Secondary IP Address
To configure the secondary IP address:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Routing
303
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IP > Advanced > Secondary IP .
6.
In the
Routing Interface list, select the interface.
7. In the Secondary IP Address field, add a secondary IP address to the selected interface.
8.
In the
Secondary IP Subnet Mask
field, enter the subnet mask associated with the secondary IP address.
This is also referred to as the subnet/network mask, and defines the portion of the interface’s IP address that is used to identify the attached network. This value is read-only once configured.
9. Click the Add button.
The secondary IP address for the selected interface is added.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 109. Secondary IP
Field
VLAN ID
Primary IP Address
Description
The VLAN ID associated with the displayed or configured interface.
The primary IP address for the interface.
Routing
304
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
IPv6
Configure IPv6 Global Settings
You can configure IPv6 routing parameters for the switch, as opposed to an interface.
To configure IPv6 global settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Basic > Global Configuration .
6. In the IPv6 Unicast Routing field, select the option to globally Enable or Disable IPv6 unicast routing.
7. In the Hop Limit field, enter a value for the unicast hop count used in IPv6 packets originated by the node.
The value is also included in router advertisements. The valid values for hops are 1 to
255, inclusive. The default is Not Configured, which means that a value of zero is sent in router advertisements.
8. In the ICMPv6 Rate Limit Error Interval field, specify the number of ICMP error packets allowed per burst interval.
This value controls the ICMPv6 error packets. The default rate limit is 100 packets per second, meaning that the burst interval is 1000 mseconds. To disable ICMP rate limiting, set this field to 0. The valid rate interval must be in the range 0 to 2147483647 mseconds.
9. In the ICMPv6 Rate Limit Burst Size field, specify the number of ICMP error packets allowed per burst interval.
Routing
305
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
This value controls the ICMP error packets. The default burst size is 100 packets. When the burst interval is 0, then configuring this field is not a valid operation. The valid burst size is 1 to 200.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View the IPv6 Route Table
To view the IPv6 Route Table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Basic > Route Table .
6. In the Routes Displayed list, select from the following:
• All Routes . Shows all active IPv6 routes.
• Best Routes Only . Shows only the best active routes.
• Configured Routes Only . Shows the routes configured by the user.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 110. IPv6 Route Table
Field
Number of Routes
IPv6 Prefix
Description
The total number of active routes in the route table.
The network prefix for the active route.
Routing
306
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 110. IPv6 Route Table
Field
Prefix Length
Protocol
Next Hop Interface
Next Hop IP Address
Preference
Description
The prefix length for the active route.
The type of protocol for the active route.
The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next hop would be a Null0 interface.
The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.
The route preference of the configured route.
Configure IPv6 Interface Settings
Configure IPv6 interface settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Interface Configuration .
Routing
307
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
All physical interfaces are valid.
7. Select Enable or Disable in the IPv6 Mode list.
When IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global address. In this case, an EUI-64 based link-local address is used. The default value is
Disable.
8. In the DHCPv6 Client Mode list, select to Enable or Disable DHCPv6 client mode on an interface.
At any point in time, only one interface can act as a client. The default value is Disable.
9. In the Stateless Address AutoConfig Mode list, select to Enable or Disable Stateless
Address AutoConfig mode on an interface.
The default value is Disable.
10. In the Routing Mode list, select to Enable or Disable the routing mode of an interface.
The default is Disable.
11. In the Admin Mode list, select to Enable or Disable IPv6 mode.
The default is Disable. When IPv6 mode is enabled, the interface is capable of IPv6 operation without a global address. In this case, an EUI-64 based link-local address is used.
12. In the MTU field, specify the maximum transmit unit on an interface.
If the value is 0, then this interface is not enabled for routing. It is not valid to set this value to 0 if routing is enabled. The MTU range 1280 to 1500. The default is 1500.
13. In the Duplicate Address Detection Transmits field, specify the number of duplicate address detection (DAD) transmits on an interface.
DAD transmits values must be in the range 0 to 600. The default is 1.
Routing
308
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
14. Specify the router advertisement Life Time Interval sent from the interface.
This value must be greater than or equal to the maximum advertisement interval. 0 means do not use the router as the default router. The range of router life time is 0 to
9000. The default is 1800.
15.
In the
Adv NS Interval
field, specify the retransmission time field of router advertisements sent from the interface.
A value of 0 means the interval is not specified for the router. The range of the neighbor solicit interval is 1000 to 4294967295. The default is 0.
16.
In the
Adv Reachable Interval
field, specify the router advertisement time.
This is the amount of time allocated to consider the neighbors reachable after ND confirmation. The range of reachable time is 0 to 3600000. The default is 0.
17.
Use the
Adv Interval
field to specify the maximum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface.
The range of the maximum advertisement interval is 4 to 1800. The default value is 600.
18. In the Adv Other Config Flag list, select Enable or Disable to specify the router advertisement other stateful configuration flag.
Default value of other config flag is Disable.
19.
In the
Adv Suppress Flag list, select to
Enable
or
Disable
router advertisement suppression on an interface.
The default value of the suppress flag is Disable.
20. In the Destination Unreachables list, select to Enable or Disable the mode of sending
ICMPv6 destination unreachables on this interface.
If disabled, then this interface does not send ICMPv6 destination unreachables. By default, the IPv6 destination unreachables mode is enabled.
21. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 111. IPv6 Advanced Interface Configuration
Field
Operational Mode
Link State
Description
Specifies the operational state of an interface. The default value is
Disable.
Indicates whether the link is up or down.
IPv6 Prefix Configuration
Configure IPv6 prefix configuration:
1.
Launch a web browser.
Routing
309
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Prefix Configuration .
6. From the Interface list, select the interface.
When the selection is changed, a page update occurs, causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port. All physical interfaces are valid.
7. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix for an interface.
8. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for an interface.
9. In the EUI64 list, select to Enable or Disable the specified 64-bit unicast prefix.
10. In the Valid Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.
This is the amount of time allowed to consider the prefix valid for the purpose of on-link determination. The valid life time is 0 to 4294967295.
11. In the Preferred Life Time field, specify the router advertisement per prefix time.
An autoconfigured address generated from this prefix is preferred. The preferred life time must be in the range 0 to 4294967295.
12. From the Onlink Flag list, select Enable or Disable .
This specifies whether the selected prefix can be used for on-link determination. The default is Enable.
13. In the Autonomous Flag list, select Enable or Disable.
This specifies whether the selected prefix can be used for autonomous address configuration. The default value is Enable.
14. Click the Add button.
The IPv6 address is added to the interface.
Routing
310
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
15. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The
Current State
field displays the state of the IPV6 address. The state is TENT if routing is disabled or DAD fails. The state is Active if the interface is active and DAD is successful.
View IPv6 Statistics
To view IPv6 interface statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Statistics
.
Routing
311
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. From the Interface list, select the interface.
When the selection is changed, a page refresh occurs, causing all fields to be updated for the newly selected port.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 112. IPv6 Advanced Interface Statistics
Field Description
Total Datagrams Received
Received Datagrams Locally
Delivered
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To Header Errors
The total number of input datagrams received by the interface, including those received in error.
The total number of datagrams successfully delivered to IPv6 user-protocols (including ICMP). This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.
The number of input datagrams discarded due to errors in their IPv6 headers, including version number mismatch, other format errors, hop count exceeded, errors discovered in processing their IPv6 options, and so on
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To MTU
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To No Route
The number of input datagrams that could not be forwarded because their size exceeded the link MTU of outgoing interface.
The number of input datagrams discarded because no route could be found to transmit them to their destination
Received Datagrams With Unknown
Protocol
The number of locally-addressed datagrams received successfully but discarded because of an unknown or unsupported protocol. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the datagrams.
Received Datagrams Discarded
Due To Invalid Address
Received Datagrams Discarded Dut
To Truncated Data
The number of input datagrams discarded because datagram frame didn't carry enough data.
Received Datagrams Discarded
Other
The number of input datagrams discarded because the IPv6 address in their IPv6 header's destination field was not a valid address to be received at this entity. This count includes invalid addresses (for example, ::0) and unsupported addresses (such as addresses with unallocated prefixes).For entities that are not IPv6 routers and therefore do not forward datagrams, this counter includes datagrams discarded because the destination address was not a local address.
Received Datagrams Reassembly
Required
The number of input IPv6 datagrams for which no problems were encountered to prevent their continued processing, but that were discarded for reasons such as lack of buffer space. This counter does not include any datagrams discarded while awaiting re-assembly.
The number of IPv6 fragments received that needed to be reassembled at this interface. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the fragments.
Routing
312
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 112. IPv6 Advanced Interface Statistics (continued)
Field
Datagrams Successfully
Reassembled
Datagrams Failed To Reassemble The number of failures detected by the IPv6 reassembly algorithm (for whatever reason: timed out, errors, and so on). This is not necessarily a count of discarded IPv6 fragments since some algorithms (notably the algorithm in RFC 815) can lose track of the number of fragments by combining them as they are received. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these fragments were addressed, which might not be the input interface for some of the fragments.
Datagrams Forwarded The number of output datagrams that this entity received and forwarded to their final destinations. In entities that do not act as IPv6 routers, this counter includes only those packets that were source-routed through this entity, and the source-route processing was successful. For a successfully forwarded datagram the counter of the outgoing interface is incremented.
Datagrams Locally Transmitted
Description
The number of IPv6 datagrams successfully reassembled. This counter is incremented at the interface to which these datagrams were addressed, which might not be necessarily the input interface for some of the fragments.
Datagrams Transmit Failed
Datagrams Successfully
Fragmented
Datagrams Failed To Fragment
The number of datagrams that this entity successfully transmitted from this output interface.
The number of datagrams that this entity failed to transmit successfully.
The number of IPv6 datagrams that were fragmented at this output interface.
The number of output datagrams that could not be fragmented at this interface.
Datagrams Fragments Created
Multicast Datagrams Received
Multicast Datagrams Transmitted
The number of output datagram fragments that were generated as a result of fragmentation at this output interface.
The number of multicast packets received by the interface.
The number of multicast packets transmitted by the interface.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 113. ICMPv6 Statistics
Field
ICMPv6 Messages With Errors
Received
Description
Total ICMPv6 Messages Received The total number of ICMP messages received by the interface, which includes all those counted by IPv6IfIcmpInErrors. This interface is the interface to which the ICMP messages were addressed, which might not be the input interface for the messages.
The number of ICMP messages that the interface received but determined as having ICMP-specific errors (bad ICMP checksums, bad length, and so on).
ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable
Messages Received
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages received by the interface.
Routing
313
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 113. ICMPv6 Statistics (continued)
Field Description
ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited
Administratively Received
The number of ICMP destination unreachable/communication administratively prohibited messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Parameter Problem
Messages Received
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages received by the interface.
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages
Received
ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages
Received
ICMPv6 Router Advertisement
Messages Received
The number of ICMP Router Solicit messages received by the interface.
The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicit messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement
Messages Received
ICMPv6 Redirect Messages
Received
The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages received by the interface.
The number of ICMPv6 Redirect messaged received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Group Membership Query
Messages Received
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages received by the interface.
ICMPv6 Group Membership
Response Messages Received
ICMPv6 Group Membership
Reduction Messages Received
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages received by the interface.
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages received by the interface.
Total ICMPv6 Messages
Transmitted
The total number of ICMP messages that this interface attempted to send.
This counter includes all those counted by icmpOutErrors.
ICMPv6 Messages Not Transmitted
Due To Error
The number of ICMP messages that this interface did not send due to problems discovered within ICMP such as a lack of buffers. This value does not include errors discovered outside the ICMP layer such as the inability of IPv6 to route the resultant datagram. In some implementations there might be no types of error that contribute to this counter's value.
ICMPv6 Destination Unreachable
Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMP Destination Unreachable messages sent by the interface.
Routing
314
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 113. ICMPv6 Statistics (continued)
Field
ICMPv6 Messages Prohibited
Administratively Transmitted
Description
Number of ICMP Destination Unreachable/Communication
Administratively Prohibited messages sent.
ICMPv6 Time Exceeded Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Time Exceeded messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Parameter Problem
Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMP Parameter Problem messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Packet Too Big Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Packet Too Big messages sent by the interface.
The number of ICMP Echo (request) messages sent by the interface. ICMPv6 Echo Request Messages
Transmitted
ICMPv6 Echo Reply Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Echo Reply messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Router Solicit Messages
Transmitted
ICMPv6 Router Advertisement
Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface.
The number of ICMP Router Advertisement messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Neighbor Solicit Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Neighbor Solicitation messages sent by the interface.
ICMPv6 Neighbor Advertisement
Messages Transmitted
ICMPv6 Redirect Messages
Transmitted
The number of ICMP Neighbor Advertisement messages sent by the interface.
The number of Redirect messages sent.
ICMPv6 Group Membership Query
Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Query messages sent.
ICMPv6 Group Membership
Response Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Response messages sent.
ICMPv6 Group Membership
Reduction Messages Transmitted
The number of ICMPv6 Group Membership Reduction messages sent.
ICMPv6 Duplicate Address Detects The number of duplicate addresses detected by the interface.
View the IPv6 Neighbor Table and Clear IPv6 Neighbors
To view the IPv6 neighbor table and clear IPv6 neighbors:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Routing
315
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Neighbor Table .
6. Use the Search By field to search for IPv6 routes by IPv6 Address or Interface .
• To search by IPv6 address, select IPv6 Address from the Search By list. Enter the
128-byte hexadecimal IPv6 address in four-digit groups separated by colons, for example, 2001:231F:::1. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, that entry is displayed. An exact match is required.
• To search by Interface, select Interface from the Search By list, enter the interface
ID in unit/slot/port format, for example, 2/1/1. Then click the Go button. If the address exists, that entry is displayed.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
8. To clear the IPv6 neighbors on a selected interface or on all interfaces, click the Clear button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 114. IPv6 Advanced Neighbor Table
Field
Interface
IPv6 Address
MAC Address isRtr
Description
The interface whose settings are displayed in the current table row.
The IPv6 address of the neighbor or interface.
Specifies MAC address associated with an interface.
Indicates whether the neighbor is a router. If the neighbor is a router, the value is
True
. If the neighbor is not a router, the value is
False
.
Routing
316
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 114. IPv6 Advanced Neighbor Table (continued)
Field
Neighbor State
Last Updated
Description
The state of the neighbor cache entry. Following are the states for dynamic entries in the IPv6 neighbor discovery cache:
• Incmp
. Address resolution is being performed on the entry.A neighbor solicitation message was sent to the solicited-node multicast address of the target, but the corresponding neighbor advertisement message has not yet been received.
• Reach
. Positive confirmation was received within the last Reachable
Time milliseconds that the forward path to the neighbor was functioning properly. While in REACH state, the device takes no special action as packets are sent.
• Stale
. More than ReachableTime milliseconds elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly. While in STALE state, the device takes no action until a packet is sent.
• Delay
. More than ReachableTime milliseconds elapsed since the last positive confirmation was received that the forward path was functioning properly. A packet was sent within the last
DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds. If no reachability confirmation is received within DELAY_FIRST_PROBE_TIME seconds of entering the DELAY state, send a neighbor solicitation message and change the state to PROBE.
• Probe . A reachability confirmation is actively sought by resending neighbor solicitation messages every RetransTimer milliseconds until a reachability confirmation is received.
Time since the address was confirmed to be reachable.
IPv6 Static Route Configuration
Configure an IPv6 static route:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Static Route Configuration .
Routing
317
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the IPv6 Prefix field, specify the IPv6 prefix for the configured route.
7. In the Prefix Length field, specify the IPv6 prefix length for the configured route.
8. In the Next Hop IPv6 Address Type list, select one of the following options:
• Global IPv6 Address.
• Link-Local IPv6 address. If the next hop IPv6 address specified is a link-local IPv6 address, then specify the interface for the link-local IPv6 next hop address.
• Static-Reject . Select Static-Reject to create a static-reject route for a destination prefix. No next hop address is specified in that case.
9. Enter the Next Hop IPv6 Address for the configured route.
10. Select from the Interface list to specify in unit/slot/port format, the link-local IPv6 next hop address.
This field is enabled only if Link-Local is selected.
11. Specify the route Preference of the configured route.
12. Click the Add button.
The route is added.
View the IPv6 Route Table
To view the IPv6 route table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Route Table .
Routing
318
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
In the
Routes Displayed field, select which routes to display from the following list:
• All Routes
. Show all active IPv6 routes.
• Best Routes Only . Show only the best active routes.
• Configured Routes Only
. Show the routes configured by the user.
7.
To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the
Update
button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 115. IPv6 Advanced Route Table
Field
Number of Routes
IPv6 Prefix
Prefix Length
Protocol
Next Hop Interface
Next Hop IP Address
Preference
Description
The total number of active routes in the route table.
The network prefix for the active route.
The prefix length for the active route.
The type of protocol for the active route.
The interface over which the route is active. For a reject route, the next hop would be a
Null0
interface.
The next hop IPv6 address for the active route.
The route preference of the configured route.
IPv6 Route Preferences
Use this page to configure the default preference for each protocol. These values are arbitrary values in the range of 1 to 255 and are independent of route metrics. Most routing protocols use a route metric to determine the shortest path known to the protocol, independent of any other protocol. The best route to a destination is chosen by selecting the route with the lowest preference value. When there are multiple routes to a destination, the preference values are used to determine the preferred route. If there is still a tie, the route with the best route metric is chosen. To avoid problems with mismatched metrics you must configure different preference values for each of the protocols.
Routing
319
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the IPv6 route preferences:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Route Preference .
6. In the Static field, specify the static route preference value for the router.
The range is 1 to 255. The default value is 1.
7. In the OSPFv3 Intra field, specify the OSPFv3 intra route preference value in the router.
The range is 1 to 255. The default value is 110.
8. In the OSPFv3 Inter field, specify the OSPFv3 inter route preference value in the router.
The range is 1 to 255. The default value is 110.
9. In the OSPFv3 External field, specify the OSPFv3 external route preference value in the router.
The range is 1 to 255. The default value is 110.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The
Local field displays the local preference.
Routing
320
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure IPv6 Tunnels
You can create, configure, and delete tunnels.
To configure an IPv6 tunnel:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 > Advanced > Tunnel Configuration .
6. In the Tunnel ID field, select from the list of available tunnel IDs.
7. In the Mode list, select a supported mode:
• 6-in-4-configured
• 6-to-4
8. Select the IPv6 Mode from the list.
9. Enable IPv6 on this interface using the IPv6 address.
This option is configurable only until you specify an explicit IPv6 address.
10. From the IPv6 Unreachables list, select to Enable or Disable .
This specifies the mode of sending ICMPv6 Destination Unreachables on this interface. If you select Disable, then this interface does not send ICMPv6 destination unreachables.
By default IPv6 destination unreachables mode is enabled.
11. In the IPv6 Address/Prefix Length field, enter a configured IPv6 address for the selected interface.
The address must be entered in the format prefix/length.
12. From the EUI64 list, select to Enable or Disable the 64-bit extended unique identifier
(EUI-64).
For 6to4 tunnels, configure the IPv6 address with first 48-bits in the format
2002:tunnel-source-IPv4-address::/48.
13. Specify the desired Source Address for this tunnel.
Routing
321
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
This value must be entered in dotted-decimal notation.
14. Select the Source Interface for this tunnel.
The address associated with the selected interface is used as the source address.
15. Enter the Destination Address for this tunnel in dotted-decimal notation.
16. Click the Add button.
The tunnel is added.
17. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The Interface Link Status field indicates whether the tunnel interface is up or down.
VLAN Overview
You can configure the switch software so that some ports support VLANs and other ports support routing. You can also configure the software to allow traffic on a VLAN to be treated as if the VLAN were a router port.
When a port is enabled for bridging (default) rather than routing, all normal bridge processing is performed for an inbound packet, which is then associated with a VLAN. Its MAC destination address (MAC DA) and VLAN ID are used to search the MAC address table. If routing is enabled for the VLAN, and the MAC DA of an inbound unicast packet is that of the internal bridge-router interface, the packet is routed. An inbound multicast packet is forwarded to all ports in the VLAN, plus the internal bridge-router interface, if it was received on a routed VLAN.
Since a port can be configured to belong to more than one VLAN, VLAN routing might be enabled for all of the VLANs on the port, or for a subset. VLAN routing can be used to allow more than one physical port to reside on the same subnet. It could also be used when a
VLAN spans multiple physical networks, or when additional segmentation or security is required. This section shows how to configure the NETGEAR switch to support VLAN routing. A port can be either a VLAN port or a router port, but not both. However, a VLAN port can be part of a VLAN that is a router port.
Use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard
The VLAN Static Routing Wizard creates a VLAN, adds selected ports to the VLAN. The
VLAN Static Routing Wizard gives you the option to add the selected ports as a link aggregation (LAG). The Wizard does the following:
• Creates a VLAN and generates a unique name for VLAN.
• Adds selected ports to the newly created VLAN and removes selected ports from the default VLAN.
• Creates a LAG, add selected ports to a LAG, then adds a LAG to the newly created
VLAN.
Routing
322
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Enables tagging on selected ports if the port is in another VLAN. Disables tagging if a selected port does NOT exist in another VLAN.
• Excludes ports NOT selected from the VLAN.
•
Enables routing on the VLAN using the IP address and subnet mask entered.
To use the VLAN Static Routing Wizard:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> VLAN > VLAN Static Routing Wizard
.
6. Use VLAN ID to specify the VLAN identifier (VID) associated with this VLAN.
The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4093.
7. Use Ports to display selectable physical ports and LAGs (if any).
Selected ports are added to the routing VLAN. Each port has three modes:
• T (Tagged) . Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are tagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.
• U (Untagged) . Select the ports on which all frames transmitted for this VLAN are untagged. The ports that are selected are included in the VLAN.
• BLANK(Autodetect) . Select the ports that can be dynamically registered in this VLAN through GVRP. This selection has the effect of excluding a port from the selected
VLAN.
8. Use the LAG Enabled option to add selected ports to VLAN as a LAG.
Routing
323
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default is No.
9. Use IP Address to define the IP address of the VLAN interface.
10. Use Network Mask to define the subnet mask of the VLAN interface.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure VLAN Routing
To configure VLAN routing:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> VLAN > VLAN Routing .
6. Select the VLAN ID .
This field displays the IDs of all the VLANs configured on this switch.
7. Use IP Address to enter the IP address to be configured for the VLAN routing interface.
8. Use Subnet Mask to enter the subnet mask to be configured for the VLAN routing interface.
9. Click the Add button.
The VLAN routing interface is added for the selected VLAN ID.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 116. VLAN Routing Configuration
Field
Port
MAC Address
Description
The interface assigned to the VLAN for routing.
The MAC Address assigned to the VLAN routing interface
Routing
324
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Address Resolution Protocol
The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) associates a Layer 2 MAC address with a Layer 3
IPv4 address. The switch software features both dynamic and manual ARP configuration.
With manual ARP configuration, you can statically add entries into the ARP table.
ARP is a necessary part of the Internet Protocol (IP) and is used to translate an IP address to a media (MAC) address, defined by a local area network (LAN) such as Ethernet. A station needing to send an IP packet must learn the MAC address of the IP destination, or of the next hop router, if the destination is not on the same subnet. This is achieved by broadcasting an ARP request packet, to which the intended recipient responds by unicasting an ARP reply containing its MAC address. Once learned, the MAC address is used in the destination address field of the Layer 2 header prepended to the IP packet.
The ARP cache is a table maintained locally in each station on a network. ARP cache entries are learned by examining the source information in the ARP packet payload fields, regardless of whether it is an ARP request or response. Thus, when an ARP request is broadcast to all stations on a LAN segment or virtual LAN (VLAN), each recipient has the opportunity to store the sender’s IP and MAC address in its respective ARP cache. The ARP response, being unicast, is normally seen only by the requestor, who stores the sender information in its ARP cache. Newer information always replaces existing content in the ARP cache.
The number of supported ARP entries is platform dependent.
Devices can be moved in a network, which means that the IP address that was at one time associated with a certain MAC address is now found using a different MAC, or it disappeared from the network altogether (for example, it was reconfigured, disconnected, or powered off).
This leads to stale information in the ARP cache unless entries are updated in reaction to new information seen on the network, periodically refreshed to determine if an address still exists, or removed from the cache if the entry was identified as a sender of an ARP packet during the course of an ageout interval, usually specified through configuration.
Display the ARP Entries in the ARP Cache
Use this page to display ARP entries in the ARP cache. The table lists the remote connections most recently seen by this switch.
To display ARP entries in the ARP cache:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
Routing
325
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> ARP > Basic > ARP Cache .
The page displays the following information:
• IP Address.
Displays the IP address associated with the system’s MAC address. This address must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's existing routing interfaces.
• Port .
Displays the associated unit/slot/port of the connection.
• MAC Address . Displays the unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six
2-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example, 00:06:29:32:81:40.
The pagination navigation menu functions as follows:
Rows per page . Select how many table entries are displayed per page. Possible values are 20, 50, 100, 200, and All. If you select All, the browser might be slow to display the information.
< . Display the previous page of the table data entries.
> . Display the next page of the table data entries.
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Add an Entry to the ARP Table
You can add an entry to the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table.
To add an entry to the ARP table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Routing
326
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Routing
> ARP > Advanced > ARP Create .
6.
Use
IP Address
to enter the IP address to add.
It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's existing routing interfaces.
7.
Use
MAC Address
to specify the unicast MAC address of the device.
Enter the address as six 2-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example,
00:06:29:32:81:40.
8.
Click the
Add
button.
The static ARP entry is added to the switch.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The pagination navigation menu functions as follows:
Rows per page
. Select how many table entries are displayed per page. Possible values are 20, 50, 100, 200, and All. If you select All, the browser might be slow to display the information.
< . Display the previous page of the table data entries.
>
. Display the next page of the table data entries.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 117. ARP Cache
Field
IP Address
Port
MAC Address
Description
The IP address. It must be the IP address of a device on a subnet attached to one of the switch's existing routing interfaces.
The associated unit/slot/port of the connection.
The unicast MAC address of the device. The address is six two-digit hexadecimal numbers separated by colons, for example
00:06:29:32:81:40.
Routing
327
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 117. ARP Cache (continued)
Field
Type
Age
Description
The type of ARP entry. Possible values are as follows:
• Local
. An ARP entry associated with one of the switch’s routing interface’s MAC addresses.
• Gateway
. A dynamic ARP entry whose IP address is that of a router.
• Static
. An ARP entry configured by the user.
• Dynamic . An ARP entry that was learned by the router.
Age since the entry was last refreshed in the ARP table (in seconds).
View or Configure the ARP Table
You can change the configuration parameters for the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) table. You can also use this page to display the contents of the table.
To configure the ARP table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> ARP > Advanced > ARP Table Configuration .
Routing
328
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use Age Time to enter the amount of time, in seconds, that a dynamic ARP entry remains in the ARP table before aging out.
The range is 15 to 21600 seconds. The default value for Age Time is 1200 seconds.
7.
Use
Response Time
to enter the amount of time, in seconds that the device waits for an
ARP response to an ARP request that it sends.
The range for this field is 1 to 10 seconds. The default value is 1 second.
8. Use Retries to enter the maximum number of times an ARP request will be retried after an
ARP response is not received.
The number includes the initial ARP request. The range for this field is 0 to 10. The default value for Retries is 4.
9. Use Cache Size to specify the maximum number of entries allowed in the ARP table.
This number includes all static and dynamic ARP entries.The range for this field is 256 to
1536. The default value for Cache Size is 1536.
10. When selected, the Dynamic Renew option allows the ARP component to automatically attempt to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.
The default setting is Enable.
11.
Use
Remove from Table
to remove certain entries from the ARP table.
The choices listed specify the type of ARP entry to be deleted:
• All Dynamic Entries
• All Dynamic and Gateway Entries
• Specific Dynamic/Gateway Entry . Selecting this allows the user to specify the required IP address.
• Specific Static Entry . Selecting this allows the user to specify the required IP address.
• None . Selected if the user does not want to delete any entry from the ARP Table.
• Remove IP Address
. This field displays only if you select
Specific
Dynamic/Gateway Entry or Specific Static Entry in the Remove from Table list.
The
Remove IP Address
field allows you to enter the IP address against the entry that is to be removed from the ARP table.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 118. ARP Table Configuration
Field
Total Entry Count
Peak Total Entries
Description
Total number of entries in the ARP table.
Highest value reached by Total Entry Count. This counter value is restarted whenever the ARP table Cache Size value is changed.
Routing
329
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 118. ARP Table Configuration
Field
Active Static Entries
Configured Static Entries
Maximum Static Entries
Description
Total number of active static entries in the ARP table.
Total number of configured static entries in the ARP table.
Maximum number of static entries that can be defined.
Configure RIP
Enable RIP
To enable RIP:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > RIP > Basic > RIP Configuration .
6.
In the
RIP Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.
If you select Enable , RIP is activated for the switch. The default is Enable.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure RIP Settings
To configure advanced RIP settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Routing
330
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > RIP > Advanced > RIP Configuration
.
6. Select the RIP Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.
If you select Enable , RIP is activated for the switch. By default, RIP is enabled.
7. Select a Split Horizon Mode radio button:
• None . No special processing for this case.
• Simple . A route is not included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned. The default is Simple.
• Poison Reverse . A route is included in updates sent to the router from which it was learned, but the metric is set to infinity.
Split horizon is a technique for avoiding problems caused by including routes in updates sent to the router from which the route was originally learned
8. In the Auto Summary Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.
If you select Enable , groups of adjacent routes are summarized into single entries reduce the total number of entries. The default is Disable.
9. In the Host Routes Accept Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.
If you select Enable, the router accepts host routes. The default is Enable.
10. In the Default Information Originate field, select to Enable or Disable default route advertisement.
11. In the Default Metric field, specify a default value for the metric of redistributed routes.
Routing
331
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
This field displays the default metric if one has already been set, or 0 if one was not configured earlier. The valid values are 1 to 15.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 119. RIP Advanced Configuration
Field
Global Route Changes
Global Queries
Description
The number of route changes made to the IP route database by RIP.
This does not include the refresh of a route's age.
The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems.
Configure Advanced RIP Interface Settings
To configure advanced RIP interface settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > RIP > Advanced > Interface Configuration .
Routing
332
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. From the Send Version list, select the version of RIP control packets that the interface will send.
The value is one of the following:
• None . No RIP control packets are sent.
• RIP-1 . Send RIP version 1 formatted packets through broadcast.
• RIP-1c . RIP version 1–compatibility mode. Send RIP version 2–formatted packets through broadcast.
• RIP-2 . Send RIP version 2 packets using multicast. The default is RIP-2.
8. From the Receive Version list, select which RIP control packets the interface accepts.
The value is one of the following:
• RIP-1 . Accept only RIP version 1–formatted packets.
• RIP-2 . Accept only RIP version 2–formatted packets.
• Both . Accept packets in either format. The default is Both.
• None . No RIP control packets are accepted.
9. Select Enable or Disable from the RIP Mode list.
Before you enable RIP version 1 or version 1c on an interface, you must first enable network directed broadcast mode on the corresponding interface. The default value is
Disable.
10. Select the Authentication Type from the list.
The types are as follows:
• None . This is the initial interface state. If you select this option, no authentication protocols are run.
• Simple . If you select Simple , you are prompted to enter an authentication key. This key is included, in the clear, in the RIP header of all packets sent on the network. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key.
Routing
333
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Encrypt . If you select Encrypt , you are prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID. Encryption uses the MD5 Message-Digest algorithm. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID.
11. Enter the RIP Authentication Key for the specified interface.
If you selected Authentication Type None , you are not prompted to enter a key. If you selected Simple or Encrypt , the key can be up to 16 octets long. The key value is displayed only if you are logged on with read/write privileges.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 120. RIP Advanced Interface Configuration
Field
Bad Packets Received
Bad Routes Received
Updates Sent
IP Address
Link State
Description
The number of RIP response packets received by the RIP process that were subsequently discarded for any reason.
The number of routes in valid RIP packets that were ignored for any reason (for example, unknown address family, or invalid metric).
The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface.
This explicitly does not include full updates sent containing new information.
The IP address of the router interface.
Indicates whether the RIP interface is up or down.
Route Redistribution
Use this page to configure the RIP route redistribution parameters. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.
To configure advanced RIP route redistribution settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > RIP > Advanced > Route Redistribution .
Routing
334
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The Source list is populated by only those source routes that are already configured for redistribution by RIP. This allows you to configure another source route among the available source routes.
6. In the Source list, select a value.
The valid values are as follows:
• Connected
• Static
• OSPF
7. From the Redistribute Mode list, select to Enable or Disable RIP redistribute mode.
The default is Disable.
8. Enter the Metric of redistributed routes for the given source route.
The valid values are is 0 to 15; 0 means unconfigure.
9. Use the Distribute List field to set the access list that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol.
Only permitted routes are redistributed. If this command refers to a non-existent access list, all routes are permitted. The valid values for Access List IDs are 0 to 199. When used for route filtering, the only fields in an access list that get used are as follows:
• Source IP address and netmask
• Destination IP address and netmask
• Action (permit or deny)
All other fields (such as Source and Destination Port, Precedence, Tos, and so on) are ignored.
The source IP address is compared to the destination IP address of the route. The source
IP netmask in the access list rule is treated as a wildcard mask, indicating which bits in the source IP address must match the destination address of the route.
Note: A 1 in the mask indicates a
do not care
in the corresponding address bit.
When an access list rule includes a destination IP address and netmask (an extended access list), the destination IP address is compared to the network mask of the
Routing
335
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual destination of the route. The destination netmask in the access list serves as a wildcard mask, indicating which bits in the route's destination mask are significant for the filtering operation.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the RIP Route Redistribution nonconfigurable data that is displayed.
Table 121. RIP Route Redistribution Summary
Field
Source Protocol
Redistribute Mode
Metric
Distribute List
Description
The source route to be redistributed by RIP. The valid values are as follows:
•
Connected
• Static
•
OSPF
The route redistribution mode for a particular source protocol. By default this is disabled.
The metric of redistributed routes for the given source route. The field displays 0 when the metric is not configured.
The access list that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol. The field displays 0 when not configured.
The following list of redistributed routes is valid when OSPF is selected as source. The list can include one or more of:
Match Internal
Match External Type 1
Sets internal OSPF routes to be redistributed.
Sets external type 1 OSPF routes to be redistributed.
Match External Type 2
Match NSSA External Type 1
Match NSSA External Type 2
Sets external type 2 OSPF routes to be redistributed.
Sets NSSA external type 1 OSPF routes to be redistributed.
Sets NSSA external type 2 OSPF routes to be redistributed.
Routing
336
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Router Discovery
To configure router discovery:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> Router Discovery > Router Discovery Configuration
.
6.
Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
•
In the
Go To Interface
field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
•
Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. Use Advertise Mode to select Enable or Disable .
If you select
Enable
, router advertisements are transmitted from the selected interface.
8.
Use
Advertise Address
to select
Enable
or
Disable
.
If you select Enable , router advertisements are transmitted from the selected interface.
9. Use Maximum Advertise Interval to enter the maximum time (in seconds) allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface.
10.
Use
Minimum Advertise Interval to enter the minimum time (in seconds) allowed between router advertisements sent from the interface.
The value must be in the range of 3 to 1800. The default value is 450.000000.
11. Use Advertise Lifetime to enter the value (in seconds) to be used as the lifetime field in router advertisements sent from the interface.
This is the maximum length of time that the advertised addresses are to be considered as valid router addresses by hosts.
Routing
337
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
12. Use Preference Level to specify the preference level of the router as a default router relative to other routers on the same subnet.
Higher numbered addresses are preferred. You must enter an integer.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol
Configure Global VRRP Settings
To configure the global VRRP settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > VRRP > Basic > VRRP Configuration .
6. In the Global Configuration Admin Mode field, set the administrative status of VRRP in the router by selecting the Enable or Disable radio button.
By default, VRRP is disabled.
7. Select the VRID.
The VRID field is configurable only if you are creating a new virtual router.
The valid values are 1 to 255.
8. Select the unit/slot/port for the new virtual router from the Interface menu.
9. In the Primary IP Address field, enter the primary IP address of the virtual router.
Routing
338
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
10. From the Mode menu, select the Active or Inactive mode for the new virtual router.
11.
Click the
Add
button.
The virtual router is added to the switch configuration.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 122. VRRP Global Configuration
Field
Interface IP Address
State
Description
Indicates the IP address associated with the selected interface.
The current state of the virtual router. Possible values are as follows:
• Initialize
•
Master
• Backup
Configure Advanced VRRP Settings
To configure the advanced VRRP global settings.
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > VRRP > Advanced > VRRP Configuration .
Routing
339
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Global Configuration Admin Mode field, set the administrative status of VRRP in the router by selecting the Enable or Disable radio button.
By default, VRRP is disabled.
7. Select the VRID.
The VRID field is configurable only if you are creating a new virtual router.
The valid values are 1 to 255.
8. Select the unit/slot/port for the new virtual router from the Interface menu.
9. In the Pre-empt Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.
If you select Enable , a backup router preempts the master router if it has a priority greater than the master virtual router's priority, provided the master is not the owner of the virtual router IP address. The default is Enable.
10. In the Accept Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option.
If you select Enable , the VRRP master accepts all types of data packets addressed to IP addresses associated with the virtual router. If you select Disable , the VRRP master discards all types of data packets addressed to IP addresses associated with the virtual router, if it is not the IP address owner. The default is Disable.
11. In the Configured Priority field, enter the to be used by the VRRP router in the election for the master virtual router.
The valid values are 1 to 254. If the virtual IP address is the same as the interface IP address, the priority gets set to 254, no matter what you enter.
12. In the Advertisement Interval field, enter the time, in seconds, between the transmission of advertisement packets by this virtual router.
Enter a number from 1 to 255. The default value is 1 second.
13. In the Primary IP Address field, enter the IP address that is associated with the virtual router.
The default is 0.0.0.0.
14. From the Authentication Type menu, select the type of authentication for the virtual router.
The options are as follows:
• 0-None . No authentication is performed. The default is None.
• 1-Simple . Authentication is performed using a text password.
Routing
340
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
15. From the Status menu, select the Active or Inactive option to start or stop the operation of the virtual router.
The default is inactive.
16.
Click the
Add
button.
The virtual router is added to the switch configuration.
17. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 123. Advanced VRRP Global Configuration
Field
Operational Priority
Interface IP Address
Owner
VMAC Address
State
Description
Indicates the priority to be used for the virtual router master election process. Higher values imply higher priority.
•
A priority of 0 is sent by the master router to indicate that this router has ceased to participate in VRRP and a backup virtual router transitions to become a new master.
• A priority of 255 is used for the router that owns the associated IP addresses.
Indicates the IP address associated with the selected interface.
Set to
True
if the virtual IP address and the interface IP address are the same, otherwise set to False . If this parameter is set to True, the virtual router is the owner of the virtual IP address, and always wins an election for master router when it is active.
The virtual MAC address associated with the virtual router, composed of a 24-bit organizationally unique identifier, the 16-bit constant identifying the VRRP address block and the 8-bit VRID.
The current state of the virtual router. Possible values are as follows:
•
Initialize
• Master
•
Backup
Configure an Advanced VRRP Secondary IP Address
To configure the advanced VRRP secondary IP address settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Routing
341
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > VRRP > Advanced > VRRP Secondary IP Address Configuration .
6. From the VRRP Interface and VRRP ID menus, select a virtual router.
The virtual routers are listed by interface number and VRRP ID.
7. In the Secondary IP Address field, enter the IP address for the interface.
This address must be a member of one of the subnets currently configured on the interface. This value is read-only once configured.
8. Click the Add button.
The secondary IP address is added to the selected VRRP interface.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The Primary IP Address field displays the primary IP address of the virtual router.
Configure an Advanced VRRP Tracking Interface
To configure an advanced VRRP tracking interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Routing
342
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Routing > VRRP > Advanced > VRRP Tracking Configuration .
6.
From the
VRRP Interface
and
VRRP ID
menus, select a virtual router.
The virtual routers are listed by interface number and VRRP ID.
7. From the Tracked Interface menu, select a routing interface.
The menu lists all routing interfaces that are not yet tracked for the VRRP ID and interface configuration. The menu does not list the loopback interfaces and tunnels that could not be tracked.
8.
In the
Priority Decrement
field, enter priority decrement value the for the tracked interface.
The valid range is 1 to 254. The default value is 10.
The nonconfigurable Tracked Interface State field displays the state of the tracked interface.
9. In the Tracked Route Prefix field, enter the prefix of the route.
10. In the Tracked Route Prefix Length field, enter the prefix length of the route.
11. In the Priority Decrement field, enter priority decrement value the for the route.
The valid range is 1 to 254. The default value is 10.
The nonconfigurable Reachable field displays the reachability of the tracked route.
12. Click the Add button.
The traced interface or tracked route is added to the VRRP.
13. Click the Apply button.
Routing
343
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 124. Advanced VRRP Tracking Configuration
Field
Tracked Interface State
Reachable
Description
The state of the tracked interface.
The reachability of the tracked route.
View Advanced VRRP Statistics
To view advanced VRRP statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > VRRP > Advanced > VRRP Statistics .
6.
To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the
Update
button.
Routing
344
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 125. Advanced VRRP Statistics
Description Field
Global Statistics
Router Checksum Errors
Router Version Errors
Router VRID Errors
The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP checksum value.
The total number of VRRP packets received with an unknown or unsupported version number.
The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRID for this virtual router.
Statistics
VRRP ID
Interface
Up Time
State Transitioned to Master
Advertisement Received
Advertisement Interval Errors
Authentication Failure
IP TTL Errors
Zero Priority Packets Received
Zero Priority Packets Sent
Invalid Type Packets Received
Address List Errors
Invalid Authentication Type
Authentication Type Mismatch
Packet Length Errors
The VRID for the selected virtual router.
The unit/slot/port for the selected virtual router.
The time, in days, hours, minutes and seconds, that elapsed since the virtual router transitioned to the initialized state.
The total number of times that this virtual router's state transitioned to
Master.
The total number of VRRP advertisements received by this virtual router.
The total number of VRRP advertisement packets received for which the advertisement interval was different from the one configured for the local virtual router.
The total number of VRRP packets received that did not pass the authentication check.
The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with IP
Time-To-Live (TTL) not equal to 255.
The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with a priority of 0.
The total number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router with a priority of 0.
The number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with an invalid value in the Type field.
The total number of packets received for which the address list does not match the locally configured list for the virtual router.
The total number of packets received with an unknown authentication type.
The total number of packets received with an authentication type different from the locally configured authentication method.
The total number of packets received with a packet length less than the length of the VRRP header.
Routing
345
6.
OSPF and OSPFv3
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Configure OSPF
•
Configure OSPFv3
6
346
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure OSPF
Configure Basic OSPF Settings
To configure basic OSPF settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > OSPF > Basic > OSPF Configuration
.
6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.
If you select Enable, OSPF is activated for the switch. By default, OSPF is enabled. You must configure a router ID before OSPF can become operational. Use the IP
Configuration page to configure a router ID or issue the
config router id
CLI
command. For more information, see
Configure the Routing IP Settings
The Router ID displays the 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS).
To change the router ID, you must first disable OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
OSPF and OSPFv3
347
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the OSPF Default Route Advertise Settings
To configure default route advertise settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > OSPF Configuration .
OSPF and OSPFv3
348
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Default Information Originate field, select the Enable or Disable option.
If you select Enable, OSPF originates an external LSA advertising a default route
(0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0). Default Information Originate is disabled by default.
7. In the Always field, select True or False .
If
Default Information Originate
is enabled, but the
Always
option is False, OSPF originates a default route only if a default route is already in the router’s routing table.
Set Always to True to force OSPF to originate a default route regardless of whether a default route already exists. The default is False.
8.
In the
Metric
field, specify the metric of the default route.
The valid values range from 0 to 16777214. The default is 0.
9. In the Metric Type field, select the OSPF metric type of the default route.
Two types are supported:
External Type 1
and
External Type 2
. The default is External
Type 2.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure OSPF Settings
To configure the OSPF settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
OSPF and OSPFv3
349
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > OSPF Configuration .
6. In the Router ID field, enter the 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS).
To change the router ID, you must first disable OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
7. In the Admin Mode field, select Enable or Disable .
If you select Enable , OSPF is activated for the switch. The default value is Enable. You must configure a router ID before OSPF can become operational. For more information, see
Configure the Routing IP Settings
8. In the RFC 1583 Compatibility field, select Enable or Disable .
This specifies the preference rules that are used when choosing among multiple
AS-external-LSAs advertising the same destination. If you select Enable , the preference rules are those defined in Section 16.4.1 of the OSPF-2 standard (RFC 2328), which prevents routing loops when AS-external-LSAs for the same destination originated from different areas. The default value is Enable. All routers in the OSPF domain must be configured the same. If all OSPF routers are capable of operating according to RFC
2328, RFC 1583 Compatibility must be disabled.
9. Set the Opaque LSA Status to Enable if OSPF will store and flood opaque LSAs.
OSPF and OSPFv3
350
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
An opaque LSA is used for flooding user-defined information within an OSPF router domain.
10.
When the number of nondefault external LSAs exceeds a configured limit, the router enters an overflow state as defined in RFC 1765.
Use the Exit Overflow Interval field to specify how long in seconds OSPF must wait before attempting to leave overflow state. In overflow state, OSPF cannot originate nondefault external LSAs. If the Exit Overflow Interval is 0, OSPF does not leave the overflow state until it is disabled and reenabled. The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 seconds. The default is 0.
11. Configure the SPF Delay Time .
This is the number of seconds from when OSPF receives a topology change to the start of the next SPF calculation. Delay Time is an integer from 0 to 65535 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. A value of 0 means that there is no delay; that is, the SPF calculation is started upon a topology change.
12. Configure the SPF Hold Time .
This is the minimum time in seconds between two consecutive SPF calculations. The range is 0 to 65,535 seconds. The default time is 10 seconds. A value of 0 means that there is no delay; that is, two SPF calculations can be done, one immediately after the other.
13. Use the External LSDB Limit field to set the number of the external LSDB limit for OSPF.
If the value is –1, then there is no limit. When the number of nondefault AS-external-LSAs in a router’s link state database reaches the external LSDB limit, the router enters overflow state. The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit none-default
AS-external-LSAs in the database. The external LSDB limit must be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and/or any regular OSPF area. The range for the
External LSDB Limit field is –1 to 2147483647. The default value is –1.
14. Use the Default Metric field to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes.
This field is blank if a default metric was not configured. The range of valid values is 1 to
16777214. The default value is 0.
15. Use the Maximum Paths field to set the number of paths that OSPF can report for a given destination.
The range of valid values is 1 to 16. The default value is 4.
16.
Configure the
AutoCost Reference Bandwidth
to control how OSPF calculates link cost.
Specify the reference bandwidth in megabits per second. Unless a link cost is configured, the link cost is computed by dividing the reference bandwidth by the interface bandwidth.
The range is 1 to 4294967. The default is 100.
17. In the Default Passive Setting field, select Enable or Disable from the list to configure the global passive mode setting for all OSPF interfaces.
OSPF and OSPFv3
351
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configuring this field overwrites any present interface level passive mode setting. OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces, but does advertise attached networks as stub networks. The default is Disabled.
18. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 126. OSPF Configuration
Field
ASBR Mode
ABR Status
External LSA Count
External LSA Checksum
AS_OPAQUE LSA Count
AS_OPAQUE LSA Checksum
New LSAs Originated
LSAs Received
Description
The router is an autonomous system boundary router if it is configured to redistribute routes from another protocol, or if it is configured to originate an external LSA advertising the default route.
The router is an autonomous system boundary router if it is configured to redistribute routes from another protocol, or if it is configured to originate an external LSA advertising the default route.
The number of external (LS type 5) LSAs (link state advertisements) in the link state database.
The sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs (link state advertisements) contained in the link state database. This sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state databases of two routers. This value is in hexadecimal.
The number of opaque LSAs with domain-wide flooding scope.
The sum of the LS checksums of the opaque LSAs with domain wide flooding scope. This sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state databases of two routers. This value is in hexadecimal.
In any given OSPF area, a router originates several LSAs. Each router originates a router-LSA. If the router is also the designated router for any of the area's networks, it originates network LSAs for those networks. This value represents the number of LSAs originated by this router.
The number of LSAs (link state advertisements) received that were determined to be new instantiations. This number does not include newer instantiations of self-originated LSAs.
OSPF and OSPFv3
352
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the OSPF Common Area ID
To add or delete an area ID:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Common Area Configuration
.
6. Enter the OSPF Area ID .
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
7. Take one of the following actions:
• Click the Add button.
The area ID is added.
• Click the Delete button.
The area ID is deleted.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 127. OSPF Common Area Configuration
Field
External Routing
Description
A definition of the router's capabilities for the area, including whether or not AS-external-LSAs are flooded into/throughout the area. If the area is a stub area, then these are the possible options for which you can configure the external routing capability; otherwise, the only option is
Import External LSAs .
•
Import External LSAs. Import and propagate external LSAs.
• Import No LSAs. Do not import and propagate external LSAs.
OSPF and OSPFv3
353
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 127. OSPF Common Area Configuration (continued)
Field
SPF Runs
Area Border Router Count
Area LSA Count
Area LSA Checksum
Flood List Length
Import Summary LSAs
Description
The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is typically done using
Dijkstra's algorithm.
The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS external LSAs.
The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements' LSA checksums contained in this area's link state database. This sum excludes external (LSA type 5) link state advertisements. The sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two routers.
This is the number of LSAs on this area's flood list.
The summary LSAs are imported into this area.
Configure the OSPF Stub Area
To configure the OSPF stub area:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Stub Area Configuration .
6. Enter the OSPF Area ID.
OSPF and OSPFv3
354
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
7.
Configure the
Import Summary LSAs
by selecting
Enable
or
Disable
from the list.
If you select Enable , summary LSAs are imported into stub areas.
8. Configure the Default Cost by entering the metric value to be applied for the default route advertised to the stub area.
The valid values range from 1 to 16,777,215.
9.
Click the
Add
button.
The area is configured as a stub area.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 128. OSPF Stub Area Configuration
Field
SPF Runs
Area Border Router Count
Area LSA Count
Area LSA Checksum
Type of Service
Description
The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is typically done using
Dijkstra's algorithm.
The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS external LSAs.
The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements' LSA checksums contained in this area's link state database. This sum excludes external (LSA type 5) link state advertisements. The sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two routers.
This field is the normal ToS associated with the stub metric.
Configure the OSPF NSSA Area
To configure the NSSA area:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
OSPF and OSPFv3
355
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > NSSA Area Configuration .
6. Enter the OSPF Area ID.
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
7. Configure the Import Summary LSAs by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.
If you select Enable , summary LSAs are imported into NSSA areas.
8. Configure the Default Information Originate .
This option lets you advertise a default route into the NSSA when the import of summary
LSAs is disabled.
a.
In the Admin Mode list, select to
Enable
or Disable the default information originate. b. In the Metric Value field, set the default metric value for default information originate. The value range of values is 1 to 16777214.
c. In the Metric Type field, select the type of metric specified in the Metric Value field.
Options are as follows:
• Comparable Cost
. External type 1 metrics that are comparable to the OSPF metric.
• Non-comparable Cost
. External type 2 metrics that are assumed to be larger than the cost of the OSPF metric.
9. Select the Translator Role of the NSSA.
Options are as follows: a. Always . Cause the router to assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a border router.
OSPF and OSPFv3
356
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual b. Candidate . Cause the router to participate in the translator election process when it attains border router status.
10.
In the
Translator Stability Interval
field, configure the translator of the NSSA.
The value is the period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status was deposed by another router. The valid range is 0 to 3600.
11. In the Redistribute Mode field, select Enable or Disable from the list.
This configures the NSSA ABR so that learned external routes are redistributed to the
NSSA.
12. Click the Add button.
The area is configured as an NSSA area.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 129. OSPF NSSA Area Configuration
Field
SPF Runs
Area Border Router Count
Area LSA Count
Area LSA Checksum
Translator State
Description
The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is typically done using
Dijkstra's algorithm.
The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS external LSAs.
The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements' LSA checksums contained in this area's link state database. This sum excludes external (LSA type 5) link state advertisements. The sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two routers.
This field displays if and how the NSSA border router translates Type 7 into Type 5. Possible options are as follows:
• Enabled . The NSSA border router’s translator role is set to always.
• Elected
. The candidate NSSA border router is translating Type 7
LSAs into Type 5.
• Disabled
. The candidate NSSA border router is not translating
Type 7 LSAs into Type 5.
OSPF and OSPFv3
357
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the OSPF Area Range
Configure the OSPF area range:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Area Range Configuration .
6. Enter the OSPF Area ID.
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
7. Enter the IP Address for the address range for the selected area.
8. Enter the Subnet Mask for the address range for the selected area.
9. From the list in the LSDB Type field, select the type of link advertisement associated with the specified area and address range.
Options are as follows: Network Summary or NSSA External . The default type is
Network Summary.
10. In the Advertise list, select Enable or Disable .
If you select Enable , the address range is advertised outside the area through a network summary LSA. The default is Enable.
11. Click the Add button.
The new address range is added.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
OSPF and OSPFv3
358
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the OSPF Interface
To configure the OSPF interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Interface Configuration
.
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
OSPF and OSPFv3
359
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. In the OSPF Area ID field, enter the 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format.
This ID uniquely identifies the OSPF area to which the selected router interface connects.
If you assign an area ID that does not exist, the area is created with default values.
8. In the Admin Mode list, select Enable or Disable .
The default value is Disable . You can configure OSPF parameters without enabling
OSPF admin mode, but the change does not take effect until you enable admin mode.
The following information is displayed only if admin mode is enabled:
• State
• Designated router
• Backup designated router
• Number of link events
• LSA Ack interval
• Metric cost
For OSPF to be fully functional, you must enter a valid ID address and subnet mask. For more information, see
Configure the IP Interface
Note: Once OSPF is initialized on the router, it remains initialized until the router is reset.
9. In the Router Priority field, enter the OSPF priority for the selected interface.
The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255. The default is 1, which is the highest router priority. A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.
10. Configure the Retransmit Interval by entering the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface.
This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default is 5 seconds.
11. Configure the Hello Interval by entering the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface in seconds.
This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. Values range from
1 to 65,535. The default is 10 seconds.
12. Enter the OSPF Dead Interval for the specified interface in seconds.
This specifies how long a router waits to see a neighbor router’s hello packets before declaring that the router is down. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. This value must be a multiple of the hello interval (for example, 4).
The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 40 seconds.
OSPF and OSPFv3
360
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
13. In the Iftransit Delay Interval field, enter the OSPF transit delay for the specified interface.
This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default value is 1 second.
14.
Configure
MTU Ignore
by selecting
Enable
or
Disable
from the list.
MTU Ignore disables OSPF MTU mismatch detection on received database description packets. The default value is Disable (MTU mismatch detection is enabled).
15.
Configure
Passive Mode by selecting
Enable
or
Disable
from the list.
Make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface.
OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks. Interfaces are not passive by default, meaning that the passive mode default is Disable.
16. In the OSPF Network Type list, select Broadcast or Point-to-Point .
OSPF selects a designated router and originates network LSAs only for broadcast networks. No more than two OSPF routers can be present on a point-to-point link. The default network type for Ethernet interfaces is broadcast
.
17.
Select an
Authentication Type
other than
None
by selecting from the list.
The choices are as follows:
• None . This is the initial interface state. If you select this option from the list, no authentication protocols are run. The default is None.
• Simple . You are prompted to enter an authentication key. This key is included, in the clear, in the OSPF header of all packets sent on the network. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key.
• Encrypt
. You are prompted to enter an authentication key and an authentication ID.
Encryption uses the MD5 Message-Digest algorithm. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID.
18.
Enter the
Authentication Key ID
to be used for authentication.
You are prompted to enter an ID only if you select Encrypt as the authentication type. The
ID is a number between 0 and 255, inclusive.
19.
In the
Metric Cost field, enter the link cost.
OSPF uses this value in computing shortest paths. The range is from 1 to 65,535. The default is 1.
20.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
OSPF and OSPFv3
361
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 130. OSPF Interface Configuration
Field
IP Address
Subnet Mask
LSA Ack Interval (secs)
State
Designated Router
Backup Designated Router
Description
The IP address of the interface.
The network mask, indicating the portion of the IP address that identifies the attached network.
The number of seconds to wait before sending a delayed acknowledgement.
The state of the selected router interface. State is one of the following:
• Down . This is the initial interface state. The lower-level protocols indicated that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.
• Loopback . The router's interface to the network is looped back either in hardware or software. The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic.You can get information on the quality of this interface by sending
ICMP pings to the interface or through something like a bit error test.
For this reason, IP packets can still be addressed to an interface in loopback state. To facilitate this, such interfaces are advertised in router- LSAs as single host routes, whose destination is the IP interface address.
• Waiting . The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router for the network by monitoring received hello packets.
The router cannot elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of the waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of the backup designated router.
• Designated Router
. This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node. The network LSA contains links to all routers
(including the designated router) attached to the network.
• Backup Designated Router . This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the LSA flooding, as compared to the designated router.
• Other Designated Router . The interface is connected to a broadcast on which other routers are the designated router and backup designated router. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.
The identity of the designated router for this network, in the view of the advertising router. The designated router is identified here by its router ID.
The value 0.0.0.0 means that there is no designated router. This field displays only if the OSPF admin mode is enabled.
The identity of the backup designated router for this network, in the view of the advertising router. The backup designated router is identified here by its router ID. Set to 0.0.0.0 if there is no backup designated router.
OSPF and OSPFv3
362
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 130. OSPF Interface Configuration (continued)
Field
Number of Link Events
Local Link LSAs
Local Link LSA Checksum
Description
The number of times the specified OSPF interface changed its state.
The number of opaque LSAs whose flooding scope is the link on this interface.
The sum of the checksums of local link LSAs for this link.
View and Clear OSPF Statistics for an Interface
If OSPF is enabled, you can view and clear statistics for the selected interface.
To view and clear OSPF statistics for an interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Interface Statistics
.
OSPF and OSPFv3
363
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the OSPF Interface Selection area of the page, from the list in the Interface field, select the interface for which you want to display statistics.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
8. To clear all the statistics of the OSPF interface, click the Clear button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable OSPF Interface Statistics data that is displayed.
Table 131. OSPF Interface Statistics
Field
OSPF Area ID
Area Border Router Count
AS Border Router Count
Area LSA Count
IP Address
Interface Events
Virtual Events
Neighbor Events
Sent Packets
Received Packets
Discards
Bad Version
Source Not on Local Subnet
Virtual Link Not Found
Area Mismatch
Description
The OSPF area to which the selected router interface belongs. An
OSPF area ID is a 32 bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects.
The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of autonomous system border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS external LSAs.
The IP address of the interface.
The number of times the specified OSPF interface changed its state, or an error occurred.
The number of state changes or errors that occurred on this virtual link.
The number of times this neighbor relationship changed state, or an error occurred.
The number of OSPF packets transmitted on the interface.
The number of valid OSPF packets received on the interface.
The number of received OSPF packets discarded because of an error in the packet or an error in processing the packet.
The number of received OSPF packets whose version field in the
OSPF header does not match the version of the OSPF process handling the packet.
The number of received packets discarded because the source IP address is not within a subnet configured on a local interface.
The number of received OSPF packets discarded where the ingress interface is in a non-backbone area and the OSPF header identifies the packet as belonging to the backbone, but OSPF does not have a virtual link to the packet's sender.
The number of OSPF packets discarded because the area ID in the
OSPF header is not the area ID configured on the ingress interface.
OSPF and OSPFv3
364
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 131. OSPF Interface Statistics (continued)
Field
Invalid Destination Address
Wrong Authentication Type
Authentication Failure
No Neighbor at Source Address
Invalid OSPF Packet Type
Hellos Ignored
Hellos Sent
Hellos Received
DD Packets Sent
DD Packets Received
Description
The number of OSPF packets discarded because the packet's destination IP address is not the address of the ingress interface and is not the AllDrRouters or AllSpfRouters multicast addresses.
The number of packets discarded because the authentication type specified in the OSPF header does not match the authentication type configured on the ingress interface.
The number of OSPF packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender's IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor.
The number of OSPF packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender's IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor.
The number of OSPF packets discarded because the packet type field in the OSPF header is not a known type.
The number of received hello packets that were ignored by this router from the new neighbors after the limit was reached for the number of neighbors on an interface or on the system as a whole.
The number of hello packets sent on this interface by this router.
The number of hello packets received on this interface by this router.
The number of database description packets sent on this interface by this router.
The number of database description packets received on this interface by this router.
LS Requests Sent
LS Requests Received
LS Updates Sent
LS Updates Received
The number of LS requests sent on this interface by this router.
The number of LS requests received on this interface by this router.
The number of LS updates sent on this interface by this router.
The number of LS updates received on this interface by this router.
LS Acknowledgements Sent The number of LS acknowledgements sent on this interface by this router.
LS Acknowledgements Received The number of LS acknowledgements received on this interface by this router.
OSPF and OSPFv3
365
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View the OSPF Neighbor Table and Clear OSPF Neighbors
You can view the OSPF neighbor table list. When a particular neighbor ID is specified, detailed information about a neighbor is given. The information is displayed only if OSPF is enabled. You can also clear OSPF neighbors.
To view the OSPF neighbor table and clear OSPF neighbors:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Neighbor Table .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
7. To clear all the neighbors in the table, click the Clear button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 132. OSPF Neighbor Table
Field
Interface
Neighbor IP Address
Neighbor Interface Index
Router ID
Area ID
Description
The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured. Slot 0 is the base unit.
The IP address of the neighboring router's interface to the attached network. It is used as the destination IP address when protocol packets are sent as unicasts along this adjacency. Also used in router LSAs as the lik ID for the attached network if the neighboring router is selected to be designated router. The neighbor IP address is learned when hello packets are received from the neighbor. For virtual links, the neighbor IP address is learned during the routing table build process.
A unit/slot/port identifying the neighbor interface index.
A 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format representing the neighbor interface.
The area ID of the OSPF area associated with the interface.
OSPF and OSPFv3
366
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 132. OSPF Neighbor Table (continued)
Field
Options
Router Priority
State
State (continued)
Events
Permanence
Hellos Suppressed
Description
An integer value that indicates the optional OSPF capabilities supported by the neighbor. The neighbor's optional OSPF capabilities are also listed in its hello packets. This enables received hello packets to be rejected (for example, neighbor relationships do not even start to form) if there is a mismatch in certain crucial OSPF capabilities.
The OSPF priority for the specified interface. The priority of an interface is a priority integer from 0 to 255. A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.
The state of a neighbor can be the following:
• Down . This is the initial state of a neighbor conversation. It indicates that no recent information was received from the neighbor. On NBMA networks, hello packets can still be sent to Down neighbors, although at a reduced frequency.
• Attempt . This state is valid only for neighbors attached to NBMA networks.
It indicates that no recent information was received from the neighbor, but that a more concerted effort must be made to contact the neighbor. This is done by sending the neighbor hello packets at hello intervals.
• Init . A hello packet was recently seen from the neighbor. However, bidirectional communication was not yet established with the neighbor (for example, the router did not appear in the neighbor's hello packet). All neighbors in this state (or greater) are listed in the hello packets sent from the associated interface.
• 2-Way
. Communication between the two routers is bidirectional. This was assured by the operation of the hello protocol. This is the most advanced state short of beginning adjacency establishment. The backup designated router is selected from the set of neighbors in state 2-way or greater.
• Exchange Start
. This is the first step in creating an adjacency between the two neighboring routers. The goal of this step is to decide which router is the master, and to decide upon the initial DD sequence number. Neighbor conversations in this state or greater are called adjacencies.
• Exchange . The router is describing its entire link state database by sending database description packets to the neighbor. The link state request packets can also be sent asking for the neighbor's more recent LSAs. All adjacencies in the exchange state or greater are used by the flooding procedure. These adjacencies are fully capable of transmitting and receiving all types of OSPF routing protocol packets.
• Loading . Link state request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that were discovered (but not yet received) in the exchange state.
• Full
. The neighboring routers are fully adjacent. These adjacencies now appear in router LSAs and network LSAs.
The number of times this neighbor relationship changed state, or an error occurred.
This variable displays the status of the entry.
Dynamic
and
Permanent
refer to how the neighbor became known.
This indicates whether hellos are being suppressed to the neighbor.
OSPF and OSPFv3
367
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 132. OSPF Neighbor Table (continued)
Field
Retransmission Queue
Length
Up Time
Dead Time
Description
An integer representing the current length of the retransmission queue of the specified neighbor router ID of the specified interface.
Neighbor uptime; how long since the adjacency last reached the Full state.
The amount of time, in seconds, to wait before the router assumes the neighbor is unreachable.
View the OSPF Link State Database
To view the OSPF link state database:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Link State Database .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
OSPF and OSPFv3
368
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 133. OSPF Link State Database
Field
Router ID
Area ID
LSA Type
LS ID
Age
Sequence
Checksum
Description
The 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS). The router ID is set on the
IP Configuration page. To change the router ID you must first disable
OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
The ID of an OSPF area to which one of the router interfaces is connected. An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which an interface is connected.
The format and function of the link state advertisement. LSA Type is one of the following:
•
Illegal
• Router Links
•
Network Links
• Network Summary
•
ASBR Summary
• AS-external
•
Group Member
• NSSA
•
TMP2
• Link Opaque
•
Area Opaque
• AS Opaque
•
Unknown
The link state ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement. The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement's LS type.
The time since the link state advertisement was first originated, in seconds.
The sequence number field is a signed 32-bit integer. It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements. The larger the sequence number, the more recent the advertisement.
The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement.
This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded, or while it is being held in a router's memory. This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, except the LS age field.
OSPF and OSPFv3
369
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 133. OSPF Link State Database (continued)
Field
Options
Description
The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement. The options are as follows:
• Q
. This enables support for QoS traffic engineering.
• E . This describes the way AS external LSAs are flooded.
• MC
. This describes the way IP multicast datagrams are forwarded according to the standard specifications.
• O
. This describes whether opaque LSAs are supported.
• V . This describes whether OSPF++ extensions for VPN/COS are supported.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed in the
External Link State Database (LSDB) table.
Table 134. OSPF External Link State Database Table
Field
Router ID
LSA Type
LS ID
Age
Sequence
Checksum
Description
The 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS). The router ID is set on the
IP Configuration page. To change the router ID you must first disable
OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
The format and function of the link state advertisement. LSA Type is one of the following:
• ASBR Summary
•
AS-external
•
NSSA
•
TMP2
The link state ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement. The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement's LS type.
The time since the link state advertisement was first originated, in seconds.
The sequence number field is a signed 32-bit integer. It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements. The larger the sequence number, the more recent the advertisement.
The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement.
This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded, or while it is being held in a router's memory. This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, except the LS age field.
OSPF and OSPFv3
370
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed in the AS
Opaque Link State Database (LSDB) table.
Table 135. OSPF AS Opaque Link State Database Table
Field
Router ID
LSA Type
LS ID
Age
Sequence
Checksum
Description
The 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS). The router ID is set on the
IP Configuration page. To change the router ID you must first disable
OSPF. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPF for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
The format and function of the link state advertisement. LSA Type is one of the following:
• Area Opaque
•
AS Opaque
• Link Opaque
The link state ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement. The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement's LS type.
The time since the link state advertisement was first originated, in seconds.
The sequence number field is a signed 32-bit integer. It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements. The larger the sequence number, the more recent the advertisement.
The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement.
This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded, or while it is being held in a router's memory. This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, except the LS age field.
Configure the OSPF Virtual Link
To configure the OSPF virtual link:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Virtual Link Configuration .
OSPF and OSPFv3
371
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Area ID field, enter the OSPF area ID.
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
Virtual links can be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common (non-backbone) area.
7. Configure the Neighbor Router ID by entering the neighbor portion of a virtual link specification.
Virtual links can be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common (non-backbone) area.
8. In the Hello Interval field, enter the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface in seconds.
This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 10 seconds.
9. In the Dead Interval field, enter the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface in seconds.
This specifies how long a router waits to see a neighbor router's hello packets before declaring that the router is down. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. This value must be a multiple of the hello interval (for example, 4).
The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 40.
10. In the Iftransit Delay Interval field , enter the OSPF transit delay for the specified interface.
This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default value is 1 second.
11. In the Retransmit Interval field, enter the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface.
This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default is 5 seconds.
OSPF and OSPFv3
372
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
12. From the Authentication Type menu, select one of the following authentication types:
• None . This is the initial interface state.
• Simple
. If you select Simple, you are prompted to enter an authentication key. This key is included, in the clear, in the OSPF header of all packets sent on the network.
All routers on the network must be configured with the same key.
• Encrypt . If you select Encrypt you are prompted to enter both an authentication key and an authentication ID. Encryption uses the MD5 Message-Digest algorithm. All routers on the network must be configured with the same key and ID.
13. In the Authentication Key field, enter the OSPF authentication key for the specified interface.
If you do not select authentication, you are not prompted to enter a key.
•
If you select
Simple
authentication, you cannot use a key of more than 8 octets.
• If you select Encrypt , the key can be up to 16 octets long.
The key value is displayed only if you are logged on with read/write privileges; otherwise, it is displayed as asterisks.
14.
In the
Authentication ID
field, enter the ID to be used for authentication.
You are prompted to enter an ID only when you select Encrypt as the authentication type. The ID is a number between 0 and 255, inclusive.
15.
Click the
Add
button
The new virtual link is added.
16. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 136. OSPF Virtual Link Configuration
Field
Neighbor State
Description
The OSPF interface state can be one of these values:
• Down . This is the initial interface state. The lower-level protocols indicated that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.
• Waiting . The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router by monitoring received hello packets. The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of Waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of backup designated router.
• Point-to-Point
. The interface is operational, and is connected either to the virtual link. On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router. hello packets are sent to the neighbor every hello interval seconds.
OSPF and OSPFv3
373
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 136. OSPF Virtual Link Configuration (continued)
Field
Neighbor State (continued)
State
Metric
Description
• Designated Router . This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network-LSA for the network node. The network- LSA contain links to all routers
(including the designated router) attached to the network.
• Backup Designated Router
. This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the flooding procedure, as compared to the designated router.
• Other Designated Router
. The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be the designated router and backup designated router either. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.
The state of the interface. It takes one the following values:
• Down . This is the initial interface state. The lower-level protocols indicated that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.
• Waiting . The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router by monitoring received hello packets. The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of backup designated router.
• Point-to-Point
. The interface is operational, and is connected either to the virtual link. On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router. hello packets are sent to the neighbor every hello interval seconds.
• Designated Router
. This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network-LSA for the network node. The network- LSA contain links to all routers
(including the designated router) attached to the network.
• Backup Designated Router . This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the flooding procedure, as compared to the designated router.
• Other Designated Router . The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be the designated router and backup designated router either. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.
The metric value used by the Virtual Link.
OSPF and OSPFv3
374
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the OSPF Route Redistribution
You can configure the OSPF Route Redistribution parameters. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.
Configure the OSPF route redistribution:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > Route Redistribution .
6. From the Source menu, select from the list of available source routes that were not previously configured for redistribution by OSPF.
The valid values are as follows:
• BGP
•
Connected
• OSPF
•
RIP
• Static
7. In the Redistribute list, select to Enable or Disable the redistribution for the selected source protocol.
8.
Set the
Metric
value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes.
This fields displays the metric if the source was preconfigured and can be modified. The valid values are 0 to 16777214.
9.
From the
Metric Type list, select the OSPF metric type of redistributed routes.
OSPF and OSPFv3
375
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
10. Set the Tag field in routes redistributed.
This field displays the tag if the source was preconfigured; otherwise, the tag is 0 and can be modified. The valid values are 0 to 4294967295.
11. From the Subnets list, select whether the subnetted routes will be redistributed (Enable) or not (Disable).
12. In the Distribute List field, set the access list that filters the routes to be redistributed by the destination protocol.
Only permitted routes are redistributed. If this command refers to a nonexistent access list, all routes are permitted. The valid values for access list IDs are 1 to 199.
When used for route filtering, the only fields in an access list that get used are as follows:
• Source IP address and netmask
• Destination IP address and netmask
• Action (permit or deny)
All other fields (source and destination port, precedence, ToS, and so on) are ignored.
The source IP address is compared to the destination IP address of the route. The source
IP netmask in the access list rule is treated as a wildcard mask, indicating which bits in the source IP address must match the destination address of the route.
Note: A 1 in the mask indicates a
do not care
in the corresponding address bit.
When an access list rule includes a destination IP address and netmask (an extended access list), the destination IP address is compared to the network mask of the destination of the route. The destination netmask in the access list serves as a wildcard mask, indicating which bits in the route's destination mask are significant for the filtering operation.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View the NSF OSPF Summary
You can view the NSF OSPF summary. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.
To configure the NSF OSPF summary:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
OSPF and OSPFv3
376
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPF > Advanced > NSF OSPF Summary .
6. From the Support Mode list, configure how the unit performs graceful restarts by selecting from the following possible values:
• Always . Indicates that OSPF performs a graceful restart for all planned and unplanned warm restart events.
• Disabled . Disables OSPF performing graceful restarts.
• Planned . Indicates that OSPF performs a graceful restart only when a restart is planned (for example, due to an initiate failover command).
The default is Disabled.
7. Configure the Restart Interval . The valid values are 0 to 1800 in seconds.
The default is 120 seconds.
8. Use the Helper Support Mode field to configure how the unit acts when a neighbor performs a warm restart.
The possible values are as follows:
• Always . Indicates that OSPF helps a restarting neighbor only during all planned and unplanned warm restart events.
• Disabled . Disables OSPF acting as a helpful neighbor.
• Planned . Indicates that OSPF helps a restarting neighbor only during planned events.
The default is Always.
9. Configure Helper Strict LSA Checking by selecting Enable or Disable .
When enabled, the unit exits helper mode whenever the topology changes.
OSPF and OSPFv3
377
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 137. NSF OSPF Summary
Field
Restart Status
Restart Age (seconds)
Restart Exit Reason
Description
The restart status of OSPF Helper feature. The possible values are as follows:
• Not Restarting
•
Planned Restart
• Unplanned Restart
The amount of time since the last restart occurred.
Displays how the master unit on the switch last started up. The possible values are as follows:
• Not Attempted
. Graceful restart was not attempted.
• In Progress
. Restart is in progress.
• Completed
. The previous graceful restart completed successfully.
• Timed Out
. The previous graceful restart timed out.
• T opology Changed . The previous graceful restart terminated prematurely because of a topology change.
Configure OSPFv3
Configure Basic OSPFv3 Settings
To configure the basic OSPFv3 settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Basic > OSPFv3 Configuration .
OSPF and OSPFv3
378
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.
If you select Enable , OSPFv3 is activated for the switch. By default, OSPFv3 is enabled.
You must configure a router ID before OSPFv3 can become operational. For more
Configure the Routing IP Settings
Note: Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router, it remains initialized until the router is reset.
7. Enter the Router ID as a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS).
To change the router ID, you must first disable OSPFv3. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPFv3 for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure OSPFv3 Default Route Advertise Settings
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > OSPFv3 Configuration .
OSPF and OSPFv3
379
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Default Information Originate Enable radio button.
Selecting Enable makes it possible to specify the other settings on this page. Selecting
Disable returns the other fields on this page to their default values.
7. Select the Always True or False radio button.
When set to True, this field sets the router advertise. The default is False.
8. In the Metric field, specify the metric of the default route.
The valid values range from 0 to 16777214. The default is 0.
9. Select the Metric Type External Type 1 or External Type 2 radio button.
This sets the OSPFv3 metric type of the default route. The default is External Type 2.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the Advanced OSPFv3 Settings
To configure the advanced OSPFv3 settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
OSPF and OSPFv3
380
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > OSPFv3 Configuration .
6. Enter the Router ID in 32-bit integer, dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS).
To change the router ID you must first disable OSPFv3. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPFv3 for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
7. In the Admin Mode field, select Enable or Disable .
If you select Enable , OSPFv3 is activated for the switch. The default value is Enable. You must configure a router ID before OSPFv3 can become operational. For more
Configure the Routing IP Settings
Note: Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router, it remains initialized until the router is reset.
8. In the Exit Overflow Interval field, specify the number of seconds that, after entering overflow state, the router must wait before attempting to leave overflow state.
Because OSPFv3 cannot originate nondefault external LSAs while in overflow state, this allows the router to again originate nondefault AS-external-LSAs. If you enter an exit overflow interval of 0, the router does not leave the overflow state until it is restarted. The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 seconds. The default is 0.
When the number of nondefault external LSAs exceeds a configured limit, the router enters an overflow state as defined in RFC 1765.
9. Enter the External LSDB Limit . This is the maximum number of AS-external-LSAs that can be stored in the database.
A value of –1 implies there is no limit on the number that can be saved. The valid range of values is –1 to 2147483647. The default is –1 (no limit).
OSPF and OSPFv3
381
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
10. Use the Default Metric field to set a default for the metric of redistributed routes.
This field displays the default metric if one was already set, or blank if one was not configured earlier. The valid values are 1 to 16777214. The default is 0 (unconfigured).
11. Use the Maximum Paths field to configure the maximum number of paths that OSPFv3 can report to a given destination.
The valid values are 1 to 4.
12. Configure the AutoCost Reference Bandwidth to control how OSPF calculates default metrics for the interface.
The valid values are 1 to 4294967. The default is 100.
13. In the Default Passive Setting , select the Enable or Disable option to configure the global passive mode setting for all OSPF interfaces.
Configuring this field overwrites any present interface-level passive mode setting. OSPF does not form adjacencies on passive interfaces, but does advertise attached networks as stub networks.
14. Use Helper Support Mode to configure how the unit acts when a neighbor performs a warm restart.
The possible values are as follows:
• Planned . OSPF helps a restarting neighbor only during planned events.
• Always . OSPF helps a restarting neighbor during all planned and unplanned warm restart events.
• Disabled . OSPF does not act as a helpful neighbor.
15. Configure Helper Strict LSA Checking by selecting the Enable or Disable option.
When enabled, the unit exits helper mode whenever the topology changes.
16. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 138. Advanced OSPFv3 Configuration
Field
ASBR Mode
ABR Status
External LSA Count
Description
Reflects whether the ASBR mode is enabled or disabled. Enable implies that the router is an autonomous system border router. Router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to redistribute routes learned from other protocol.
The values of this are Enabled or Disabled. Enabled implies that the router is an area border router. Disabled implies that it is not an area border router.
The number of external (LS type 5) link state advertisements (LSAs) in the link state database.
OSPF and OSPFv3
382
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 138. Advanced OSPFv3 Configuration (continued)
Field
External LSA Checksum
New LSAs Originated
LSAs Received
Description
The sum of the LS checksums of the external LSAs contained in the link state database. This sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state databases of two routers.
In any given OSPFv3 area, a router originates several LSAs. Each router originates a router-LSA. If the router is also the designated router for any of the area's networks, it originates network-LSAs for those networks.
This value represents the number of LSAs originated by this router.
The number of LSAs received that were determined to be new instantiations. This number does not include newer instantiations of self-originated LSAs.
Configure the OSPFv3 Common Area
To configure an OSPFv3 common area or return an OSPFv3 common area to the normal state:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Common Area Configuration .
6. In the Area ID field, enter the OSPF area ID.
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
7. Take one of the following actions:
• Click the Add button.
The area is configured as a common area.
• Click the Delete button.
OSPF and OSPFv3
383
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The area is returned to the normal state.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 139. Advanced OSPFv3 Common Area Configuration
Field
External Routing
SPF Runs
Area Border Router Count
Area LSA Count
Area LSA Checksum
Import Summary LSAs
Description
A definition of the router's capabilities for the area, including whether or not AS-external-LSAs are flooded into or throughout the area.
The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is done using Dijkstra's algorithm.
The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS external LSAs.
The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements' LSA checksums contained in this area's link state database. This sum excludes external (LSA type 5) link state advertisements. The sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two routers.
The summary LSAs are enabled or disabled imported into this area.
Configure an OSPFv3 Stub Area
To configure the OSPFv3 stub area:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Stub Area Configuration .
OSPF and OSPFv3
384
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Area ID field, enter the OSPF area ID.
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
7. In the Import Summary LSAs list, select the Enable or Disable option.
If you select
Enable
, summary LSAs are imported into areas. The default is Enable.
8.
In the
Default Cost
field, enter the metric value to be applied for the default route advertised into the stub area.
The valid values range from 1 to 16,777,215. This value is applicable only to stub areas.
9. Click the Add button.
The area is configured as a stub area.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 140. Advanced OSPFv3 Stub Area Configuration
Field
SPF Runs
Area Border Router Count
Area LSA Count
Area LSA Checksum
Type of Service
Description
The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is done using Dijkstra's algorithm.
The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF Pass.
The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS External LSAs.
The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements' LSA checksums contained in this area's link state database. This sum excludes external (LSA type 5) link state advertisements. The sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two routers.
This field is the normal ToS associated with the stub metric.
Configure the OSPFv3 NSSA Area
To configure the OSPFv3 NSSA area:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
OSPF and OSPFv3
385
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > NSSA Area Configuration .
6. In the Area ID field, enter the OSPF area ID.
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
7. Configure the Import Summary LSAs by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.
If you select Enable , summary LSAs are imported into stub areas.
8. Configure the Default Information Originate .
This option permits you to advertise a default route into the NSSA when the import summary LSAs are disabled.
a.
In the Admin Mode list, select to Enable or Disable the default information originate. b. In the Metric Value field, set the default metric value for default information originate. The value range of values is 1 to 16777214.
c. In the Metric Type field, select the type of metric specified in the Metric Value field.
Options are as follows:
• Comparable Cost. External type 1 metrics that are comparable to the OSPF metric.
• Non-comparable Cost . External type 2 metrics that are assumed to be larger than the cost of the OSPF metric.
9. Select the Translator Role of the NSSA.
Options are as follows: a. Always . Cause the router to assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a border router.
OSPF and OSPFv3
386
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual b. Candidate . Cause the router to participate in the translator election process when it attains border router status.
10.
In the
Translator Stability Interval
field, configure the translator of the NSSA.
The value is the period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status was deposed by another router. The valid range is 0 to 3600.
11. In the Redistribute Mode field, select to Enable or Disable .
This configures the NSSA ABR so that learned external routes are redistributed to the
NSSA.
12. Click the Add button.
The area is configured as an NSSA area.
13.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 141. Advanced OSPFv3 NSSA Area Configuration
Field
SPF Runs
Area Border Router Count
Area LSA Count
Area LSA Checksum
Translator State
Description
The number of times that the intra-area route table was calculated using this area's link state database. This is typically done using
Dijkstra's algorithm.
The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS external LSAs.
The 32-bit unsigned sum of the link state advertisements' LSA checksums contained in this area's link state database. This sum excludes external (LSA type 5) link state advertisements. The sum can be used to determine if there was a change in a router's link state database, and to compare the link state database of two routers.
The field tells you if and how the NSSA border router translates Type 7 into Type 5. Possible values are as follows:
• Enabled . The NSSA border router's translator role was set to always.
• Elected . The candidate NSSA border router is translating Type 7
LSAs into Type 5.
• Disabled . The candidate NSSA border router is NOT translating
Type 7 LSAs into Type 5.
OSPF and OSPFv3
387
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the OSPFv3 Area Range
To configure the OSPFv3 area range:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Area Range Configuration .
6. Enter the OSPFv3 Area ID.
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects.
7. Enter the IPv6 Prefix for the address range for the selected area.
8. From the list in the LSDB Type field, select the type of link advertisement associated with the specified area and address range.
Options are: Network Summary or NSSA External . The default type is Network
Summary .
9. In the Advertise field, select the Enable or Disable option.
If you select Enable, the address range is advertised outside the area through a network summary LSA. The default is Enable.
10. Click the Add button.
The new address range is added to the switch.
Configure the OSPFv3 Interface
To configure the OSPFv3 interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
OSPF and OSPFv3
388
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Interface Configuration
.
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. In the Area ID field, enter the 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the OSPFv3 area to which the selected router interface connects.
If you assign an area ID that does not exist, the area is created with default values.
8. Configure the Admin Mode by selecting the Enable or Disable option from the list.
The default value is Disable. You can configure OSPFv3 parameters without enabling
OSPFv3 admin mode, but the settings do not take effect until you enable admin mode.
The following information is displayed only if admin mode is enabled:
• State
• Designated router
• Backup designated router
• Number of link events
OSPF and OSPFv3
389
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• LSA Ack interval
• Metric cost
For OSPFv3 to be fully functional, you must enter a valid IPv6 prefix/prefix length. This can be done using the CLI IPv6 address command.
Note: Once OSPFv3 is initialized on the router, it remains initialized until the router is reset.
9. Configure the Router Priority by entering the OSPFv3 priority for the selected interface.
The priority of an interface is specified as an integer from 0 to 255. The default is 1 , which is the highest router priority. A value of 0 indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.
10. Configure the Retransmit Interval by entering the OSPFv3 retransmit interval for the specified interface.
This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets. The valid values range from 0 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default is 5 seconds.
11. Configure the Hello Interval by entering the OSPFv3 hello interval for the specified interface in seconds.
This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. Value values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 10 seconds.
12. Enter the OSPFv3 Dead Interval for the specified interface in seconds.
This specifies how long a router waits to see a neighbor router’s hello packets before declaring that the router is down. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. This value is a multiple of the hello interval (for example, 4). The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 40 seconds.
13. In the Iftransit Delay Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 transit delay for the specified interface.
This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default value is 1 second.
14. Configure MTU Ignore by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.
MTU Ignore disables OSPF MTU mismatch detection on receiving database description packets. The default value is Disable (MTU mismatch detection is enabled).
15. Configure Passive Mode by selecting Enable or Disable from the list.
Make an interface passive to prevent OSPF from forming an adjacency on an interface.
OSPF advertises networks attached to passive interfaces as stub networks. Interfaces are not passive by default, meaning that the passive mode default is Disable.
OSPF and OSPFv3
390
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
16. Set the OSPFv3 Network Type on the interface by selecting either Broadcast or
Point-to-Point Mode from the list.
OSPFv3 selects a designated router and originates network LSAs only for broadcast networks. No more than two OSPFv3 routers can be present on a point-to-point link. The default network type for Ethernet interfaces is Broadcast.
17.
In the
Metric Cost field, enter the value for the cost Type of Service (TOS).
OSPF uses this value in computing shortest paths. The range is from 1 to 65,535. The default is
1
. Metric Cost is configurable only if OSPFv3 is initialized on the interface.
18.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 142. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Configuration
Field
IPv6 Address
LSA Ack Interval (secs)
State
Description
The IPv6 address of the interface.
The number of seconds between LSA acknowledgment packet transmissions, which must be less than the retransmit interval.
The current state of the selected router interface. State is one of the following:
• Down . This is the initial interface state. The lower-level protocols indicate that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.
• Loopback . The router's interface to the network is looped back in either the hardware or software. The interface is unavailable for regular data traffic.
However, you might want to gain information about the quality of this interface, either through sending ICMP pings to the interface or through something like a bit error test. For this reason, IP packets can still be addressed to an interface in loopback state. To facilitate this, such interfaces are advertised in router LSAs as single host routes, whose destination is the IP interface address.
• Waiting . The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router for the network by monitoring received hello packets. The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of backup designated router.
• Designated Router
. This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network-LSA for the network node. The network-LSA contains links to all routers (including the designated router) attached to the network.
OSPF and OSPFv3
391
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 142. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Configuration (continued)
Field
State (continued)
Designated Router
Backup Designated Router
Number of Link Events
Description
• Backup Designated Router . This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the LSA flooding procedure, as compared to the designated router.
• Other Designated Router . The interface is connected to a broadcast or
NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be either the designated router or backup designated router. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.
Note: The state is displayed only if the OSPFv3 Admin mode is enabled.
The identity of the designated router for this network, in the view of the advertising router. The designated router is identified here by its router ID. The value 0.0.0.0 means that there is no designated router.
Note: This field displays only if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled.
The identity of the backup designated router for this network, in the view of the advertising router. The backup designated router is identified here by its router
ID. Set to 0.0.0.0 if there is no backup designated router.
Note: This field displays only if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled.
This is the number of times the specified OSPF interface changed its state.
Note: This field displays only if the OSPFv3 admin mode is enabled.
View and Clear OSPFv3 Interface Statistics
You can view and clear statistics for the selected interface. The information is displayed only if OSPFv3 is enabled.
To view and clear the OSPFv3 interface statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Interface Statistics .
OSPF and OSPFv3
392
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the OSPFv3 Interface Selection area of the page, in the Interface list, select the interface.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
8. To clear all the statistics of the OSPFv3 interface, click the Clear button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable OSPF Interface Statistics data that is displayed.
Table 143. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Statistics
Field
OSPFv3 Area ID
Area Border Router Count
AS Border Router Count
Description
The OSPFv3 area to which the selected router interface belongs. An
OSPFv3 area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which the interface connects.
The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
The total number of autonomous system border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.
OSPF and OSPFv3
393
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 143. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Statistics (continued)
Field
Area LSA Count
IPv6 Address
Interface Events
Virtual Events
Neighbor Events
Sent Packets
Received Packets
Discards
Bad Version
Virtual Link Not Found
Area Mismatch
Invalid Destination Address
No Neighbor at Source Address
Invalid OSPF Packet Type
Hellos Ignored
Hellos Sent
Hellos Received
DD Packets Sent
DD Packets Received
Description
The total number of link state advertisements in this area's link state database, excluding AS External LSAs.
The IPv6 address of the interface.
The number of times the specified OSPFv3 interface changed its state, or an error occurred.
The number of state changes or errors that occurred on this virtual link.
The number of times this neighbor relationship changed state, or an error occurred.
The number of OSPFv3 packets transmitted on the interface.
The number of valid OSPFv3 packets received on the interface.
The number of received OSPFv3 packets discarded because of an error in the packet or an error in processing the packet.
The number of received OSPFv3 packets whose version field in the
OSPFv3 header does not match the version of the OSPFv3 process handling the packet.
The number of received OSPFv3 packets discarded where the ingress interface is in a non-backbone area and the OSPFv3 header identifies the packet as belonging to the backbone, but OSPFv3 does not have a virtual link to the packet's sender.
The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the area ID in the
OSPFv3 header is not the area ID configured on the ingress interface.
The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the packet's destination IP address is not the address of the ingress interface and is not the AllDrRouters or AllSpfRouters multicast address.
The number of OSPFv3 packets dropped because the sender is not an existing neighbor or the sender's IP address does not match the previously recorded IP address for that neighbor.
The number of OSPFv3 packets discarded because the packet type field in the OSPFv3 header is not a known type.
The number of received hello packets that were ignored by this router from the new neighbors after the limit was reached for the number of neighbors on an interface or on the system as a whole.
The number of hello packets sent on this interface by this router.
The number of hello packets received on this interface by this router.
The number of database description packets sent on this interface by this router.
The number of database description packets received on this interface by this router.
OSPF and OSPFv3
394
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 143. Advanced OSPFv3 Interface Statistics (continued)
Field
LS Requests Sent
LS Requests Received
Description
The number of LS requests sent on this interface by this router.
The number of LS requests received on this interface by this router.
LS Updates Sent
LS Updates Received
The number of LS updates sent on this interface by this router.
The number of LS updates received on this interface by this router.
LS Acknowledgements Sent The number of LS acknowledgements sent on this interface by this router.
LS Acknowledgements Received The number of LS acknowledgements received on this interface by this router.
View the OSPFv3 Neighbor Table and Clear OSPFv3 Neighbors
This page displays the OSPFv3 neighbor table list. This information is displayed only if
OSPFv3 is enabled, and there exists at least one OSPFv3-enabled interface having a valid neighbor. You can also clear OSPFv3 neighbors.
To view the OSPFv3 neighbor table and clear OSPFv3 neighbors:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Neighbor Table .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
7. To clear all the neighbors in the table, click the Clear button.
OSPF and OSPFv3
395
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 144. Advanced OSPFv3 Neighbor Table
Field
Interface
Interface Identifier
Router ID
Area ID
Options
Router Priority
State
Dead Time
Events
Retransmission Queue Length
Description
The interface for which data is to be displayed or configured. Slot 0 is the base unit.
The interface ID that the neighbor advertises in its hello packets on this link.
A 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format representing the router ID of the neighbor on the selected interface.
A 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format representing the area common to the neighbor selected.
A bit mask corresponding to the neighbor's options field.
The priority of this neighbor in the designated router election algorithm.
A value of 0 signifies that the neighbor is not eligible to become the designated router on this particular network.
The state of the relationship with this neighbor.
The amount of time, in seconds, since the last hello was received from adjacent neighbors. Set to 0 for neighbors in a state less than or equal to Init.
The number of times this neighbor relationship changed state, or an error occurred.
An integer representing the current length of the selected neighbor's retransmit queue.
View the OSPFv3 Link State Database
To view the OSPF link state database:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Link State Database .
OSPF and OSPFv3
396
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 145. Advanced OSPFv3 Link State Database
Field
Router ID
Area ID
LSA Type
LS ID
Description
The 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS). The router ID is set on the
OSPFv3 Configuration page. To change the router ID you must first disable
OSPFv3. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPFv3 for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
The ID of an OSPFv3 area to which one of the router interfaces is connected. An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which an interface is connected.
The format and function of the link state advertisement. LSA Type is one of the following:
• Router LSA
. A router can originate one or more router LSAs for a given area. Each router LSA originated in an area describes the collected states of all the router's interfaces to the area.
• Network LSA . A network LSA is originated for every link having two or more attached routers, by the designated router. It lists all the routers attached to the link.
• Inter-Area Router LSA
. This type describes a prefix external to the area, yet internal to the autonomous system. It is originated by an area border router.
• AS-External LSA . This LSA type describes a path to a prefix external to the autonomous system and is originated by an autonomous system border router.
• Link LSA
. A router originates a separate Link LSA for each attached link. It provides router's link local address to routers attached to the link and also inform them of a list of IPv6 prefixes to associate with the link.
• Intra-Area-Prefix LSA . A link's designated router originates one or more intra-area prefix lsas to advertise the link's prefixes throughout the area. A router can originate multiple intra-area-prefix lsas for a given area to advertise its own prefixes and those of its attached stub links.
The link state ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement. The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement's LS type.
OSPF and OSPFv3
397
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 145. Advanced OSPFv3 Link State Database (continued)
Field Description
Age
Sequence
Checksum
Options
The time since the link state advertisement was first originated, in seconds.
The sequence number field is a signed 32-bit integer. It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements. The larger the sequence number, the more recent the advertisement.
The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement. This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded, or while it is being held in a router's memory. This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, except the LS age field.
The Options field in the link state advertisement header indicates which optional capabilities are associated with the advertisement. The options are as follows:
• Q . This enables support for QoS traffic engineering.
• E
. This describes the way AS-external LSAs are flooded.
• MC . This describes the way IP multicast datagrams are forwarded according to the standard specifications.
• O . This describes whether opaque LSAs are supported.
• V
. This describes whether OSPF++ extensions for VPN/COS are supported.
The router-specific options.
Router Options
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed in the
External Link State Database (LSDB) table.
Table 146. Advanced OSPFv3 External Link State Database Table
Field
Router ID
LSA Type
Description
The 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the router within the autonomous system (AS). The router ID is set on the
OSPFv3 Configuration page. To change the router ID you must first disable
OSPFv3. After you set the new router ID, you must reenable OSPFv3 for the change to take effect. The default value is 0.0.0.0, although this is not a valid router ID.
The format and function of the link state advertisement. LSA Type is one of the following:
• Router LSA
. A router can originate one or more router LSAs for a given area. Each router LSA originated in an area describes the collected states of all the router's interfaces to the area.
• Network LSA . A network LSA is originated for every link having two or more attached routers, by the designated router. It lists all the routers attached to the link.
OSPF and OSPFv3
398
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 146. Advanced OSPFv3 External Link State Database Table (continued)
Field
LSA Type
(continued)
LS ID
Age
Sequence
Checksum
Description
• Inter-Area Router LSA
. This type describes a prefix external to the area, yet internal to the autonomous system. It is originated by an area border router.
• AS-External LSA . This LSA type describes a path to a prefix external to the autonomous system and is originated by an autonomous system border router.
• Link LSA
. A router originates a separate link LSA for each attached link. It provides router's link local address to routers attached to the link and also inform them of a list of IPv6 prefixes to associate with the link.
• Intra-Area-Prefix LSA . A link's designated router originates one or more intraarea-prefix LSAs to advertise the link's prefixes throughout the area. A router can originate multiple intra-area-prefix LSAs for a given area to advertise its own prefixes and those of its attached stub links.
The link state ID identifies the piece of the routing domain that is being described by the advertisement. The value of the LS ID depends on the advertisement's LS type.
The time since the link state advertisement was first originated, in seconds.
The sequence number field is a signed 32-bit integer. It is used to detect old and duplicate link state advertisements. The larger the sequence number, the more recent the advertisement.
The checksum is used to detect data corruption of an advertisement. This corruption can occur while an advertisement is being flooded, or while it is being held in a router's memory. This field is the checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement, except the LS age field.
Configure the OSPFv3 Virtual Link
To configure the OSPFv3 virtual link:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Virtual Link Configuration
.
OSPF and OSPFv3
399
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Enter the Area ID of the OSPF area.
An area ID is a 32-bit integer in dotted-decimal format that uniquely identifies the area to which a router interface connects. Virtual links can be configured between any pair of area border routers with interfaces to a common (non-backbone) area.
7. Configure the Neighbor Router ID by entering the neighbor portion of a virtual link specification.
Virtual links can be configured between any pair of area border routers having interfaces to a common (non-backbone) area.
8. In the Hello Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 hello interval for the specified interface in seconds.
This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 10 seconds.
9. In the Dead Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 dead interval for the specified interface in seconds.
This specifies how long a router waits to see a neighbor router's hello packets before declaring that the router is down. This parameter must be the same for all routers attached to a network. This value is a multiple of the hello interval (for example, 4). The valid values range from 1 to 65,535. The default is 40.
10. In the Iftransit Delay Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 transit delay for the specified interface.
This specifies the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over the selected interface. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default value is 1 second.
11. In the Retransmit Interval field, enter the OSPFv3 retransmit interval for the specified interface.
This is the number of seconds between link state advertisements for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link state request packets. The valid values range from 1 to 3600 seconds (1 hour). The default is 5 seconds.
12. Click the Add button
The new virtual link is added to the switch.
13. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
OSPF and OSPFv3
400
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 147. Advanced OSPFv3 Virtual Link Configuration
Field
Neighbor State
State
Description
The state of the virtual neighbor relationship. The OSPFv3 interface state can be any of these values:
• Down . This is the initial interface state.The lower-level protocols indicated that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.
• Waiting . The router is trying to determine the identity of the (backup) designated router by monitoring received hello packets. The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of the waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of the (backup) designated router.
• Point-to-Point
. The interface is operational, and is connected to the virtual link. On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router. The interface sends hello packets to the neighbor at every hello interval seconds.
• Designated Router
. This router is the designated router on the attached network. adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network LSA for the network node. The network- LSA contains links to all routers
(including the designated router) attached to the network.
• Backup Designated Router . This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the flooding procedure, compared to the designated router.
• Other Designated Router . The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be the designated router and backup designated router. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.
The state of the interface. It takes one the following values:
• Down
. This is the initial interface state. The lower-level protocols indicated that the interface is unusable. Interface parameters are set to their initial values. All interface timers are disabled, and there are no adjacencies associated with the interface.
• Waiting
. The router is trying to determine the identity of the backup designated router by monitoring received hello packets. The router is not allowed to elect a backup designated router or a designated router until it transitions out of waiting state. This prevents unnecessary changes of backup designated router.
• Point-to-Point . The interface is operational, and is connected either to the virtual link. On entering this state the router attempts to form an adjacency with the neighboring router. hello packets are sent to the neighbor every hello interval seconds.
OSPF and OSPFv3
401
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 147. Advanced OSPFv3 Virtual Link Configuration (continued)
Field
State
(continued)
Metric
Description
• Designated Router.
This router is the designated router on the attached network. Adjacencies are established to all other routers attached to the network. The router must also originate a network-LSA for the network node. The network- LSA contains links to all routers
(including the designated router) attached to the network.
• Backup Designated Router
. This router is the backup designated router on the attached network. It is promoted to designated router if the present designated router fails. The router establishes adjacencies to all other routers attached to the network. The backup designated router performs slightly different functions during the flooding procedure, as compared to the designated router.
• Other Designated Router
. The interface is connected to a broadcast or NBMA network on which other routers were selected to be the designated router and backup designated router either. The router attempts to form adjacencies to both the designated router and the backup designated router.
The metric value used by the virtual link.
Configure OSPFv3 Route Redistribution
You can configure the OSPFv3 Route Redistribution parameters. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.
To configure the OSPFv3 route redistribution:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > Route Redistribution .
OSPF and OSPFv3
402
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. From the Source menu, select from the list of available source routes that were not previously configured for redistribution by OSPFv3. The valid values are as follows:
• Connected
• Static
7. In the Redistribute Option list, select to Enable or Disable the redistribution for the selected source protocol.
8. Set the Metric value to be used as the metric of redistributed routes.
This fields displays the metric if the source was preconfigured; otherwise, the tag is 0 and can be modified. The valid values are 0 to 16777214.
9. From the Metric Type list, select the OSPFv3 metric type of redistributed routes.
10. Set the Tag field in routes redistributed.
This field displays the tag if the source was preconfigured; otherwise, the tag is 0 and can be modified. The valid values are 0 to 4294967295.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
View the NSF OSPFv3 Summary
You can view the NSF OSPFv3 summary. The allowable values for each field are displayed next to the field. If any invalid values are entered, an alert message is displayed with the list of all the valid values.
To view the NSF OSPF summary:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
OSPF and OSPFv3
403
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Routing > OSPFv3 > Advanced > NSF OSPFv3 Summary .
6. From the Support mode list, select one of the following values:
• Always . OSPF performs a graceful restart for all planned and unplanned warm restart events.
• Disabled . Prevents OSPF from performing graceful restarts.
• Planned . OSPF performs a graceful restart only when a restart is planned (for example, due to an initiate failover command).
The default is Disabled. This setting configure how the unit performs graceful restarts.
7. Configure the Restart Interval .
The valid values are 0 to 1800 in seconds. The default is 120 seconds.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 148. Advanced NSF OSPFv3 Summary
Field
Restart Status
Restart Age (seconds)
Restart Exit Reason
Description
The restart status of OSPF helper feature. The possible values are as follows:
• Not Restarting
•
Planned Restart
• Unplanned Restart
The amount of time since the last restart occurred.
Displays how the master unit on the switch last started up. The possible values are as follows:
• Not Attempted . Graceful restart was not been attempted.
• In Progress
. Restart is in progress.
• Completed . The previous graceful restart completed successfully.
• Timed Out
. The previous graceful restart timed out.
• Topology Changed . The previous graceful restart terminated prematurely because of a topology change.
OSPF and OSPFv3
404
7.
Multicast Routing
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
Multicast Overview
•
Configure Multicast IGMP Settings
•
Configure PIM Settings
•
Configure Multicast Static Routes
•
Configure the Multicast Admin Boundary
•
Configure IPv6 Multicast Settings
7
405
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Multicast Overview
Multicast is best suited for video and audio traffic requiring multicast packet control for optimal operation. Multicast includes support for IGMPv2 and IGMPv3. Communication from point to multipoint is called multicasting. The source host (point) transmits a message to a group of zero or more hosts (multipoint) that are identified by a single IP destination address.
Although the task can be accomplished by sending unicast (point-to-point) messages to each of the destination hosts, multicasting is the more desirable method for this type of transmission. A multicast message is delivered to all members of its destination host group with the same best-efforts reliability as regular unicast IP messages. The message is not guaranteed to arrive intact at all members of the destination group or in the same order relative to other messages.
View the Multicast Mroute Table
To view the Mroute Table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > Multicast > Mroute Table .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 149. Multicast Mroute Table
Field
Group IP
Source IP
Description
The destination group IP address.
The IP address of the multicast packet source to be combined with the group IP to fully identify a single route whose Mroute table entry.
Multicast Routing
406
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 149. Multicast Mroute Table (continued)
Field
Incoming Interface
Outgoing Interfaces
Up Time (hh:mm:ss)
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)
RPF Neighbor
Protocol
Flags
Description
The incoming interface on which multicast packets for this source/group arrive.
The list of outgoing interfaces on which multicast packets for this source/group are forwarded.
The time in seconds since the entry was created.
The time in seconds before this entry ages out and is removed from the table.
The IP address of the reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
The multicast routing protocol which created this entry. The possible values are as follows:
• PIM-DM
•
PIM-SM
• DVMRP
The value displayed in this field is valid if the multicast routing protocol running is PIM-SM. The possible values are
RPT
or
SPT
. For other protocols a “------” is displayed.
Configure Global Multicast Settings
To configure global multicast settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > Multicast > Global Configuration .
Multicast Routing
407
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the administrative status of multicast forwarding in the router.
The default is Disable .
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 150. Multicast Global Configuration
Field
Protocol State
Table Maximum Entry Count
Protocol
Table Entry Count
Description
The operational state of the multicast forwarding module.
The maximum number of entries in the IP multicast routing table.
The multicast routing protocol presently activated on the router, if any.
The number of multicast route entries currently present in the multicast route table.
Configure the Multicast Interface
To configure the multicast interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing > Multicast > Interface Configuration .
Multicast Routing
408
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
•
In the
Go To Interface
field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
•
Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. Enter the TTL Threshold below which a multicast data packet is not forwarded from the selected interface.
Enter a number between 0 and 255. The default is 1. If you enter
0
, all multicast packets for the selected interface are forwarded. You must configure at least one router interface before you see this field.
8.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Global Multicast DVMRP Settings
To configure global multicast DVMRP settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > DVMRP > Global Configuration .
Multicast Routing
409
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This sets the administrative status of DVMRP to active or inactive. The default is Disable.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 151. DVMRP Global Configuration
Field
Version
Total Number of Routes
Reachable Routes
Description
The current value of the DVMRP version string.
The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table.
The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table that use a non-infinite metric.
Configure the DVMRP Interface
To configure the multicast DVMRP interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > DVMRP > Interface Configuration .
Multicast Routing
410
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
•
In the
Go To Interface
field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
•
Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. In the Interface Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the administrative mode of the selected DVMRP routing interface.
The default is Disable.
8.
In the
Interface Metric
field, enter the DVMRP metric for the selected interface.
This value is sent in DVMRP messages as the cost to reach this network. Valid values are 1 to 31. The default value is 1.
9.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 152. DVMRP Interface Configuration
Field
Protocol State
Local Address
Generation ID
Received Bad Packets
Received Bad Routes
Sent Routes
Description
The operational state of the DVMRP protocol on the selected interface, either Operational or Non-Operational.
The IP address used as a source address in packets sent from the selected interface.
The DVMRP generation ID used by the router for the selected interface. This value is reset every time an interface is started and is placed in prune messages. A change in generation ID informs the neighbor routers to discard any previous information about this router.
The number of invalid packets received on the selected interface.
The number of invalid routes received on the selected interface.
The number of routes sent on the selected interface.
Multicast Routing
411
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Search for DVMRP Neighbors
To search for DVMRP neighbors:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > DVMRP > DVMRP Neighbor .
6. Use the Search menu to search for neighbor entries by MAC interface or neighbor IP address:
• Select Interface from the menu, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format (for example 1/0/13), and click the Go button.
If the neighbor entry exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.
• Select Neighbor IP from the menu, enter the neighbor IP address, and click the Go button.
If the entry with the matching neighbor IP exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries. An exact match is required.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 153. DVMRP Neighbor
Field
Interface
Neighbor IP
State
Up Time
Description
Select the interface for which data is to be displayed, or all the interfaces are displayed.
The IP address of the neighbor whose information is displayed
The state of the specified neighbor router on the selected interface, either active or down.
The DVMRP uptime for the specified neighbor on the selected interface. This is the time since the neighbor entry was learned.
Multicast Routing
412
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 153. DVMRP Neighbor (continued)
Field
Expiry Time
Generation ID
Major Version
Minor Version
Capabilities
Received Routes
Received Bad Packets
Received Bad Routes
Description
The DVMRP expiry time for the specified neighbor on the selected interface. This is the time left before this neighbor entry ages out, and is not applicable if the neighbor router's state is down.
The DVMRP generation ID for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.
The DVMRP major version for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.
The DVMRP minor version for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.
The DVMRP capabilities of the specified neighbor on the selected interface.
The number of routes received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.
The number of invalid packets received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.
The number of invalid routes received for the specified neighbor on the selected interface.
View the DVMRP Next Hop Settings
To view the multicast DVMRP Next Hop settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > DVMRP > DVMRP Next Hop .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Multicast Routing
413
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 154. DVMRP Next Hop
Field
Source IP
Source Mask
Next Hop Interface
Type
Description
The IP address used with the source mask to identify the source network for this table entry.
The network mask used with the source IP address.
The outgoing interface for this next hop.
The next hop type. Leaf means that no downstream dependent neighbors exist on the outgoing interface. Otherwise, the type is branch .
View the Multicast DVMRP Prune
To view the multicast DVMRP prune:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > DVMRP > DVMRP Prune .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Multicast Routing
414
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 155. DVMRP Prune
Field
Group IP
Source IP
Source Mask
Expiry Time
Description
The group address that was pruned.
The IP address used with the source mask to identify the source network for this table entry.
The network mask used with the source IP address.
The amount of time remaining before this prune will expire at the upstream neighbor. If no prune messages were received from downstream neighbors, this is set to the value of the default prune lifetime timer; otherwise, it is set to the smallest received value or the default timer, whichever is less.
View the DVMRP Route
To view the multicast DVMRP route:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> Multicast > DVMRP > DVMRP Route
.
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Multicast Routing
415
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 156. DVMRP Route
Field
Source Address
Source Mask
Upstream Neighbor
Interface
Metric
Expiry Time
Up Time
Description
The network address that is combined with the source mask to identify the sources for this entry.
The network subnet mask used with the source IP address to identify the sources for this entry.
The address of the upstream neighbor (for example, RPF neighbor) from which IP datagrams from these sources are received.
The interface on which IP datagrams sent by these sources are received. A value of 0 typically means the route is an aggregate for which no next-hop interface exists.
The distance in hops to the source subnet.
The amount of time remaining before this prune expires at the upstream neighbor. If no prune messages were received from downstream neighbors, this is set to value of the default prune lifetime timer, otherwise it is set to the smallest received value or the default timer, whichever is less.
The time since the route represented by this entry was learned by the router.
Configure Multicast IGMP Settings
You can configure IGMP settings and view IGMP statistics.
Configure IGMP Global Settings
To configure the IGMP global settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > IGMP > Global Configuration .
Multicast Routing
416
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
In the
Admin Mode
field, select the
Enable
or
Disable
option.
This sets the administrative status of IGMP in the router to active or inactive. The default is Disable.
7.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the IGMP Routing Interface
To configure the IGMP routing interface:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select the Routing
> Multicast > IGMP > Routing Interface Configuration .
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
Multicast Routing
417
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
7. In the Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the administrative status of IGMP on the selected routing interface.
The default is Disable.
8. In the Version field, enter the version of IGMP to configure for the selected interface.
Valid values are 1 to 3. The default value is 3. This field is configurable only when IGMP
Interface mode is enabled.
9. In the Robustness field, enter the robustness value.
This variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If you expect the subnet to be lossy, enter a higher number for this parameter. IGMP is robust to robustness variable –1 packet losses. Valid values are 1 to 255. The default value is 2.
10. In the Query Interval field, enter the frequency in seconds at which IGMP host-query packets are to be transmitted on this interface.
Valid values are 1 to 3600. The default value is 125.
11. In the Query Max Response Time field, enter the maximum query response time, in tenths of a second, to be advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface.
The default value is 100. Valid values are 0 to 255.
12. In the Startup Query Interval field, enter the number of seconds between the transmission of startup queries on the selected interface.
Valid values are 1 to 300. The default value is 31.
13. In the Startup Query Count field, enter the number of queries to be sent on startup.
The valid values are 1 to 20. The default value is 2.
14. In the Last Member Query Interval field, enter the last member query interval in tenths of a second.
This is the maximum response time to be inserted into group-specific queries sent in response to leave group messages, and is also the amount of time between group-specific query messages. Valid values are from 0 to 255. The default value is 10.
This value is not used for IGMP version 1.
15. In the Last Member Query Count field, enter the number of queries to be sent on receiving a leave group report.
Valid values are from 1 to 20. The default value is 2.
16. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Multicast Routing
418
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View IGMP Routing Interface Statistics
To view the IGMP routing interface statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> Multicast > IGMP > Routing Interface Statistics
.
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 157. Multicast IGMP Routing Interface Statistics
Field
Interface
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Protocol State
Querier IP
Querier Status
Description
The interface on which the IGMP is enabled.
The IP address of the selected interface.
The subnet mask for the IP address of the selected interface.
The operational state of IGMP on the selected interface, either
Operational or Non-Operational.
The address of the IGMP querier on the IP subnet to which the selected interface is attached.
Indicates whether the selected interface is in querier or non-querier mode.
Multicast Routing
419
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 157. Multicast IGMP Routing Interface Statistics (continued)
Field Description
Querier Up Time
Querier Expiry Time
The time in seconds since the IGMP interface querier was last changed.
The time in seconds remaining before the other querier present timer expires. If the local system is the querier, this is zero.
Wrong Version Queries Received The number of queries that were received on the selected interface with an IGMP version that does not match the IGMP version configured for the interface, over the lifetime of the entry. IGMP requires that all routers on a LAN be configured to run the same version of IGMP.
Therefore, a configuration error is indicated if any queries are received with the wrong version number.
Number of Joins Received
Number of Groups
The number of times a group membership was added on the selected interface; that is, the number of times an entry for this interface was added to the cache table. This gives an indication of the amount of
IGMP activity on the interface.
The current number of entries for the selected interface in the cache table.
View IGMP Groups
To view the IGMP groups:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > IGMP > IGMP Groups .
Multicast Routing
420
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use the Search menu to search for multicast entries by interface or group:
• Select Interface from the menu, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format (for example 1/0/13), and click the
Go
button.
If the entry exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.
• Select Group from the menu, enter the multicast group IP address, and click the Go button.
If the entry exists, that entry with the matching group is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries. An exact match is required.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 158. Multicast IGMP Groups
Field
Interface
Multicast Group IP
Last Reporter
Up Time
Expiry Time
Version 1 Host Timer
Version 2 Host Timer
Compatibility
Filter Mode
Description
The interface for which data is to be displayed.
The IP multicast group address for which data is to be displayed.
The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for the IP multicast group address on the selected interface.
The time elapsed since this entry was created.
The minimum amount of time remaining before this entry is aged out.
The time remaining until the local router assumes that no IGMP version
1 members are on the IP subnet attached to this interface. When an
IGMPv1 membership report is received, this timer is reset to the group membership timer. While this timer is non-zero, the local router ignores any IGMPv2 leave messages for this group that it receives on the selected interface. This field is displayed only if the interface is configured for IGMP version 1.
The time remaining until the local router assumes that no IGMP version
2 members are on the IP subnet attached to this interface. When an
IGMPv2 membership report is received, this timer is reset to the group membership timer. While this timer is non-zero, the local router ignores any IGMPv1 and IGMPv3 leave messages for this group that it receives on the selected interface. This field is displayed only if the interface is configured for IGMP version 2.
This parameter shows group compatibility mode (v1, v2, and v3) for this group on the specified interface.
The source filter mode (
Include
,
Exclude
, or
NA
) for the specified group on this interface. When NA mode is active, the field is blank.
Multicast Routing
421
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View the IGMP Membership
To view the IGMP membership:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > IGMP > IGMP Membership .
6. Use the Search menu to search for multicast entries by interface or group IP address.
• Select Interface from the menu, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format (for example, 1/0/13), and click the Go button.
If the entry exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.
• Select Group IP from the menu, enter the multicast group IP, and click the Go button.
If the entry exists, that entry with the matching group IP address is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries. An exact match is required.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 159. Multicast IGMP Membership
Field
Interface
Group IP
Compatibility Mode
Description
The interface on which multicast packets are forwarded.
The IP multicast group address for which data is to be displayed.
This parameter shows group compatibility mode (v1, v2, and v3) for this group on the specified interface.
Multicast Routing
422
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 159. Multicast IGMP Membership (continued)
Field
Source Filter Mode
Source Hosts
Expiry Time
Description
The source filter mode (
Include
,
Exclude
, or
NA
) for the specified group on this interface. When NA mode is active, the field is blank.
This parameter shows source addresses that are members of this multicast address.
This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address that are members of this multicast group. This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out.
Configure the IGMP Proxy Interface
To configure the IGMP proxy interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> Multicast > IGMP > Proxy Interface Configuration
.
6. Use the Interface list to select the port.
At least one router interface must be configured before you configure or display data for an IGMP proxy interface, and it must not be an IGMP routing interface.
Multicast Routing
423
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
7. Select Enable or Disable from the Admin Mode list.
This sets the administrative status of IGMP proxy on the selected interface. The default is
Disable. Routing, IGMP and Multicast global admin modes must be enabled to enable
IGMP proxy interface mode.
8. In the Unsolicited Report Interval field, enter the unsolicited time interval value in seconds.
The unsolicited report interval is the time between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group. Valid values are from 1 to 260. The default value is 1.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 160. Multicast IGMP Proxy Interface Configuration
Field
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Operational Mode
Querier Address on Proxy
Interface
Number of Groups
Description
The IP address of the IGMP proxy interface.
The subnet mask for the IP address of the IGMP proxy interface.
The operational state of IGMP proxy interface.
The querier address on the proxy interface.
Version
Version 1 Querier Timeout
Version 2 Querier Timeout
Proxy Start Frequency
The current number of multicast group entries for the IGMP proxy interface in the cache table.
Enter the version of IGMP to configure on the selected interface. Valid values are 1 to 3; the default value is 3. This field is configurable only when IGMP proxy Interface mode is enabled.
The older IGMP version 1 querier time-out value in seconds. The older version querier Interval is the time-out for transitioning a host back to
IGMPv3 mode, once an older version query is heard. When an older version query is received, hosts set their older version querier present timer to older version querier Interval.
The older IGMP version 2 querier time-out value in seconds.
The number of times the proxy was brought up.
View the IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics
To view the IGMP proxy interface statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
Multicast Routing
424
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > IGMP > Proxy Interface Statistics .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 161. Multicast IGMP Proxy Interface Statistics
Field
Proxy Interface
Version
Queries Received
Report Received
Reports Sent
Leaves Received
Leaves Sent
Description
The interface on which IGMP packets are received.
The version of IGMP packets received.
The number of IGMP queries received.
The number of IGMP reports received.
The number of IGMP reports sent.
The number of IGMP leaves received.
The number of IGMP leaves sent.
View the IGMP Proxy Membership
To view the IGMP proxy membership:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > IGMP > Proxy Membership .
Multicast Routing
425
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 162. Multicast IGMP Proxy Membership
Field
Proxy Interface
Group IP
Source Hosts
Last Reporter
Up Time
Expiry Time
State
Filter Mode
Number of Sources
Description
The interface on which IGMP proxy is enabled.
The IP multicast group address.
This parameter shows source addresses that are members of this multicast address.
The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for the
IP multicast group address on the IGMP proxy interface.
The time elapsed since this entry was created.
This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address that is a member of this multicast group. This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out.
The state of the host entry. A host can be in one of the state. Non-member state - does not belong to the group on the interface. Delaying member state - host belongs to the group on the interface and report timer running.
The report timer is used to send out the reports. Idle member state - host belongs to the group on the interface and no report timer running.
The group filter mode (Include/Exclude/None) for the specified group on the
IGMP proxy interface.
The number of source hosts present in the selected multicast group.
Multicast Routing
426
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure PIM Settings
You can configure PIM settings and view PIM statistics.
Configure the Multicast PIM Global Settings
Protocol-Independent Multicast (PIM) is a standard multicast routing protocol that provides scalable interdomain multicast routing across the Internet, independent of the mechanisms provided by any particular unicast routing protocol.
To configure the PIM global settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> Multicast > PIM > Global Configuration
.
6. In the Admin Mode field, select the protocol of PIM in the router.
Possible values are Disable , PIM-SM , or PIM-DM . The default is Disable .
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure PIM SSM Settings
While PIM employs a specially configured rendezvous point (RP) router that serves as a meeting junction for multicast senders and listeners, Protocol-Independent Multicast
Single-Source Multicast (PIM-SSM) does not use an RP. It supports only source route delivery trees. It is used between routers so that they can track which multicast packets to forward to each other and to their directly connected LANs. The SSM service model can be implemented with a strict subset of the PIM protocol mechanisms. Both regular IP multicast and SSM semantics can coexist on a single router, and both can be implemented using the
Multicast Routing
427
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
PIM protocol. A range of multicast addresses, currently 232.0.0.0/8 in IPv4 and FF3x::/32 in
IPv6, is reserved for SSM.
To configure PIM SSM settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > PIM > SSM Configuration .
6. In the SSM Group Address field, enter the source-specific multicast group IP address.
7. In the SSM Group Mask field, enter the source-specific multicast group IP address mask.
8. Click the Add button.
The source-specific group is added.
Configure PIM Interface
To configure the multicast PIM interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > PIM > Interface Configuration .
Multicast Routing
428
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. In the Admin Mode field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the administrative status of PIM in the router.
The default is Disable.
8. In the Hello Interval field, enter the time in seconds between the transmission of PIM hello messages on this interface.
The valid values are from 0 to 18000. The default value is 30.
9. In the Join/Prune Interval , enter the time in seconds at which PIM Join/Prune messages are transmitted on this PIM interface. The valid values are from 0 to 18000. The default value is 60.
10. In the BSR Border field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the bootstrap router
(BSR) border status on the selected interface.
11. Enter the DR Priority for the selected interface.
The valid values are from 0 to 2147483647. The default value is 1.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 163. Multicast PIM Interface Configuration
Field
Protocol State
IP Address
Description
The state of PIM in the router. either Operational or Non-Operational.
The IP address of the selected PIM interface. If you enter an IPv6 address, the format is prefix/prefix length.
Multicast Routing
429
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 163. Multicast PIM Interface Configuration (continued)
Field
Designated Router
Neighbor Count
Description
The designated router on the selected PIM interface.
The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface.
View the PIM Neighbor
To view the PIM neighbor:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > PIM > PIM Neighbor .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 164. Multicast PIM Neighbor
Field
Interface
Neighbor IP
Up Time (hh:mm:ss)
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)
Description
The interface on which the neighbor is displayed.
The IP address of the PIM neighbor for this entry.
The time since this PIM neighbor (last) became a neighbor of the local router.
The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor is aged out.
Multicast Routing
430
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
View the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point
To view the multicast PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP):
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> Multicast > PIM > Candidate RP Configuration
.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 165. Multicast PIM Neighbor
Field
Field
Interface
Neighbor IP
Up Time (hh:mm:ss)
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)
Description
Description
The interface on which the neighbor is displayed.
The IP address of the PIM neighbor for this entry.
The time since this PIM neighbor (last) became a neighbor of the local router.
The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor is aged out.
View the PIM Neighbor
To view the multicast PIM neighbor:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Multicast Routing
431
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > PIM > PIM Neighbor .
To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Table 166. Multicast PIM Neighbor
Field
Interface
Neighbor IP
Up Time (hh:mm:ss)
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)
Description
The interface on which the neighbor is displayed.
The IP address of the PIM neighbor for this entry.
The time since this PIM neighbor (last) became a neighbor of the local router.
The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor is aged out.
Configure the PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point
To configure the PIM candidate rendezvous point (RP):
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Multicast Routing
432
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > PIM > Candidate RP Configuration .
6. From the list of interfaces, select the Interface .
7. Enter the Group Address transmitted in candidate-RP-advertisements.
If you enter an IPv6 address, the format is prefix/prefix length.
8. In the Group Mask field, enter the group address mask transmitted in candidate-RP-advertisements
9. In the C-RP Advertisement Interval field, specify the duration in seconds at which the
C-RP messages are unicast to the bootstrap router (BSR).
The range is from 1 to 16383 seconds. The default value is 60 seconds. If this field is submitted without any value, the default value is used.
10. Click the Add button.
The candidate-RP address is added for the PIM router.
Configure the PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate
To configure the multicast PIM bootstrap router (BSR) candidate:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > PIM > BSR Candidate Configuration .
Multicast Routing
433
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. From the list of interfaces, select the Interface .
7. Enter the C-BSR Hash Mask Length to be advertised in bootstrap messages.
This hash mask length is used in the hash algorithm for selecting the RP for a particular group. The valid values are from 0 to 32. The default value is 30.
8. In the Priority field, enter the priority of C-BSR.
9. Enter the Advertisement Interval value of the C-BSR in seconds.
The default value is 60.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 167. Multicast BSR Candidate Configuration
Field
BSR Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)
Description
Time (in hours, minutes and seconds) in which the learned elected bootstrap router (BSR) expires.
IP Address
Next bootstrap Message
(hh:mm:ss)
The IP address of the elected BSR.
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) in which the next bootstrap message is due from this BSR.
Next Candidate RP Advertisement
(hh:mm:ss)
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) in which the next candidate RP advertisement is sent.
Multicast Routing
434
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the PIM Static Rendezvous Point
You can statically configure the rendezvous point (RP) address for one or more multicast groups.
To configure the PIM static RP:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> Multicast > PIM > Static RP Configuration
.
6. In the RP Address field, enter the IP address for one or more multicast groups.
7. In the Group Address field, enter the group address of the RP.
8. Enter the Group Mask of the RP to be created or deleted.
9. In the Override field, select Enable or Disable .
Enable indicates that, if there is a conflict, the RP configured with this option prevails over the RP learned by BSR.
10. Click the Add button.
The static RP address is added for one or more multicast groups
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Multicast Static Routes
To configure multicast static routes:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Multicast Routing
435
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > Static Routes Configuration .
6. In the Source IP field, enter the IP address that identifies the multicast packet source for the entry you are creating.
7. In the Source Mask field, enter the subnet mask to be applied to the source IP address.
8. In RPF Neighbor field, enter the IP address of the neighbor router on the path to the source.
9. In the Metric field, enter the link state cost of the path to the multicast source.
The range is 0 to 255, the default is 1. You can change the metric for a configured route by selecting the static route and editing this field.
10. Click the Add button.
The static route is added to the switch.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the Multicast Admin Boundary
The definition of an administratively scoped boundary is a mechanism to stop the ingress and egress of multicast traffic for a given range of multicast addresses on a given routing interface.
To configure the multicast admin boundary:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
Multicast Routing
436
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> Multicast > Admin Boundary Configuration .
6. In the Interface list, select the router interface for which the administratively-scoped boundary is to be configured.
7. In the Group IP field, enter the multicast group address for the start of the range of addresses to be excluded.
The address must be in the range of 239.0.0.0 through 239.255.255.255.
8. In the Group Mask field, enter the mask to be applied to the multicast group address.
The combination of the mask and the group IP gives the range of administratively scoped addresses for the selected interface.
9. Click the Add button.
The administratively scoped boundary is added.
Configure IPv6 Multicast Settings
View the IPv6 Multicast Mroute Table
You can view the contents of the Mroute Table in tabular format.
To view the Mroute Table:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
Multicast Routing
437
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
5. Select Routing > IPv6 Multicast > Mroute Table .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 168. Multicast Mroute Table
Field
Group IP
Source IP
Incoming Interface
Outgoing Interfaces
Up Time (hh:mm:ss)
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)
RPF Neighbor
Protocol
Flags
Description
The destination group IP address.
The IP address of the multicast packet source to be combined with the group IP to fully identify a single route whose Mroute table entry.
The incoming interface on which multicast packets for this source/group arrive.
The list of outgoing interfaces on which multicast packets for this source/group are forwarded.
The time in seconds since the entry was created.
The time in seconds before this entry ages out and is removed from the table.
The IP address of the reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor.
The multicast routing protocol which created this entry. The possible values are as follows:
•
PIM-DM
• PIM-SM
The value displayed in this field is valid if the multicast routing protocol running is PIM-SM. The possible values are
RPT
or
SPT
. For other protocols a – (hyphen) is displayed.
Configure the IPv6 PIM Global Settings
To configure the IPv6 PIM global settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
Multicast Routing
438
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > IPv6 PIM > Global Configuration .
6. Select an Admin Mode radio button.
The options are Disable , or the protocol variant of PIM option, dense mode ( PIM-DM ) or sparse mode ( PIM-SM ).
By default, this setting is disabled. The Disable option sets the administrative status of
PM in the router to active or inactive.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure IPv6 PIM SSM
While PIM employs a specially-configured rendezvous point (RP) router that serves as a meeting junction for multicast senders and listeners, Protocol-Independent Multicast
Single-Source Multicast (PIM-SSM) does not use an RP. It supports only source route delivery trees. It is used between routers so that they can track which multicast packets to forward to each other and to their directly connected LANs. The SSM service model can be implemented with a strict subset of the PIM protocol mechanisms. Both regular IP multicast and SSM semantics can coexist on a single router, and both can be implemented using the
PIM protocol. A range of multicast addresses, currently 232.0.0.0/8 in IPv4 and FF3x::/32 in
IPv6, is reserved for SSM.
To configure the IPv6 PIM SSM settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > IPv6 PIM > SSM Configuration .
Multicast Routing
439
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the SSM Group Address field, enter the source-specific multicast group IP address.
7. In the SSM Group Mask field, enter the source-specific multicast group IP address mask.
8. Click the Add button.
The source-specific group is added.
Configure the IPv6 PIM Interface
To configure the IPv6 PIM interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > IPv6 PIM > Interface Configuration .
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. In the Admin Mode field, select Enable or Disable .
Multicast Routing
440
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
This sets the administrative status of PIM-SM in the router. The default is Disable.
8. In the Hello Interval field, enter the time in seconds between the transmission of PIM hello messages on this interface.
The valid values are from 0 to 18000. The default value is 30.
9.
In the
Join/Prune Interval
field, enter the frequency at which PIM Join/Prune messages are transmitted on this PIM interface.
The valid values are from 0 to 18000. The default value is 60.
10. In the BSR Border field, select the Enable or Disable option to set the bootstrap router
(BSR) border status on the selected interface.
11.
Enter the
DR Priority
for the selected interface.
The valid values are from 0 to 2147483647. The default value is 1.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 169. IPv6 PIM Interface Configuration
Field
Protocol State
IPv6 Prefix/Length
Designated Router
Neighbor Count
Description
The state of PIM in the router. either Operational or Non-Operational.
The IPv6 address prefix and the length of the selected interface.
The designated router on the selected PIM interface.
The number of PIM neighbors on the selected interface.
View the IPv6 PIM Neighbor
To view the IPv6 PIM neighbor:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > IPv6 PIM > PIM Neighbor
.
Multicast Routing
441
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 170. IPv6 PIM Neighbor
Field
Interface
Neighbor IP
Up Time (hh:mm:ss)
Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss)
Description
The interface on which the neighbor is displayed.
The IP address of the PIM neighbor for this entry.
The time since this PIM neighbor (last) became a neighbor of the local router.
The minimum time remaining before this PIM neighbor is aged out.
Configure the IPv6 PIM Candidate Rendezvous Point
To configure the IPv6 PIM candidate rendezvous point:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > IPv6 PIM > Candidate RP Configuration .
Multicast Routing
442
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. From the list of interfaces, select the Interface .
7. In the Group Address field, enter the group IPv6 address prefix transmitted in candidate-RP-advertisements.
8. In the Prefix Length field, enter the group IPv6 Prefix Length transmitted in candidate-RP-advertisements
9. In the C-RP Advertisement Interval , specify the duration in seconds at which the C-RP messages are unicast to the bootstrap router (BSR).
The range is from 1 to 16383 seconds. The default value is 60 seconds. If this field is submitted without any value, the default value is used.
10. Click the Add button.
The candidate-RP address is added for the PIM router.
Configure the IPv6 PIM Bootstrap Router Candidate Settings
To configure the IPv6 PIM BSR Candidate settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > IPv6 PIM > BSR Candidate Configuration .
Multicast Routing
443
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. From the list of interfaces, select the Interface .
7. Enter the C-BSR Hash Mask Length to be advertised in bootstrap messages.
This hash mask length is used in the hash algorithm for selecting the RP for a particular group. The valid values are from 0 to 128. The default value is 126.
8. In the Priority field, enter the priority of the C-BSR.
9. Enter the Advertisement Interval value of the C-BSR in seconds.
The default value is 60.
To remove the configured Hash Mask Length, and Priority values and restore them to the default values, click the Delete button.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 171. IPv6 PIM BSR Candidate Configuration
Field Description
BSR Expiry Time (hh:mm:ss) Time (in hours, minutes and seconds) in which the learned elected bootstrap router (BSR) expires.
The IP address of the elected BSR.
IP Address
Next bootstrap Message
(hh:mm:ss)
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) in which the next bootstrap message is due from this BSR.
Next Candidate RP Advertisement
(hh:mm:ss)
Time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) in which the next candidate RP advertisement is sent.
Multicast Routing
444
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure the IPv6 PIM Static Rendezvous Point
You can statically configure the rendezvous point (RP) address for one or more multicast groups.
To configure the IPv6 PIM static RP:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > IPv6 PIM > Static RP Configuration
.
6. In the RP Address field, enter the IP address of the RP.
7.
In the
Group Address
field, enter the address of the RP.
8. In the Prefix Length field, enter the group address prefix length.
9.
In the
Override field, select
Enable
or
Disable
.
Enable indicates that, if there is a conflict, the RP configured with this option prevails over the RP learned by BSR.
10. Click the Add button.
The static RP address is added for one or more multicast groups.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure IPv6 MLD Global Settings
To configure the IPv6 PIM global settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Multicast Routing
445
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > MLD > Global Configuration .
6. Select the Admin Mode Disable or Enable radio button.
This sets the administrative status of MLD in the router to active or inactive. The default is
Disable.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure the IPv6 MLD Routing Interface
To configure the IPv6 MLD routing interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > MLD > Routing Interface Configuration .
Multicast Routing
446
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• In the Go To Interface field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
• Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. In the Admin Mode field, select Enable or Disable .
This sets the administrative status of MLD on the selected routing interface. The default is
Disable.
8. In the Version field, enter the version to configure for the selected interface.
Valid values are 1 to 2. The default value is 2.
9. In the Query Interval field, enter the frequency in seconds at which MLD host-query packets are to be transmitted on this interface.
Valid values are 1 to 3600. The default value is 125.
10. In the Query Max Response Time field, enter the maximum query response time, in milliseconds, to be advertised in MLDv2 queries on this interface.
Valid values are 0 to 65535. The default value is 10000 milliseconds.
11. In the Startup Query Interval field, enter the configured interval in seconds between general queries sent by a querier on startup.
The default value is 31.
12. Enter the Startup Query Count value to indicate the configured number of queries sent out on startup, separated by the startup query interval.
The default value is 2.
13. In the Last Member Query Interval field, enter the last member query interval in milliseconds.
This is the maximum response time to be inserted into group-specific queries sent in response to leave group messages, and is also the amount of time between group-specific query messages. Valid values are from 0 to 655355. The default value is
1000 milliseconds.
14. In the Last Member Query Count field, enter the number of queries to be sent on receiving a leave group report.
Valid values are from 1 to 20. The default value is 2.
Multicast Routing
447
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
15. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 172. IPv6 MLD Routing Interface Configuration
Field
Operational Mode
Robustness
Description
The operational status of MLD on the Interface.
The robustness parameter for the selected interface. This variable allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to be lossy, the robustness variable can be increased. MLD is robust to robustness variable –1 packet losses. The default value is 2.
View IPv6 MLD Routing Interface Statistics
To view the IPv6 multicast MLD routing interface statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > MLD > Routing Interface Statistics .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Multicast Routing
448
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 173. IPv6 MLD Routing Interface Statistics
Field Description
Interface
Querier Status
Querier IP
The interface for which data is to be displayed.
Indicates whether the selected interface is an MLD querier or non-querier on the subnet it is associated with.
The address of the MLD querier on the IP subnet to which the selected interface is attached.
Querier Up Time
Querier Expiry Time
The time in seconds since the MLD interface querier was last changed.
The time in seconds remaining before the other querier present timer expires. If the local system is the querier, this is zero.
Wrong Version Queries Received The number of queries received whose MLD version does not match the
MLD version of the interface.
Number of Joins Received The number of times a group membership was added on the selected interface.
Number of Groups The current number of membership entries for the selected interface in the cache table.
View the IPv6 MLD Groups
To view the IPv6 MLD groups:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > MLD > MLD Groups .
6. Use the Search menu to search for multicast entries by interface or group:
• Select Interface from menu, enter the interface in unit/slot/port format (for example
1/0/13), and click the Go button.
Multicast Routing
449
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
If the entry exists, it is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.
• Select Group from the menu, enter the MLD group IP address, and click the Go button.
If the entry exists, it is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.
An exact match is required.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 174. IPv6 Multicast MLD Groups
Field
Interface
Group IP
Last Reporter
Up Time
Expiry Time
Filter Mode
Version 1 Host Timer
Group Compat Mode
Source Hosts
Source Address (Expiry Time)
Description
The interface for which data is to be displayed.
The address of the MLD members.
The IP address of the source of the last membership report received for this multicast group address on the selected interface.
The time elapsed in seconds since the multicast group was known.
Time left in seconds before the entry is removed from the MLD membership table of this interface.
The filter mode of the multicast group on this interface. Possible values are
Include
and
Exclude
.
The time remaining until the router assumes that there are no longer any
MLD version 1 hosts on the specified interface.
The compatibility mode of the multicast group on the interface. The values it can take are MLDv1 and MLDv2.
This parameter shows source addresses that are members of this multicast address.
This parameter shows expiry time interval against each source address that is a member of this multicast group. This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out.
View and Clear IPv6 MLD Traffic
To view and clear IPv6 MLD traffic:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Multicast Routing
450
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > MLD > MLD Traffic
.
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
7. To clear all IPv6 MLD traffic, click the Clear button.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 175. IPv6 Multicast MLD Traffic
Field
Valid MLD Packets Received
Valid MLD Packets Sent
Queries Received
Queries Sent
Reports Received
Reports Sent
Leaves Received
Leaves Sent
Description
The number of valid MLD packets received by the router.
The number of valid MLD packets sent by the router.
The number of valid MLD queries received by the router.
The number of valid MLD queries sent by the router.
The number of valid MLD reports received by the router.
The number of valid MLD reports sent by the router.
The number of valid MLD leaves received by the router.
The number of valid MLD leaves sent by the router.
Configure the IPv6 MLD Proxy Interface
To configure the IPv6 multicast MLD proxy interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
Multicast Routing
451
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > MLD > Proxy Interface Configuration .
6. In the Interface list, select the interface.
7. In the Admin Mode list, select Enable or Disable .
This sets the administrative status of MLD proxy on the selected interface. The default is
Disable. Routing, MLD, and Multicast global admin modes must be enabled to enable
MLD proxy interface mode.
8. In the Unsolicited Report Interval field, enter the unsolicited time interval value in seconds.
The unsolicited report interval is the time between repetitions of a host's initial report of membership in a group. Valid values are 1 to 260. The default value is 1.
9. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 176. IPv6 Multicast MLD Proxy Interface Configuration
Field
IPv6 Prefix
Prefix Length
Operational Mode
Description
The IPv6 address of the MLD proxy interface.
The prefix length for the IPv6 address of the MLD proxy interface.
The operational state of MLD proxy interface.
Multicast Routing
452
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 176. IPv6 Multicast MLD Proxy Interface Configuration (continued)
Field
Querier Address on Proxy
Interface
Number of Groups
Description
The querier address on the proxy interface.
Version
Version 1 Querier Timeout
Proxy Start Frequency
The current number of multicast group entries for the MLD proxy interface in the cache table.
This field is configurable only when MLD proxy interface mode is enabled.
Enter the version of MLD to configure on the selected interface. Valid values are 1 to 2. The default version is 3.
The older MLD version 1 querier time-out value in seconds. The older version querier Interval is the time-out for transitioning a host back to
MLDv2 mode once an older version query is heard. When an older version query is received, hosts set their older version querier present timer to
Older Version querier Interval.
The number of times the proxy was brought up.
View IPv6 MLD Proxy Interface Statistics
To view the IPv6 multicast MLD proxy interface statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > MLD > Proxy Interface Statistics
.
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Multicast Routing
453
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 177. IPv6 Multicast MLD Proxy Interface Statistics
Field
Proxy Interface
Version
Queries Received
Reports Received
Reports Sent
Leaves Received
Leaves Sent
Description
The interface on which MLD proxy packets received.
The version of MLD proxy packets received.
The number of MLD proxy queries received.
The number of MLD proxy reports received.
The number of MLD proxy reports sent.
The number of MLD proxy leaves received.
The number of MLD proxy leaves sent.
View the IPv6 MLD Proxy Membership
To view the IPv6 multicast MLD proxy membership:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > MLD > Proxy Membership .
6. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
Multicast Routing
454
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 178. IPv6 Multicast MLD Proxy Membership
Field
Proxy Interface
Group IP
Source Hosts
Last Reporter
Up Time
Expiry Time
State
Filter Mode
Number of Sources
Description
The interface on which the MLD proxy is enabled.
The IPv6 multicast group address.
Source addresses that are members of this multicast address.
The IPv6 address of the source of the last membership report received for the IPv6 multicast group address on the MLD proxy interface.
The time elapsed since this entry was created.
The expiry time interval against each source address that is a member of this multicast group. This is the amount of time after which the specified source entry is aged out.
The state of the host entry. A host can be in one of the following states:
• Non-member state. Does not belong to the group on the interface.
•
Delaying member state. Host belongs to the group on the interface and report timer running. The report timer is used to send out the reports.
•
Idle member state. Host belongs to the group on the interface and no report timer is running.
The group filter mode (Include/Exclude/None) for the specified group on the
MLD proxy interface. Possible modes are as follows:
• Include
•
Exclude
• None
The number of source hosts present in the selected multicast group.
Configure IPv6 Multicast Static Routes
To configure IPv6 multicast static routes settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select Routing
> IPv6 Multicast > Static Routes Configuration .
Multicast Routing
455
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. In the Source IP field, enter the IP address that identifies the multicast packet source for the entry you are creating.
7. In the Prefix Length field, enter the prefix length to be applied to the Source IPv6 address.
8. In the RPF Neighbor field, enter the IP address of the neighbor router on the path to the source.
9. In the Metric field, enter the link state cost of the path to the multicast source.
The range is 0 to 255; the default is 1. You can change the metric for a configured route by selecting the static route and editing this field.
10. Select the interface number from the RPF Interface list.
This is the interface that connects to the neighbor router for the given source IP address.
11. Click the Add button.
The static route is added to the switch.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Multicast Routing
456
8.
Configure Quality of Service
This chapter covers the following topics:
•
QoS Overview
•
Class of Service
•
Differentiated Services Overview
8
457
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
QoS Overview
In a typical switch, each physical port consists of one or more queues for transmitting packets on the attached network. Multiple queues per port are often provided to give preference to certain packets over others based on user-defined criteria. When a packet is queued for transmission in a port, the rate at which it is serviced depends on how the queue is configured and possibly the amount of traffic present in the other queues of the port. If a delay is necessary, packets get held in the queue until the scheduler authorizes the queue for transmission. As queues become full, packets cannot be held for transmission and get dropped by the switch.
QoS is a means of providing consistent, predictable data delivery by distinguishing between packets with strict timing requirements from those that are more tolerant of delay. Packets with strict timing requirements are given special treatment in a QoS-capable network. With this in mind, all elements of the network must be QoS capable. The presence of at least one node that is not QoS capable creates a deficiency in the network path and the performance of the entire packet flow is compromised.
Class of Service
The Class of Service (CoS) queueing feature lets you directly configure certain aspects of switch queueing. This provides the desired QoS behavior for different types of network traffic when the complexities of DiffServ are not required. The priority of a packet arriving at an interface can be used to steer the packet to the appropriate outbound CoS queue through a mapping table. CoS queue characteristics that affect queue mapping, such as minimum guaranteed bandwidth or transmission rate shaping, are user-configurable at the queue (or port) level.
Eight queues per port are supported.
Use CoS to set the Class of Service trust mode of an interface. Each port in the switch can be configured to trust one of the packet fields (802.1p or IP DSCP), or to not trust any packet’s priority designation (untrusted mode). If the port is set to a trusted mode, it uses a mapping table appropriate for the trusted field being used. This mapping table indicates the CoS queue to which the packet is forwarded on the appropriate egress ports. Of course, the trusted field must exist in the packet for the mapping table to be of any use, so there are default actions performed when this is not the case. These actions involve directing the packet to a specific CoS level configured for the ingress port as a whole, based on the existing port default priority as mapped to a traffic class by the current 802.1p mapping table.
Alternatively, when a port is configured as untrusted, it does not trust any incoming packet priority designation and uses the port default priority value instead. All packets arriving at the ingress of an untrusted port are directed to a specific CoS queue on the appropriate egress port(s), in accordance with the configured default priority of the ingress port. This process is also used for cases where a trusted port mapping cannot be honored, such as when a non-IP packet arrives at a port configured to trust the IP DSCP value.
Configure Quality of Service
458
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Global CoS Settings
To configure global CoS settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS
> CoS > Basic > CoS Configuration
.
Note: You can also navigate to this page by selecting QoS > CoS >
Advanced > CoS Configuration .
6. Use Global to specify all CoS configurable interfaces.
The option Global represents the most recent global configuration settings.
7. Use Interface to specify CoS configuration settings based per-interface.
8. Use Global Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress.
Global Trust Mode can be one of the following:
• untrusted
• trust dot1p
• trust ip-dscp
The default value is trust dot1p.
9. Use Interface Trust Mode to specify whether to trust a particular packet marking at ingress.
Interface Trust mode can be one of the following:
• untrusted
• trust dot1p
• trust ip-dscp
Configure Quality of Service
459
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The default value is untrusted.
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Map 802.1p Priorities to Queues
The 802.1p to Queue Mapping page also displays the Current 802.1p Priority Mapping table.
To map 802.1p priorities to queues:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > 802.1p to Queue Mapping .
6. Use Interface to select interfaces.
You can specify CoS configuration settings per-interface or for all CoS configurable interfaces.
7. Specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding 802.1p value.
The queue number depends on the specific hardware. The 802.1p Priority row contains traffic class selectors for each of the eight 802.1p priorities to be mapped. The priority goes from low (0) to high (3). For example, traffic with a priority of 0 is for most data traffic and is sent using best effort. Traffic with a higher priority, such as 3, might be time-sensitive traffic, such as voice or video.
The values in each list represent the traffic class. The traffic class is the hardware queue for a port. Higher traffic class values indicate a higher queue position. Before traffic in a lower queue is sent, it must wait for traffic in higher queues to be sent.
Configure Quality of Service
460
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Map DSCP Values to Queues
You can specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding DSCP value.
To map DSCP values to queues:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select QoS > CoS > Advanced > IP DSCP to Queue Mapping .
The IP DSCP field displays an IP DSCP value from 0 to 63.
6. For each DSCP value, specify which internal traffic class to map the corresponding IP
DSCP value.
The queue number depends on specific hardware.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Quality of Service
461
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure CoS Interface Settings for an Interface
You can apply an interface shaping rate to all interfaces or to a specific interface.
To configure CoS settings for an interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select QoS > CoS> Advanced > CoS Interface Configuration.
6. Select one of the following options to specify which interfaces are displayed on the page:
• Select LAG to show the list of all LAG interfaces.
• Select All to show the list of all physical as well as LAG interfaces.
7. Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
• Use the Go To Interface field to enter the interface in unit/slot/port format and click the Go button.
The entry corresponding the specified interface is selected.
• Select an interface from the Interface list of all CoS configurable interfaces.
8. Use Interface Trust Mode to specify whether or not to trust a particular packet marking at ingress.
Interface Trust Mode can be one of the following:
• Untrusted
Configure Quality of Service
462
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• 802.1p
•
IP DSCP
The default value is 802.1p.
9.
Use
Interface Shaping Rate
to specify the maximum bandwidth allowed.
This is typically used to shape the outbound transmission rate.This value is controlled independently of any per-queue maximum bandwidth configuration. It is effectively a second-level shaping mechanism. The default value is 0. Valid Range is 0 to 100 in increments of 1. The value 0 means that the maximum is unlimited.
10.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure CoS Queue Settings for an Interface
You can define what a particular queue does by configuring switch egress queues.
User-configurable parameters control the amount of bandwidth used by the queue, the queue depth during times of congestion, and the scheduling of packet transmission from the set of all queues on a port. Each port has its own CoS queue-related configuration.
The configuration process is simplified by allowing each CoS queue parameter to be configured globally or per port. A global configuration change is automatically applied to all ports in the system.
To configure CoS queue settings for an interface:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select QoS > CoS >Advanced > Interface Queue Configuration .
Configure Quality of Service
463
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the check box next to the port or LAG to configure.
You can select multiple ports and LAGs to apply the same setting to the selected interfaces. Select the check box in the heading row to apply a trust mode or rate to all interfaces.
7. Use the Queue ID menu to select the queue to be configured (platform based).
8. Use Minimum Bandwidth to specify the minimum guaranteed bandwidth allotted to this queue.
Setting this value higher than its corresponding maximum bandwidth automatically increases the maximum to the same value. The default value is 0. Valid Range is 0 to 100 in increments of 1. The value 0 means no guaranteed minimum. Sum of individual
Minimum Bandwidth values for all queues in the selected interface cannot exceed defined maximum (100).
9. Queue Management Type displays the queue depth management technique used for queues on this interface.
This is used only if the device supports independent settings per queue. From the Queue
Management Type menu, select either TailDrop or WRED . The default value is
TailDrop .
10. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Quality of Service
464
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure CoS Drop Precedence Settings
To configure CoS Drop Precedence settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > CoS> Advanced > CoS Queue Drop Precedence Configuration.
6. Use Interface to specify all CoS configurable interfaces.
7. Use Queue ID to specify all the available queues.
Valid values are 0 to 6. The default is 0.
8. Use Drop Precedence Level to specify all the available drop precedence levels.
Valid values are 1 to 4. The default is 1.
9. Use WRED Minimum Threshold to specify the weighted RED minimum queue threshold below which no packets are dropped for the current drop precedence level.
The range is 0 to 100. The default is 40.
10. Use WRED Maximum Threshold to specify the weighted RED maximum queue threshold above which all packets are dropped for the current drop precedence level.
The range is 0 to 100. The default is 100.
Configure Quality of Service
465
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
11. Use WRED Drop Probability Scale to determine the packet drop probability for the current drop precedence level.
The range is 0 to 100. The default is 10.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 179. CoS Interface Queue Drop Precedence Status
Field
Interface
Queue ID
Drop Precedence Level
WRED Minimum Threshold
WRED Maximum Threshold
WRED Drop Probability Scale
Description
The CoS configurable interface.
The queue ID.
The drop precedence level.
The weighted RED minimum queue threshold value.
The weighted RED maximum queue threshold value.
The packet drop probability value.
Differentiated Services Overview
The QoS feature contains Differentiated Services (DiffServ) support that allows traffic to be classified into streams and given certain QoS treatment in accordance with defined per-hop behaviors.
Standard IP-based networks are designed to provide best effort data delivery service. Best effort service implies that the network delivers the data in a timely fashion, although there is no guarantee. During times of congestion, packets might be delayed, sent sporadically, or dropped. For typical Internet applications, such as e-mail and file transfer, a slight degradation in service is acceptable and in many cases unnoticeable. Conversely, any degradation of service has undesirable effects on applications with strict timing requirements, such as voice or multimedia.
To use DiffServ for QoS, you must first define the following categories and their criteria:
1. Class . Create classes and define class criteria.
2. Policy . Create policies, associate classes with policies, and define policy statements.
3. Service . Add a policy to an inbound interface.
Packets are classified and processed based on defined criteria. The classification criteria are defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes can be defined on a per–class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs. A policy can contain multiples classes. When the policy is active, the actions taken depend on which class matches the packet.
Configure Quality of Service
466
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Packet processing begins by testing the class match criteria for a packet. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.
DiffServ Wizard Overview
The DiffServ wizard enables DiffServ on the switch by creating a traffic class, adding the traffic class to a policy, and then adding the policy to the ports that you select. The DiffServ wizard does the following:
• Creates a DiffServ class and defines match criteria used as a filter to determine if incoming traffic meets the requirements to be a member of the class.
• Sets the DiffServ class match criteria based on traffic type selection as follows:
• VOIP
. Sets the match criteria to UDP protocol.
• HTTP . Sets the match criteria to HTTP destination port.
• FTP
. Sets match criteria to FTP destination port.
• Telnet . Sets the match criteria to Telnet destination port.
• Every
. Sets the match criteria for all traffic.
• Create a Diffserv policy and add it to the DiffServ class created.
•
If policing is enabled (that is, it is set to YES), the DiffServ policy style is set to simple.
Traffic that conforms to the class match criteria is processed according to the outbound priority selection. The outbound priority configures the handling of conforming traffic as follows:
• High
. Sets the policing action to markdscp ef.
• Med . Sets the policing action to markdscp af31.
• Low
. Sets the policing action to send.
• If policing is disabled (that is, it is set to NO), all traffic is marked as follows:
• High
. Sets the policy mark to ipdscp ef.
• Med . Sets the policy mark to ipdscp af31.
• Low
. Sets the policy mark to ipdscp be.
• Each port selected is added to the policy created.
Use the DiffServ Wizard
To use the DiffServ Wizard:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
Configure Quality of Service
467
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select QoS
> DiffServ > DiffServ Wizard .
6. Use Traffic Type to define the DiffServ Class .
Traffic type options are: VOIP , HTTP , FTP , Telnet , and Every .
7. Ports displays the ports which can be configured to support a DiffServ policy .
The DiffServ policy is added to selected ports.
8. Use Enable Policing to add policing to the DiffServ p olicy.
The policing rate to be applied.
9. Specify the Committed Rate:
• When Policing is enabled, the committed rate is applied to the policy and the policing action is set to conform.
• When Policing is disabled, the committed rate is not applied and the policy is set to markdscp.
10. Specify the Outbound Priority:
• When Policing is enabled, Outbound Priority defines the type of policing conform action where: High sets action to markdscp ef, Med sets the action to markdscp af31, and Low sets the action to send.
• When Policing is disabled, Outbound Priority defines the policy where: High sets the policy to mark ipdscp ef, Med sets policy to mark ipdscp af31, and Low sets the policy to mark ipdscp be.
11. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Quality of Service
468
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure Basic DiffServ Settings
Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria. The filtering criteria is defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes can be defined on a per–class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs.
The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class. Then one or more classes are added to a policy. Policies are then added to interfaces.
Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet. The all class type option specifies that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class. The
any
class type option specifies that at least one match criteria must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class. Classes are tested in the order in which they were added to the policy. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.
To configure the basic DiffServ settings:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS
> DiffServ > Basic > DiffServ Configuration
.
Configure Quality of Service
469
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. Select the administrative mode for DiffServ:
• Enable . Differentiated Services are active. This the default mode.
• Disable . The DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed but it is not active.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information that is displayed.
Table 180. DiffServ Configuration
Field
Class Table
Class Rule Table
Policy Table
Policy Instance Table
Policy Attributes Table
Service Table
Description
The current and maximum number of classifier entries in the table.
DiffServ classifiers differentiate among traffic types.
The current and maximum number of class rule entries in the table.
Class rules specify the match criteria that belong to a class definition.
The current and maximum number of policy entries in the table. The policy determines the traffic conditioning or service provisioning actions applied to a traffic class.
The current and maximum number of policy-class instance entries in the table. A policy-class instance is a policy that is associated with an existing DiffServ class.
The current and maximum number of policy attribute entries in the table. A policy attribute entry attaches various policy attributes to a policy-class instance.
The current and maximum number of service entries in the table. A service entry associates a DiffServ policy with an interface and inbound or outbound direction.
Configure the Global DiffServ Settings
Packets are filtered and processed based on defined criteria. The filtering criteria are defined by a class. The processing is defined by a policy's attributes. Policy attributes can be defined on a per-class instance basis, and it is these attributes that are applied when a match occurs.
The configuration process begins with defining one or more match criteria for a class. Then one or more classes are added to a policy. Policies are then added to interfaces.
Packet processing begins by testing the match criteria for a packet. The
all
class type option specifies that each match criteria within a class must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class. The
any
class type option specifies that at least one match criteria must evaluate to true for a packet to match that class. Classes are tested in the order in which they were added to the policy. A policy is applied to a packet when a class match within that policy is found.
Configure Quality of Service
470
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
To configure the global DiffServ mode:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Diffserv Configuration
.
6. Select the administrative mode for DiffServ:
• Enable . Differentiated Services are active.
• Disable . The DiffServ configuration is retained and can be changed, but it is not active.
7. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the information displayed in the Status table on the DiffServ
Configuration page.
Table 181. DiffServ Status
Field
Class Table
Class Rule table
Description
The number of configured DiffServ classes out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured class rules out of the total allowed on the switch.
Configure Quality of Service
471
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Table 181. DiffServ Status (continued)
Field
Policy table
Policy Instance table
Policy Attributes table
Service table
Description
The number of configured policies out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured policy class instances out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured policy attributes (attached to the policy class instances) out of the total allowed on the switch.
The number of configured services (attached to the policies on specified interfaces) out of the total allowed on the switch.
Configure a DiffServ Class
You can add a new DiffServ class name or rename or delete an existing class. You can also define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class. As packets are received, these DiffServ classes are used to prioritize packets. You can use multiple match criteria in a class. The logic is a Boolean logical-AND for this criteria. After creating a class, click the class link to the
Class page.
To configure a DiffServ class:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Class Configuration .
Configure Quality of Service
472
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6. To create a new class, enter a class name , select the class type , and click the Add button.
This field also lists all the existing DiffServ class names, from which one can be selected.
The switch supports only the Class Type value All , which means all the various match criteria defined for the class is satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND of all the match criteria. You can select the class type only when you are creating a new class. After the class is created, the Class Type field becomes nonconfigurable.
7.
To rename an existing class, select the check box next to the configured class, update the name.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
9.
After creating a class, click the class name
for an existing class.
The class name is a hyperlink.
The Class Configuration page displays, showing the configuration fields for the class.
10. To configure the class details, complete the fields:
• Class Name . The name for the configured DiffServ class.
• Class Type
. The DiffServ class type.
Configure Quality of Service
473
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
You can select the class type only when you are creating a new class. After you create the class, this field displays the class type, but you cannot change it.
11. Define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class:
• Match Every . This adds to the specified class definition a match condition whereby all packets are considered to belong to the class.
• Reference Class . Select this option to reference another class for criteria. The match criteria defined in the reference class is as match criteria in addition to the match criteria you define for the selected class. After selecting this option, the classes that can be referenced are displayed. Select the class to reference. A class can reference at most one other class of the same type.
• Class of Service . Select this option to require the Class of Service (CoS) value in an
Ethernet frame header to match the specified CoS value. This option lists all the values for the Class of Service match criterion in the range 0 to 7 from which one can be selected.
• VLAN . Select this option to require a packet’s VLAN ID to match a VLAN ID or a
VLAN ID within a continuous range. If you configure a range, a match occurs if a packet’s VLAN ID is the same as any VLAN ID within the range. The VLAN value is in the range of 0–4093.
• Secondary Class of Service . Select this option to require the secondary Class of
Service (CoS) value in an Ethernet frame header to match the specified secondary
CoS value.
• Secondary VLAN . Select this option to require a packet’s VLAN ID to match a secondary VLAN ID or a secondary VLAN ID within a continuous range. If you configure a range, a match occurs if a packet’s secondary VLAN ID is the same as any secondary VLAN ID within the range. After you select this option, use the following fields to configure the secondary VLAN match criteria:
Secondary VLAN ID Start . The secondary VLAN ID to match or the secondary
VLAN ID with the lowest value within a range of VLANs.
Secondary VLAN ID End . The secondary VLAN ID with the highest value within the range of VLANs. This field is not required if the match criteria is a single VLAN
ID.
• Ethernet Type . Select this option to require the EtherType value in the Ethernet frame header to match the specified EtherType value. After you select this option, specify the EtherType Keyword from the list of common protocols that are mapped to their
Ethertype value.
• Source MAC Address . Select this option to required a packet’s source MAC address to match the specified MAC address. After you select this option, use the following fields to configure the source MAC address match criteria:
MAC Address . The source MAC address to match.
MAC Mask . The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the source MAC address to compare against the Ethernet frame. Use F’s and zeros to configure the MAC mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result
Configure Quality of Service
474
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual in a match (where x is any hexadecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard mask, which ACLs use.
• Source MAC Mask . This is a bit mask in the same format as a MAC address indicating which part(s) of the source MAC address to use for matching against packet content.
• Destination MAC Address
. Select this option to require a packet’s destination MAC address to match the specified MAC address. After you select this option, use the following fields to configure the destination MAC address match criteria:
MAC Address . The destination MAC address to match.
MAC Mask
. The MAC mask, which specifies the bits in the destination MAC address to compare against an Ethernet frame. Use F’s and zeros to configure the MAC mask. An F means that the bit is checked, and a zero in a bit position means that the data is not significant. For example, if the MAC address is aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff, and the mask is ff:ff:00:00:00:00, all MAC addresses with aa:bb:xx:xx:xx:xx result in a match (where x is any hexidecimal number). Note that this is not a wildcard mask, which ACLs use.
• Destination MAC Mask . This is a bit mask in the same format as a MAC address indicating which part(s) of the destination MAC address to use for matching against packet content.
• Protocol Type
. This lists the keywords for the Layer 4 protocols from which one can be selected. The list includes 'other' as an option for the remaining values.
• Source IP Address
. This is a valid source IP address in the dotted-decimal format.
• Source Mask . This is a bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which part(s) of the source IP address to use for matching against packet content.
• Source L4 Port . Select this option to require a packet's TCP/UDP source port to match the specified port or the port number within a range of port numbers. If you configure a range, a match occurs if a packet's source port number is the same as any source port number within the range. After you select this option, use the following fields to configure a source port keyword, source port number, or source port range for the match criteria:
Protocol . Select the desired L4 keyword from the list on which the match is based. If you select a keyword, the other source port configuration fields are not available.
Port End
. A user-defined L4 source port number to match or the source port number with the lowest value within a range of ports.
Port Start
. The source port with the highest value within the range of ports.
This field is not required if the match criteria is a single port.
• Destination IP Address
. This is a valid destination IP address in the dotted-decimal format.
• DestinationMask
. This is a bit mask in IP dotted-decimal format indicating which part(s) of the destination IP address to use for matching against packet content.
• Destination L4 Port
. Select this option to require a packet's TCP/UDP destination port to match the specified port or the port number within a range of port numbers. If you configure a range, a match occurs if a packet's destination port number is the
Configure Quality of Service
475
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual same as any destination port number within the range. After you select this option, use the following fields to configure a destination port keyword, destination port number, or destination port range for the match criteria:
Protocol . Select the desired L4 keyword from the list on which the match is based. If you select a keyword, the other destination port configuration fields are not available.
Port End . A user-defined L4 destination port number to match or the destination port number with the lowest value within a range of ports.
Port Start . The destination port with the highest value within the range of ports. This field is not required if the match criteria is a single port.
• IP DSCP . Select this option to require the packet's IP DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) value to match the specified value. The DSCP value is defined as the high-order six bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header. After you select this option, use one of the following fields to configure the IP DSCP match criteria.
IP DSCP Keyword . The IP DSCP keyword code that corresponds to the IP
DSCP value to match. If you select a keyword, you cannot configure an IP
DSCP value.
IP DSCP Value . The IP DSCP value to match.
• Precedence Value . Select this option to require the packet's IP Precedence value to match the number configured in the IP Precedence Value field. The IP Precedence field in a packet is defined as the high-order three bits of the Service Type octet in the
IP header.
• IP ToS . Select this option to require the packet's Type of Service (ToS) bits in the IP header to match the specified value. The IP ToS field in a packet is defined as all eight bits of the Service Type octet in the IP header. After you select this option, use the following fields to configure the ToS match criteria:
• ToS Bits . Enter a two-digit hexadecimal number octet value in the range 00 to ff to match the bits in a packet’s ToS field.
• ToS Mask . Specify the bit positions that are used for comparison against the IP
ToS field in a packet.
12. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Class
Summary at the bottom of the DiffServ Advanced Class Configuration page.
Table 182. DiffServ Class Configuration - Class Summary
Field
Match Criteria
Values
Description
The configured match criteria for the specified class.
The values of the configured match criteria.
Configure Quality of Service
476
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
Configure DiffServ IPv6 Class Settings
You can add a new IPv6 DiffServ class name, or to rename or delete an existing class. You can also define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class. As packets are received, these
DiffServ classes are used to prioritize packets. You can use multiple match criteria in a class.
The logic is a Boolean logical-AND for this criteria. After creating a class, click the class link to the Class page.
To configure DiffServ IPv6 class settings:
1.
Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3.
Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4.
Click the
Login
button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > IPv6 Class Configuration .
6. To create a new class, enter a class name , select the class type , and click the Add button.
This field also lists all the existing DiffServ class names, from which one can be selected.
The switch supports only the Class Type value All , which means all the various match criteria defined for the class is satisfied for a packet match. All signifies the logical AND of all the match criteria. Only when a new class is created, this field is a selector field. After class creation this becomes a nonconfigurable field displaying the configured class type.
7.
To rename an existing class, select the check box next to the configured class, and update the name
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
9. After creating a class, click the class name for an existing class.
The class name is a hyperlink.
Configure Quality of Service
477
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The Class Configuration page displays, showing the configuration fields for the class.
Configure Quality of Service
478
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
10. To configure the IPv6 class, complete the fields:
• Class Name . The name for the configured DiffServ class.
• Class Type
. The DiffServ class type.
You can specify the class type only when you are creating a new class. After the class is created, this field displays the class type, but you cannot change it.
11. Define the criteria to associate with a DiffServ class:
• Match Every . This adds to the specified class definition a match condition whereby all packets are considered to belong to the class.
• Reference Class . This lists the class(es) that can be assigned as reference class(es) to the current class.
• Protocol Type . This lists the keywords for the Layer 4 protocols from which one can be selected. The list includes 'other' as an option for the remaining values.
• Source Prefix Length . This is a valid source IPv6 prefix to compare against an IPv6
Packet. Prefix is always specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be entered in the range of 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and the prefix length can be entered in the range of 0 to 128.
• Source L4 Port . This lists the keywords for the known source Layer 4 ports from which one can be selected. The list includes 'other' as an option for the unnamed ports.
• Destination Prefix/Length
. This is a valid destination IPv6 prefix to compare against an IPv6 packet. The prefix is always specified with the prefix length. The prefix can be entered in the range of 0 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF and the prefix length can be entered in the range of 0 to 128.
• Destination L4 Port
. This lists the keywords for the known destination Layer 4 ports from which one can be selected. The list includes 'other' as an option for the unnamed ports.
• Flow Label . This is a 20-bit number that is unique to an IPv6 packet, used by end stations to signify Quality of Service handling in routers. The flow label can be specified in the range of 0 to 1048575.
• IP DSCP
. You can select a keyword for the known DSCP values. The list includes
Other as an option for the remaining values.
12. Match Criteria . Displays the configured match criteria for the specified class.
13. Values
. Displays the values of the configured match criteria.
14. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Configure Quality of Service
479
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed in the Class
Summary at the bottom of the DiffServ Advanced IPv6 Class Configuration page.
Table 183. DiffServ IPv6 Class Configuration - Class Summary
Field
Match Criteria
Values
Description
The configured match criteria for the specified class.
The values of the configured match criteria.
Configure DiffServ Policy
You can associate a collection of classes with one or more policy statements. After creating a policy, click the policy link to the Policy page.
To configure DiffServ policy:
1. Launch a web browser.
2. In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5. Select QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Policy Configuration .
6. Use Policy Name to uniquely identify a DiffServ policy using a case-sensitive alphanumeric string from 1 to 31 characters.
7. In the Member Class list, select a DiffServ class.
This lists all existing DiffServ classes currently defined as members of the specified policy. This list is automatically updated as a new class is added to or removed from the policy. This field is a selector field only when an existing policy class instance is to be removed. After removal of the policy class instance this becomes a nonconfigurable field.
8. Policy Type . The traffic flow direction to which the policy is applied.
• In indicates the type is specific to inbound traffic direction.
• Out indicates the type is specific to outbound traffic direction.
Configure Quality of Service
480
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
9. Click the Add button.
The new policy is added to the switch.
10.
To configure the policy attributes, click the name of the policy.
The policy name is a hyperlink.
The Policy Configuration page displays, showing the configuration fields for the policy.
11. Select the Assign Queue to which packets of this policy-class are assigned.
This is an integer value in the range 0 to 6.
12.
Configure the policy attributes:
• Drop
. Select the drop radio button. This flag indicates that the policy attribute is defined to drop every inbound packet.
• Mark VLAN CoS
. This is an integer value in the range from 0 to 7 for setting the VLAN priority.
• Mark CoS as Secondary Cos
. This option marks outer VLAN tag priority bits of all packets as the inner VLAN tag priority. This essentially means that the inner VLAN tag CoS is copied to the outer VLAN tag CoS.
• Mark IP Precedence . This is an IP precedence value in the range from 0 to 7.
Configure Quality of Service
481
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Mirror
• Redirect
• Two Rate Policy . With the two-rate policer, you can enforce traffic policing according to two separate rates: Committed Rate and Peak Rate.
• Mark IP DSCP . This lists the keywords for the known DSCP values from which one can be selected. The list includes 'other' as an option for the remaining values.
• Simple Policy . Use this attribute to establish the traffic policing style for the specified class. This command uses single data rate and burst size resulting in two outcomes
(conform and violate).
13. If you select the Simple Policy attribute, you can configure the following fields:
• Color Mode . This lists the color mode. The default is Color Blind .
Color Blind
Color Aware
Color Aware mode requires the existence of one or more color classes that are valid for use with this policy instance. A valid color class contains a single, non-excluded match criterion for one of the following fields (provided the field does not conflict with the classifier of the policy instance itself):
CoS
IP DSCP
IP Precedence
• Committed Rate . This value is specified in the range 1 to 4294967295 kilobits-per-second (Kbps).
• Committed Burst Size . This value is specified in the range 1 to 128 KBytes. The committed burst size is used to determine the amount of conforming traffic allowed.
• Conform Action . This lists the actions to be taken on conforming packets according to the policing metrics, from which one can be selected. The default is send.
• Violate Action . This lists the actions to be taken on violating packets according to the policing metrics, from which one can be selected. The default is send.
• For each of the action selectors one of the following actions can be taken:
• Drop . These packets are immediately dropped.
• Mark IP DSCP . These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified DSCP value before being presented to the system forwarding element. This selection requires that the DSCP field be set.
• Mark CoS . These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified CoS value before being presented to the system forwarding element. This selection requires that the Mark CoS field be set.
• Mark CoS As Secondary CoS . Select this option to mark all packets in a traffic stream with the specified secondary CoS queue number. Use the Class of Service field to select the CoS value to mark in the priority field of the 802.1p header in the secondary (inner) 802.1Q tag of a double VLAN tagged packet. If the packet does not already contain this header, one is inserted.
Configure Quality of Service
482
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
• Send . These packets are presented unmodified by DiffServ to the system forwarding element.
• Mark IP Precedence . These packets are marked by DiffServ with the specified IP
Precedence value before being presented to the system forwarding element. This selection requires that the Mark IP Precedence field be set.
14. If you select Two Rate , you can configure additional fields (same fields as for a simple policy).
15.
Click the
Apply
button.
Your settings are saved.
The following table describes the nonconfigurable information displayed on the page.
Table 184. DiffServ Policy Configuration - Policy Attribute
Field
Policy Name
Policy Type
Member Class Name
Description
Displays name of the DiffServ policy.
Displays type of the policy as In.
Displays name of each class instance within the policy.
Configure the DiffServ Service Interface
To configure the DiffServ service interface:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Interface Configuration
.
Configure Quality of Service
483
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
6.
Use one of the following methods to select an interface:
•
In the
Go To Interface
field, enter the interface in the unit/slot/port format and click on the Go button.
•
Next to the Interface column, select the check box for the interface that you want to configure.
7. Policy Name . Lists all the policy names from which one can be selected.
This field is not shown for read/write users where the inbound service policy attachment is not supported by the platform.
8. Click the Apply button.
Your settings are saved.
Table 185. Service Interface Configuration
Field
Direction
Operational Status
Description
Shows that the traffic direction of this service interface is In.
Shows the operational status of this service interface, either Up or
Down.
View DiffServ Service Statistics
This page displays class-oriented statistical information for the policy, which is specified by the interface and direction. The Member Class list is populated on the basis of the specified interface and direction and hence the attached policy (if any). Highlighting a member class name displays the statistical information for the policy-class instance for the specified interface and direction.
To view the DiffServ service statistics:
1. Launch a web browser.
2.
In the address field of your web browser, enter the IP address of the switch.
Configure Quality of Service
484
M4300 Series and M4300-96X Fully Managed Switches User Manual
The login window opens.
3. Enter the user name and password.
The default admin user name is admin
and the default admin password is blank, that is, do not enter a password.
4. Click the Login button.
The System Information page displays.
5.
Select
QoS > DiffServ > Advanced > Service Statistics
.
6. Use the Search menu to search for DiffServ statistics by interface or member class:
• To search by interface, select Interface , enter the interface in unit/slot/port format (for example, 1/0/13), and click the Go button.
If the entry exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries.
• To search by member class, select Member Class , enter the member class, and click the Go button.
If an entry with a matching member class exists, the entry is displayed as the first entry, followed by the remaining entries. An exact match is required.
7. To refresh the page with the latest information on the switch, click the Update button.
The following table describes the information available on the Service Statistics page.
Table 186. DiffServ Service Statistics
Field
Interface
Direction
Description
List of all valid slot number and port number combinations in the system with a DiffServ policy currently attached in In direction.
List of the traffic direction of interface as In. Sho